Design

There is little doubt the Nemo Tensor Trail Ultralight Insulated sleeping pad is aimed fair and square at the weight-weenies amongst us, and the crew at Nemo Equipment have hit the nail on the head in that regard. Weighing in at a featherweight 369 grams (g), the Tensor Trail Ultralight Insulated fits the bill for the gram-shavers and packs down to a respectable 25.5cm x 9.5cm. Nemo tech boffins have snuck in an internal layer of metallised Thermal Mirror film to help reflect body heat, in turn delivering an R-value of 2.5, perfect for warm weather wanderings.

Inflating to 182cm x 51cm (regular mummy), the Tensor Trail Ultralight uses a Spaceframe baffle design of fabric trusses to distribute weight evenly, offering side sleepers a generous 8.9cm thick cushy platform. The bluesign-approved 20-denier (D)nylon (top) and 40D nylon (base) balance weight-saving with durability, and the micro-adjustable Laylow valve allows rapid inflation and deflation. The Nemo Tensor Trail Ultralight Insulated is delivered in four sizes: the 183cm long regular (395g), regular wide (491g) and regular-mummy (369g) and for the six-footers amongst us, a 193cm long-wide (520g). All pads come packaged with a compression strap, Vortex pump sack, and stuff sack that boosts the trail weight an extra 80 odd grams, but kudos to the Nemo team for publishing a 451g ‘trail weight’ in addition to the 369g ‘sleeping pad’ only weight. 

In the field

In evaluating sleeping pads here at AGA, we tend to consider six key elements: size, weight, warmth, noise, comfort, and cost. The Nemo Tensor Trail Ultralight Insulated sleeping pad excels in most of these areas, with a highlight being the 8.9 cm thickness delivered in a 450-ish gram package. We say ‘450-ish’ because… 

When we rolled our 369g regular mummy with the Vortex pump sack, compression strap and stuff sack, our scales weighed it in at 455g. Still, this pad can happily be considered exceptionally lightweight, making it ideal for backpackers focused on minimising their load. The compressed pad is comparable in size with other similarly specced ultra-light sleeping pads, but with an asking price of $299, it happily falls in the more budget-friendly segment of the market. 

The Vortex pump sack works exactly as it should, and the micro-adjustable Laylow valve is a real highlight. It sits flush with the pad when not in use but easily inflates it, offering rapid deflation via a simple tab pull. One of the key features of the Nemo Tensor Trail Ultralight is its quiet construction. Unlike many inflatable pads that like to rustle like a koala convention in a pile of eucalypt leaves, the Tensor Trail Ultralight sleeps quieter than some other ultralight pads we’ve tested. With an R-value of 2.5, the Tensor Trail Ultralight is most certainly best suited for mild to moderate three-season use, so certainly not alpine expeditions, but it was warm enough for our outings on mild winter nights on the NSW coast.

The final word on the Nemo Tensor Trail Ultralight Insulated

The Nemo Tensor Trail Ultralight Insulated is best suited for activities where weight and packability are crucial and conditions do not demand the highest level of insulation. It offers a great combination of light weight, compact packed size, comfort, and adequate insulation for three-season use, making it a versatile choice for hikers, backpackers, and campers in temperate climes, especially those who might want to sneak in a crafty brew or two… 

RRP: $299 See Nemo Equipment for more info on its complete sleeping pad range.

The post Nemo Equipment Tensor Trail Ultralight sleeping pad: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Reserve 30SL wheelset (available in 29-inch size only) should not be viewed as simply a ‘lighter version’ of the Reserve 30HD (skewed more toward aggressive riders/enduro bikes).

The 30SL wheelset is of asymmetrical design and features a wider and lower rim profile (with 3mm less cross-sectional depth compared to the 30HD), with the aim of adding strength and lateral rigidity to the wheels (further enhanced by the unique ‘over-built’ reinforced spoke holes – a clever way of countering the force that part of the wheel cops when riding). The new rim profile is claimed to improve vertical compliance for comfort and increase traction levels. That new rim shape is also designed to make fitment of tyres easier, with a tighter bead/rim connection. 

The 29-inch wheelset on test here features 28 spokes front and rear and is fitted with an Industry Nine Hydra hub (XD, six-bolt only). You can option the Reserve 30SL with a DT350 hub as well, for both XD (six-bolt) and Shimano Microspline (six-bolt). The Hydra hub option for Shimano Microspline is CentreLock-only.

The 30SL wheels also feature the nifty Reserve Fillmore valves. These nifty items claim three times the air input compared to the standard Presta valve, are designed to eliminated sealant clogging, and include a cool micro-adjust feature: a light push down on the top of the valve allows small amounts of air to escape to set optimum tyre pressure. 

Overall weight for this Hydra hub-equipped wheelset is just 1750 grams (including valves and rim tape). More impressive, though, is the fact there is no rider weight limit (this tester rejoices!) and the wheelset comes with a lifetime warranty.

In the field

As a (very) long-time mountain biker, I can still remember the first carbon MTB wheelsets, and more specifically, how stiff they were. Today’s carbon hoops are far removed from those earlier incarnations and the Reserve 30SL wheelset is an excellent example of how much more testing and thought has gone into its design. 

The trails ridden during testing have been primarily around the Sydney MTB haven of the Northern Beaches; sandstone-laden, rocky and rooty, and often with loose dirt/sand over the harder under-surface. In other words, near-ideal test ground for MTB wheels. The much-mentioned designers’ attention to vertical compliance has paid off big-time with the Reserve 30SL: the wheels provide great damping over rougher, vibration-inducing surfaces, and offer good stability and traction. Bigger hits have been absorbed well, too, with no notable deflection when hitting obstacles at an unfavourable angle. With all this talk of damping, it’s worth noting that there is not too much; the rider’s ‘feel’ of the wheels is retained, and it’s easy to keep the wheels (and bike) pointed in the right direction.

One big mis-jump brought an awfully loud thump from the rear end, but close inspection saw no discernible damage (except to this rider’s ego). The spokes have stayed in alignment to date, the Fillmore valves have become more appreciated than expected, and that Industry Nine Hydra hub just keeps spinning fast and free (but yeah, with that not-so-quiet buzz!). The only thing we haven’t tested yet is tyre fitment, but that will be reported in our final review of the Tallboy. In short, the Reserve 30SL wheelset has simply done its job, but it has done it notably well, to the point where this former alloy-wheel-only believer has seen how a well-designed and engineered carbon wheelset can improve your ride quality and efficiency. 

The final word on the Reserve 30SL wheels

Upgrading your MTB’s wheelset is probably one of the biggest (and most beneficial, in terms of bang for bucks) things you can do for an improved ride on the trails, but it ain’t cheap. The Reserve 30SL wheelset shows exactly why this is the case; a well-damped ride that does not sacrifice accurate and fast directional input, an impressively light weight, and what seems like bombproof construction, are all positives of the Reserve 30SL wheelset. For those downcountry XC/trail riders, who sometimes tackle trails more in the enduro spectrum, the 30SL is more than up for it. 

Yes, they will put a sizeable hole in your wallet (although they sit mid-range in price compared to other equivalent carbon hoops on the market, and we reckon the DT350-equipped 30SL looks a great buy), but with all of those aforementioned positives – and that lifetime warranty – we’d have to say that, for riders looking to get more out of their bike on the trails most of us ride, the Reserve 30SL carbon wheelset is an investment worth contemplating.

RRP: $3399 (Industry Nine Hydra 110 hub six-bolt XD, as tested; Shimano Microspline CentreLock);
$2299 (DT350 110 hub six-bolt XD; six-bolt Microspline)

See Reserve Wheels for more info on its full model range. Reserve wheels are sold at Cervelo and Santa Cruz dealers across Australia.

The post Reserve 30SL wheels: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Mont’s Helium range aims to maximise the warmth to weight ratio of your sleeping bag, which makes it an ideal place to start your search for a warm and lightweight winter sleeping bag. As most of my winter camping takes place around Canberra and nearby Kosciuszko National Park, I opted for the warmest bag in the range, the Mont Helium 680.

Design

The Helium 680 is a lightweight sleeping bag filled with 800+ loft premium RDS white duck down. It has a lower temperature rating of -6 to -12 degrees Celsius, making it ideal for winter campouts. Prioritising packability, the sleeping bag packs down to a relatively small 16x33cm (smaller if really cinched into the stuff sack) and weighs around 1.1kg.

While the bags are a mummy shape, the internal shoulder room is a generous 160cm circumference, tapering down to 115.5cm circumference in the foot box (in the standard size bag). Further warmth and comfort inducing features include the box foot area at the bottom of the bag, a contoured hood, vertical baffles on the torso and a down filled 3D draft tube along the zipper, to name a few. 

In the field

Having previously tested out the Mont Zero Superlight sleeping bag, I was already familiar with the quality to be found in Mont sleeping bags and the 680 was no exception. The first thing I noticed on unpacking the 680 was how much larger it is than the Zero. It still packs away into a small enough package to fit in a saddlebag, or at the bottom of a hiking pack, but once released from the stuff sack, it lofts and expands into a reassuringly puffy sleeping bag.

As mentioned above, the ample shoulder room and foot box give the sleeping bag a roomy, comfortable feel – even when wearing extra layers – and it doesn’t feel as restrictive as other mummy bags. The hood really was warm, and I found that I used the elasticated cinch to shrink the opening smaller and help trap in all that hot air my body was generating.  

The Mont compression sack that’s included with the sleeping bag does a great job at compressing the bag, but if you’re planning on using this bag on winter bikepacking adventures, you might want to find a compression bag that creates a longer narrower package as the wider diameter of the included stuff sack makes it an unsuitable shape for a bikepacking saddlebag. However, I did find that I was able to squish the bag into the saddle bag using a normal dry bag and the compression of the saddlebag itself. This is, of course, not a problem when taking the Helium 680 hiking as it easily fits inside a hiking pack.

The final word on the Mont Helium 680

Mont is renowned for producing high quality camping gear and I have been super impressed with my experiences with the Helium range. With the Helium 680 the company has struck a terrific balance between lightweight packability, and a seriously warm sleeping bag and it’s been reassuring to know that I’ve got a warm night ahead of me no matter what the Australian winter throws at me.

RRP: $999.95 See Mont for more info on the entire Helium sleeping bag range.

The post Mont Helium 680 sleeping bag: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Terrain Vista 3L Pro may seem like a ‘standard’ outer shell in appearance, but it includes a number of clever design cues underneath the 100-percent recycled body fabric’s Desert Rust exterior (other options are Black and Smoked Pearl – a grey). The Terrain Vista 3L Pro utilises TNF’s high-end DryVent 3L technology in a 70-denier (D) weight for optimum breathability, durability, and protection from the elements. DryVent differs from a membrane-based waterproof setup, instead using multi-layered fabric to stop water ingress, while adding a DWR (Durable Water Repellency) treatment to the outer side. 

The jacket is a standard fit and includes an adjustable hem (with internal cinch-cord and cord-lock), along with an adjustable, three-piece hood. This hood includes a bonded brim – anyone who has worn a jacket without a ‘stiff’ brim will know what we are talking about; there’s nothing worse than rainwater slamming your unprotected eyes when you’re trying to see where you’re going. The front zip is a wide, water-repellent VISLON® (injection-moulded plastic) jobbie, while the jacket ups the ‘tech’ a bit with pit-zips that assist ventilation. The two secure-zip hand pockets are bellowed, to allow for more stowage space, while the cuff tabs are adjustable. 

In the field with the Terrain Vista 3L Pro

We have now had the Terrain Vista 3L Pro for around five months and, after its initial testing during a wild, wet, and humid February, it’s been the go-to outer shell for other outdoor adventures through til June. In use, it has, simply, done the job it has been designed for, with minimal fuss. The aforementioned humidity saw the pit-zips called in to action early on in testing and we’ve utilised them quite often since then, as well. The ability to tweak ventilation easily is a big plus; the pit-zips are easy to reach and use (i.e., they are not too small for large hands to grab) when you need to do it quickly. Hood adjustments are another quick fix as/when necessary.

We found the outer fabric to be more than up to rough treatment (one tester, who will remain nameless, accidentally trod on the jacket on a track at one point and then dragged it with their foot a couple of steps – don’t ask…) and the amount of interior room has been welcome, too. Even with cooler conditions that have meant adding a mid-weight layer underneath, there is still plenty of ‘wiggle-room’, with the jacket never feeling too tight or restrictive.

One negative is the length of the jacket when combined with a lack of articulation – it is quite short for those with a longer torso. By this we mean that, when you’re reaching above your shoulders, arms raised, the jacket rides up quite high, leaving your lower back exposed to the conditions. I will add the caveat that two of our testers are longer torso types, and this is by no means a deal-breaker; it is just something for those who lean more toward that type of body-shape to be aware of.  

The final word on The North Face Terrain Vista 3L Pro Jacket

Outer shell jackets are a huge part of the outdoor retail scene. The North Face Terrain Vista 3L Pro Jacket is not the cheapest option, but its mix of essentials and extra features, along with the high quality of its manufacture, do make it a worthwhile purchase. 

The standout through our five months of testing has been the jacket’s breathability and robustness. The DryVent 3L tech is TNF’s high-end offering in regard to breathable fabric and having this available on a not-uber-expensive outer shell, is a big win in our eyes. Plus, we really like that colour. Check it out if you’re in the market. 

RRP: $450 See The North Face for more info on this and all other TNF apparel.

The post The North Face Terrain Vista 3L Pro Jacket: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The North Face Gold Kazoo Eco sleeping bag is a comfortable and affordable +2 degree to +7 degree (Comfort rating) bag from the brand’s sustainable range and designed to be eco-friendly, with 100% recycled 20D nylon shell fabric, and a non-PFC durable water-repellent finish. Weighing in at a light 602 grams, the bag delivers a lengthy design, fitting users to 183cm tall and offering a spacious 157cm shoulder, 145cm hip and 107cm foot circumference.

This bag varies from many traditional mummy bags in that it offers a generous interior with unique hand pockets to allow sleepers to curl up like in a quilt, as well as two 2/3 two-way side zippers (comes in Left and Right) and an oversized lay-flat hood (that can be cinched close). The bag also offers trapezoidal side-chamber baffles to reduce cold spots and retain loft. A 22.9cm x 39.4cm stuff sack is supplied and the compressed bag will happily ‘squidge’ (tech term) down to an impressive 20 cm x 20 cm (58cm circumference) ball.

In the field

The Gold Kazoo Eco sleeping bag offers a great combo of insulated warmth and packability for adventures in warmer climates. The large internal volume fits most users and allows for extra room to throw in clothes to keep warm for those chillier mornings. The compressed bag is super light and super small, easily shoved into a corner of a pack, but lofts large when allowed to air. The spacious shoulder-width coupled with lay-flat hood means the bag is great for warm nights, but a lack of any foot zips can limit airflow if needed. Dual self-locking 2/3 zips are a bonus but can be finicky and took an occasional jiggle on our bag to ‘unlock’.

The hand pockets are a personal preference we’re still debating. One tester fell in love with the system and ability to snuggle the bag around like an eiderdown while another found the large air-gap in the chest/shoulder area difficult to seal, and thus too cool for chillier nights. 

The final word on The North Face Gold Kazoo Eco

There’s no doubt that The North Face Gold Kazoo Eco is a fantastic lightweight goose-down bag for general adventures like bikepacking, kayaking and trekking. For some, the relaxed fit with plenty of room and hand pockets for curling up will be a blessing, for others the extra space and idea of curling up will have no appeal. The good news is whether you’re a lover or hater, The North Face Gold Kazoo Eco sleeping bag is one step better for the environment – and a decent three-season sleeping bag, hand pockets or not.

RRP: $550 See The North Face for more info on this and all the brand’s outdoor gear.

The post The North Face Gold Kazoo Eco sleeping bag: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Of all the MTB segments these days, it’s the ‘trail’ one that is closest to that all-encompassing ‘mountain bike’ description, which used to just mean a bike that had adequate climbing ability, was comfortable on longer rides, and to be not too out of place bombing slightly steeper terrain. For iconic US mountain bike brand, Santa Cruz, its Tallboy is the epitome of that. Our testing team has always been big fans of this short-travel MTB wunderkind, so it was with huge excitement – and many thanks to Cisco and Vanessa from Bikes N Shocks for the bike-build – we took delivery of our latest long-term test bike: a Gloss White Santa Cruz Tallboy CC XX SL AXS RSV. 

Design

This fifth incarnation of the Tallboy retains the then slightly radical geometry changes of the previous generation Tallboy, released in 2019. That was when Santa Cruz provided a new take on what a short-travel bike could be, shoehorning enduro-style, long and slack geometry (lower-mounted as well) into a bike with 120mm rear travel, and 130mm of squish up front. At the time, the Tallboy was lauded as an ideal bike for close to 90 per cent of the riding population. Indeed, Santa Cruz marketed it as “the downhiller’s cross-country bike”, alluding to its versatility. This fifth-gen version has received a few subtle tweaks to geometry and suspension kinematics, proving Santa Cruz’s designers got it pretty close to right with the previous-gen. 

We’ve scored the top-tier model for our long-termer, and it is, literally, covered in all the conceivable MTB bling you can think of in regard to specs, hence all those acronyms. A Rockshox Pike Ultimate fork provides 130mm of travel up front, while a lower-link driven Factory Fox Float DPS works in synergy Santa Cruz’s Virtual Pivot Point (VPP) suspension system to offer 120mm of rear travel. 

The beefy looking frame is available in two carbon lay-ups – C and CC – with the CC frame (as featured in our Large tester) being lighter in weight, but with both offering the same strength. It features proportional geometry, ensuring each frame size has the appropriate seat-tube angle (it steepens as the frame size goes up) and optimised rear centre for each size, as well. Sizes range from XS to XXL (a rarity in the MTB world, these days, but appreciated). The frame has Boost 148mm spacing, a maximum tyre width of 2.5-inch, and you can increase fork travel to 140mm if you really think it’ll make a difference (more on that later). For those Luddites among us (yes, me included) there’s a threaded bottom bracket, and the frame comes with a lifetime warranty. Finally, there’s a Universal Derailleur Hanger (UDH), as well as Santa Cruz’s take on in-frame storage, dubbed the Glovebox.

Adhering to the long, low, slack theory, the Tallboy has a 65.5-degree head angle and a low bottom bracket height of 335mm (when the shock’s adjustable flip-chip is set to HI; it is 332mm when set to LO). Our Large size tester has a 76.8-degree seat-tube angle and 1227mm wheelbase, with 475mm of reach and there is 698mm of standover (all these figures are when the flip-chip is in HI). 

Befitting this top-tier model’s heady price tag – and explaining those acronyms – there is no expense spared on this bike’s fit-out, with SRAM’s 12-speed XX SL Eagle AXS Transmission pushing your leg power to a set of carbon-fibre Reserve (RSV) 30SL wheels, fitted with Industry Nine Hydra hubs and rolling on Maxxis tyres (on our tester: a Dissector 29×2.4WT Maxx Terra EXO/TR front; Rekon 29×2.4WT Maxx Terra EXO/TR rear). Stopping power is provided by SRAM’s Level Ultimate Stealth 4-Piston brakes (180mm discs front/rear) while, perhaps surprisingly, the dropper is the cable-operated OneUp V2, rather than SRAM’s wireless AXS option. The bike weighs in at around 12.9kg.

For Tallboy 5, Santa Cruz fiddled with the suspension kinematics a bit, endeavouring to provide a bit more traction via reducing the anti-squat, while a changed leverage curve allows a bit more ‘wiggle-room’ (read: less push through the travel) when the suspension is really challenged on bigger hits. Yep, that’s an impressive list of specs, but does all this bling work in the real world, on the trails? Well…

In the field

In the Tallboy’s first month in the Aus Geo ADVENTURE shed it has spent a frustrating amount of time stationary, due to the horrendous amount of rain we’ve had in Sydney, and the number of trails closed as a result. Nonetheless, a brief flurry (read: about two weeks) of sunny weather and drying tracks has seen this uber-bike out on our local trails each day. In short, some may have laughed at Santa Cruz’s claim of this being the downhiller’s XC bike but the Tallboy’s performance to date, across a variety of trails, does reinforce it. The frame itself is burly – to the point I’d say surprisingly so for its short-travel segment. I am no lightweight, and am also no finessed rider, but no matter how ham-fisted my approach to a climb, descent or technical section of trail has been, the Tallboy just rolls through.

Having not ridden the previous-gen Tallboy, I cannot say I noted a difference in the suspension for this version, but whatever Santa Cruz did, it has resulted in a bike that offers excellent traction on the often rocky, ledge-riddled, sandy trails that proliferate on Sydney’s Northern Beaches. In a previous life, I owned the first-generation (2014) Santa Cruz 5010 and that bike’s earlier version of the VPP suspension setup was more prone to hang up on sharp-edged ledges when climbing. The Tallboy 5 – provided you’ve got enough gas in your legs – just clambers over any of that, with minimal interruption to forward progress. 

On faster descending trails, the Tallboy is a rocket, and it is here that you nod at the “downhiller” reference by the marketing team; that beefy frame and very well sorted suspension (the Pike up front is a dream match for this bike) produce a well planted feel that belies the fact this is, still, a short-travel bike. Regardless of the rugged terrain underneath you when at speed, the bike will maintain its line – and that applies in more technical terrain, as well. It is also worth noting the performance of those carbon Reserve hoops; offering a blend of directness and suppleness in the transferral of impact and power, these wheels give the rider additional confidence to go even faster, with their ability to soak up uneven terrain and deflections without pushing the bike off-line. On a bike loaded with top-spec components, these wheels are the standout. 

The SRAM AXS Transmission drivetrain works seamlessly, with a tiny electronic squeak the only notification of a shift up or down, and it copes well with panicked gear shifts when under load. The only note I would add, for now, is that low bottom bracket means plenty of pedal strikes on rocky terrain, and the brakes seem to take a wee while to slow you down. This could well be, at this early stage, due to them still needing bedding-in, with only a short test period to date. Still, if I owned this bike, I’d probably fit a larger front rotor to the front if possible.

The early word on the Santa Cruz Tallboy

We have more riding ahead, with a few more challenging trails in the diary, but, to date, the Santa Cruz Tallboy CC XX SL AXS RSV has performed with aplomb. If pushed, we’d still lean toward classifying it as, in the main, a trail bike (and a formidable one at that), but its breadth of capability is far wider than just that; fitting beefier rubber for an enduro race, throwing on some frame bags for a bikepacking weekend, or entering a marathon XC event as-is, are well and truly possible with this bike. Yes, this particular model is expensive – although no more so than other boutique MTB brands’ top-tier offerings – but the fact you can score that same frame, geometry and suspension kinematics across the Tallboy range at lower prices means you can still live the dream of riding what we consider – even this early into testing – one of the most versatile – and bloody fun – MTBs on the market. Stay tuned for our final update in July.

RRP: $14,449 See Santa Cruz Australia for more info on the Tallboy and all other Santa Cruz bikes.

The post Santa Cruz Tallboy XX SL AXS RSV: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Mountain Designs Stratus boasts a comprehensive design. It uses the popular Pertex Shield waterproof/breathable fabric, in a 2.5-layer format (a combo of a 100 per cent recycled polyester outer shell and 75 per cent recycled polyester layer) that is designed for extreme conditions (it has a 20,000mm Hydrostatic Head waterproof rating, which is very high, as well as a PFC-free coating). Noting that the wearer not only needs to stay dry from rain, but also from perspiration, the Stratus has a number of ventilation points, including pit-zips, a two-way front zip and wrist cuffs that can be tightened/loosened as well, when ‘more air’ is needed. The usual inclusions of an adjustable hood (and a nifty stiffener in the hood to adjust for a helmet or different head/face shape) and adjustable hem ensure a proper fit. 

Design inclusions that highlight Mountain Designs’ decades of experience in the adventure apparel market include drainage holes in the two (concealed) zipped hand pockets, that aforementioned two-way zip, a waterproof chest pocket (zipped) and articulated elbows, which ensure the jacket doesn’t ride up when you are lifting your arm up to grab something above you, etc. In short, it is a fully-featured outer shell designed for testing conditions.

In the field

The Mountain Designs Stratus has been on test for a couple of months at this point, but during that time it has – already – been subject to a wide range of conditions. Fast arriving summer storms have tested its waterproofness (and breathability, owing to how humid conditions were), while windy days have also seen it put to use over the top of a lightweight base-layer. A few things have already stuck out in this early stage of testing, such as its excellent fit. Even though Mountain Designs describes it as ‘regular’, the fit is still nice and snug to the wearer’s body, which has meant minimal ‘spare air’ so to speak, between the wearer and the garment itself. Impressively, the jacket has still provided plenty of ventilation when needed (thanks to the pit-zips and two-way main zip), keeping sweat and condensation to a minimum for the tester. 

The light weight is a boon, as is the compact size of the jacket when it’s rolled up and stowed inside a backpack. So far (and it’s still early days) all the zips have run smoothly, and there have been no breakages. Even a small fall from a mountain bike on to dirt tracks hasn’t seen any tears or permanent marks. 

The final word on the Mountain Designs Stratus

Since our initial testing, we’ve tackled a number of other adventures using the Stratus. Each time, it has performed as per its design remit and has proved robust and effective in some pretty wild weather. For those looking for a jacket that offers versatility, comfort, ease of use in different outdoor activities, and is not too damaging to the wallet, the Stratus is well worth consideration.

RRP: $380 (Alliance Club price: $280) See Mountain Designs for more info on this and other outdoor gear.

The post Mountain Designs Stratus Hooded Rain Jacket: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

This boutique e-MTB brand is the brainchild of dreamer, mountain biker, windsurfer, paddle-boarder, carbon-fibre whiz, and tech guru Chris Ting in his humble efforts to produce an affordable e-MTB to fill a gap in the burgeoning Australian electric bike market. Starting as a coffee-fueled ambition to design an Enduro e-MTB for himself and his mates, the project rapidly escalated into collaborations with renowned suspension gurus, European kinematics experts, international motor manufacturers and specialist carbon manufacturers to finish with the present-day production of a modern, aggressive, full-gas, all-carbon, e-MTB. With such a broad band of experts behind the bike, and the ability to personalise each bike with a custom graphics package, it appears VMG’s first bike, the Typhon, is a serious competitor for established brands in the e-MTB world.

 Over the past six months, VMG has quietly garnered a core following of riders beyond its humble ambitions. So, we thought it best to throw resident senior gear tester, self-proclaimed e-bike lover, and somewhat ‘loose’ rider, Mark ‘Watto’ Watson, into the deep end to see what all the fuss is about. Over the past four to five months, Watto has managed to pull together endless hours of riding alongside experts, enthusiasts, and seasoned veterans; all stoked with any excuse to demo the Typhon on everything from loamy rainforest switchbacks to janky sandstone downhills. He has also discovered a newfound love of pedalling uphill; a pastime previously considered a reluctant necessity only to reach “the fun trails”. So, settle in for a tale of over-frothing, sweet trails, and occasional rock bashing … for the VMG Typhon is one hell of a bike that might just become an accidental Aussie super hero. 

Design

Let’s not beat around the bush. The VMG Typhon is for those who prefer gravity over grinding uphill. But don’t let the Typhon’s slack head angle fool you; it has a big enough battery, a short enough rear-end and steep enough seat tube angle to hook happily into tree-clipping singletrack, tackle technical climbs, or take on an all-day epic. Newcastle MTB legend Dane Critchlow summarised the bike during his first ride aboard the Typhon; “I have ridden and raced many e-bikes, but for a brand to get the geometry right so early in its life is rare. It handles, jumps, turns, and stops great. Bang for your buck I don’t know a better e-bike.” 

If you’re a marathon-bred XC whippet, the torquey, big-hitting prowess of the Typhon may not be on your radar; however, if you lean further into the all-mountain, enduro, gravity realms, then the Typhon might be the most affordable all-carbon all-mountain weapon out there.

With a 63.5-degree head-tube angle, 78-degree effective seat tube angle, and mullet wheel setup (29-inch front / 27.5-inch rear), there is no doubt the VMG Typhon is aimed at those who enjoy the ‘Downs’ more than the ‘Ups’ but still want to be able to punch out some serious kilometres. The carbon-fibre frame (with four-bar Horst link suspension) offers 160mm of travel, and when coupled with a 160mm or 170mm fork, the Typhon sits smack bang in the mid-range travel arena for enduro/gravity e-bikes. Weighing in at 23.9kg, the Typhon is a few grams heavier than some of the other big hitters, and a 476mm reach is tighter than some competitors, although it doesn’t feel cramped. A short 443mm chain stay keeps the bike snappy and playful, and it rides lighter than the specs suggest. A 340mm bottom bracket height keeps the centre of gravity low but, in doing so, feels a tad exposed for jankier trails, although only on super technical terrain. 

The bike is powered by a Bafang M510 48V motor with 250W of power and a rather generous 95nm of torque for a compact 2.9kg motor. If you’re a V8 kinda-rider, the bike can also be equipped with a 3.3kg Bafang M560 powerplant, delivering a massive 500W of power and 130Nm of torque. The lockable, removable large capacity 840-watt-hour (Wh) battery delivers masses of juice and lengthy battery life across all the Typhon Trail and Enduro models. The Trail is a lighter weight 160mm all-rounder whilst the Enduro up-specs components and is offered in three iterations: Enduro, Enduro Coil and Enduro Ultimate. All Typhon models run a full carbon frame and rear triangle, with Alloy 780mm bars and 40mm stem, a 160mm rear shock, KS i900 dropper post (170mm or 190mm), Universal Derailleur Hanger (UDH), Miranda 160mm crankset, Maxxis Assegai 29 x 2.5 EXO+ tyres up front and Maxiss Minnion DHR II DD 27.5 x 2.4 tyres on the rear, as standard. At present, the frames are available in medium and large sizes.

The 23.7kg Typhon Trail delivers 160mm travel (front and rear) via a Suntour Edge LOR 205 x 65 shock and a 160mm Suntour Auron (36mm stanchion) fork. The bike is adorned with a Microshift Advent nine-speed shifter, derailleur, and cassette, Tektro HD M750 4-piston brakes, and 180mm rotors for stopping. Novatec steel freebody boost hubs are threaded to Mach1 Trucky rims with Pillar spokes and Maxxis rubber. The bike is aimed at all-mountain use and delivers solid reliability with an emphasis on both weight-saving and affordability, hitting the shelves at an impressive $6600.

The Typhon Enduro and Typhon Enduro-Coil are more expensive, but the payoff is an additional 10mm of travel up front, 10-speed Microshift Advent drivetrain, and Magura MT5 brakes with 203mm rotors as standard. The Typhon Enduro boasts a 23.9kg trail weight with a Suntour Tri Air 3CR 205 x 65 trunnion mount shock and Suntour Durolux 36 170mm EQ PCS R2C2 fork. The Typhon Enduro-Coil (24.5kg) enhances plush travel and big-hitting prowess with a Suntour Voro Coil 205 x 65 trunnion mount shock and upgrades to the 38mm stanchions of a Suntour Durolux 38 170m EQ PCS R2C2. The Enduro comes in at $7600 and the Enduro Coil at AUD$8600.

The flagship Enduro-Ultimate (23.9kg and around $11,600, depending on final spec), features a Rockshox ZEB Ultimate 170mm fork and a Rockshox Super deluxe Ultimate 205 x 65 trunnion mount shock. The drivetrain is upgraded to wireless SRAM GX AXS 12-Speed, and the brakes are upgraded to Magura MT7, and it all rolls on an Industry Nine Enduro S1/1 30.5mm wheelset. For Shimano and Fox lovers, you can opt for a wireless Shimano Di2 drivetrain or Fox Float X2 Factory shock/Fox 38 Factory forks. 

Our test bike was a custom variation of the Enduro Ultimate, adorned with a 180mm Fox 38 Factory fork up front and Fox Float X2 Factory shock. A complete wireless AXS system was fitted with Rockshox Reverb AXS 170 seat post and 12-Speed SRAM GX AXS Eagle shifter and chain complimenting a super light Ingrid 12S 48T-10 cassette. The team at SQ Lab came to the party with stems, bars, grips, and seats. Graphics and frame protection are created by Peter Reynolds at Bunnyhop/KYSO. Whatever model Typhon you look at, as far as e-MTB bang-for-bucks goes, you’ll be hard-pushed to find much better. 

In the field with the VMG Typhon

Straight out of the gates, the torque of the Bafang M510 is noticeable when you start pedalling, and there’s certainly no shortage of power from the 250W/95Nm motor. It kicks in relatively sharply if you’re not ready for it, but a couple of clicks on the thumb pad sees the 1.9” TFT display dial back from BOOST to TOUR or ECO mode, and the bike settles. The Typhon has WALK, ECO, TOUR, SPORT, SPORT+, and BOOST. I found the SPORT and SPORT+ modes best for singletrack climbing. With so much torque, flowing switchback climbs are nearly as fun as adrenalin-inducing descents. The 840Wh battery means plenty of BOOST-fuelled hooting and hollering on ups and downs without concerns about draining the battery. If your Sunday morning blast does turn into an ‘epic’, to preserve battery life, the Battery Management System (BMS) backs off pedal-assist input when the battery drops below 30 per cent.

The mullet wheelset takes a few corners to get used to, and the slack front end wants to push a smidge wide on the slower switchbacks, but the short rear end snaps the bike into place quickly enough. Technical rock garden climbs are never my favourite, and whilst the Typhon eats them for breakfast, a relatively low 340mm bottom bracket/motor clearance can be prone to rock strikes if you don’t pick an intelligent line. Fortunately, the short 160mm Miranda crankset limits pedal strikes, and a $100 upgraded bash-guard handles poor line choices, especially if you’re a ‘creative rider’ like me. 

My home trail nemesis had always been a super loose, steep, boulder-strewn fire-trail climb. However, the Bafang M510’s low-end torque excels in slow-cadence-climbing, and when coupled with the Typhon’s steep seat-tube angle (centering body weight on climbs), even my chicken legs can haul bike and body to the top.

It is at the top, with the seat post lowered, when the real fun begins. The short chainstays keep the bike inline on tighter singletrack, which means for a responsive bike out of the corners, making meandering flow-trails a blast. When it gets steeper, rockier, and ‘jumpier’, the Typhon excels. On our Ultimate build, the boulder-absorbing prowess of the Fox Float X2 Factory shock marries happily to a Fox 38 Factory fork up front. On descents, the slack head angle and low centre of gravity provide loads of confidence to roll through nearly anything. The bike feels comfortable and stable at speed, in berms and over slow techy rock gardens, while remaining poppy and playful. The more the trail points down, the better the bike gets – enough to confidently advance my mediocre riding happily to black diamond-grade trails. 

As we move into the fourth month of ‘product testing’ (aka, finding excuses to ride), the bike continues to perform above expectations. It has endured everything from sandy coastal singletrack and rutted boulder-ridden 4WD trails to loamy rainforest berms and root-strewn downhills. 

The experience hasn’t been without incident, however. A decent high-speed sideswipe on a boulder led to an over-the-bars moment that saw the frame take a few cartwheels, with an expensive AXS rear derailleur destroyed in the process. The Typhon frame is rated at more than 70% above ISO 4210 strength requirements and so, fortunately, escaped with only minor scratches. Whenever I have contacted VMG with tech questions, the response and follow-up has been very quick. It is this type of efficient after-sales customer service that is as vital to VMG as developing a homegrown e-MTB, with the company about to get busier, thanks to a contract to provide Typhon bikes (and a custom-designed aggressive hardtail e-MTB) to NSW Police and Emergency Services.

The final word on the VMG Typhon

VMG has developed a high-end full carbon e-MTB frame with modern geometry settling right into the sweet spot for an all-mountain e-MTB, delivered in a range of price options for all riders, enthusiast to expert. If you’re in the market for some of this fandangled battery-assisted pedalling malarky and want a quality build without breaking the bank, then the VMG Typhon is most certainly worth a look. 

See VMG Bikes for more info on the Typhon range.

The post VMG Typhon E-Mountain Bike: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Shingleback LITE is one of four models in the Shingleback bike rack range, with each model catering for different numbers of bikes, and of a slightly different construction, i.e., the Shingleback LITE is available in two, three, four, five and six-bike versions, the 2B90 is a two-bike carrier, and there’s a Shingleback for ute owners with custom rear canopies, too. It also comes with an impressive 10-year warranty.

When it arrived for testing, the Shingleback LITE 4 Bike was in a couple of boxes, ready to be put together. It is of steel and alloy construction, and you do have to build it yourself. Now, as much as I am quite handy in the outdoors, my ‘building’ skills are another matter. Thankfully, Shingleback supplies a comprehensive set of instructions (and there’s an excellent YouTube video guide if you prefer visual instruction), making even the most hapless of handymen look like a home improvement legend. The build took around 50 minutes and is best performed with the rack being built while on the vehicle, starting with the tow-bar tube, i.e. the base. A big bonus is that all of the holes and bolts married up perfectly – very much appreciated!

It is at this build stage you first notice how smart the design of the Shingleback is. The cradles that are used to hold the bike’s front wheel are adjustable, via a set of staggered bolt holes (six on each side of each cradle), allowing you to adjust the cradle both forward/back and rotate in either direction. This is simple, obvious, and bloody clever, enabling you to tweak the angle of each bike to its neighbour to avoid touching the neighbouring bike/handlebars. The cradle shape is also intuitive, with each arm wrapping around your bike’s tyre quite high up, thus avoiding any chance of the wheel ‘jumping out’ over any rough surfaces. Of course, the bikes are further secured, via tough bungee cord straps up top around the front wheel, and at the base on the rear wheel.

The LITE has a nifty foot lever that allows you to tilt the rack (and loaded bikes) back enough to either open the rear hatch/window of your vehicle, or to aid in loading the bikes; smaller riders don’t have to lift the bike up so high/at all to put the front wheel into the cradle. You can adjust the amount of tilt via a thru-bolt that offers a few position options so when you tilt the rack back, it stops against the thru-bolt.

The rack is even designed to lie fully horizontal, where you can use the cradles to park your bikes into. Again, straightforward design, and clever with it. Each individual cradle is rated to 35kg, so even if you own a hefty e-MTB, you will have no worries (e-MTBs range in weight from around 15kg to 26kg).

For those with bikes smaller than a 24-inch wheel size, there is an adaptor (think: 20-inch kids’ bikes or BMX), and there’s also an adaptor for road and gravel bikes. Speaking of accessories and spare parts, there are plenty; number plate holders, lightboards (more on that later), pedal straps and utility hooks, through to a swingarm (for owners of vehicles with side-opening rear doors), dolly stand and floor stand (both for storing rack off the bike), different length towbar tubes (vehicles have different length tow-tongues) and anti-rattle clamps (I fitted this to the LITE 4 – it is excellent!) and shims, are some of a hugely comprehensive range of add-ons. It’s an impressive list, but how does it go when put to work?  

In the field

Fitting the LITE 4, you will notice its weight, but surprisingly not too much; the tall profile keeps the weight distributed evenly and it is dead-easy to slide into the hitch in one quick motion. Then you just insert the hitch pin, tighten the anti-rattle clamp, and you’re done – it’s then time to load the bikes. 

To tilt the rack back, you slide the locking pin out, push your foot on the foot latch, and then lower it until it hits the tilt-stop bolt. This tilted rack allows for far easier mounting of bikes; most adults will be able to simply roll the bikes toward the rack, then (depending on slope of ground) they can nearly roll straight onto the rack, with only a slight lift needed to put the bike’s front wheel into the cradle. The bungee is quickly affixed both top and bottom, then you simply tilt the rack back up to its locked position and re-inserting the lock-pin. It’s nearly laughable how easy the process is, regardless of bike size, the only caveat being the rack will be quite heavy when loaded with four adult-sized bikes, so it takes a little effort to lift it back to the locking position. 

Besides how easy the LITE 4 makes the bike-loading process, the other standout feature of this rack is the fact no part of the bike frame is touched, so you will no longer have to worry about bikes, pedals, handlebars, etc., banging into each other and scratching frames, tangling cables, etc. The cradles’ versatility in how they can be angled means you will easily figure out a setup that ensures no bike-to-bike contact. The bungee cords have also impressed during testing; the tight cord means there is minimal bike movement, whether sideways or vertically, when travelling over bumpier surfaces. 

The LITE 4 has been on test for a few months now and it has been most often loaded with four bikes. We’ve now got the loading process down to barely a couple of minutes – a far cry from the ‘bad old days’ of playing bike Tetris for 30 minutes with racks that position bikes too close to each other, then tout themselves as ‘four bike racks’ when, in reality, they’re really only good for two. 

One final thing worth noting is that the LITE 4 is narrow enough that you won’t need a separate light bar, but be sure to check and, if in doubt, grab one of the Shingleback light bars as well. As with any rear-mounted bike rack, you will also have to buy an auxiliary numberplate, easily affixed to the supplied plate-holder.

The final word on the Shingleback LITE 4

The Shingleback LITE 4 has been well and truly tested over the past few months and it has seriously impressed us. Between me and a couple of other senior gear testers, we’ve struggled to find fault with this impressive unit. The very clever design, robust construction, attention to detail, and how incredibly easy it is in use, makes it a definite candidate for one of our Best Gear awards this year. The asking price may seem slightly steep, but it is in line with other racks of similar capacity and, more importantly for us, it is Aussie designed and built. For any cycling family looking for a bike rack that offers model versions that can lug anywhere from one/two up to six bikes, the Shingleback LITE range is well worth a look.

RRP: from $1590 (4 Bike model, as tested) See Shingleback Off Road for more info on its extensive range of bike racks.

The post Shingleback LITE 4 Bike Rack: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The jacket is made of 100 per cent recycled nylon (with a non-PFC DWR). The Futurelight 3L material is an impressive combo of waterproofness, breathability and lightweight that offers excellent protection while packing down nice and compact.

It’s always a balancing act trying to merge the two opposites of lightweight with robust protection, but the Papsura looks to have succeeded, while offering high versatility; that incredibly light weight and compact packed size also makes it ideal for trail runners, mountain bikers and hikers.

Clever design features include the removal of shoulder seams, which ensures less bulk, while eliminating the chance of rubbing from a backpack’s shoulder straps. The gusseted under-arms further boost comfort and manoeuvrability in the field, while the hood is fully adjustable and includes a bonded brim and cinch cord.

Other details found on the Papsura include a full-length front zip, secure-zip (and covered) pockets (the left pocket includes an internal mesh pouch; the right has a gear loop). The jacket packs into the right-side pocket (yep, it’s that compact). The Papsura has a retail price of $700 which, considering its high-end technical design and features, is decent value.

See The North Face for more info on the Summit Papsura Futurelight Jacket and all TNF gear.

The post Exclusive: The North Face Summit Papsura Futurelight aims high appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Both the 37L and 55L are powered by a removable 30-amp lithium battery, providing ample power to keep your food and drinks cold over a weekend (or longer, see below), and can be run down to a minus 22 degrees Celsius. This also means you can take the fridge/freezer with you, literally, thanks to its internal power. Yep, nifty!

Power up

The lithium battery can be recharged in the field, via AC, DC or solar power, and it can also be used to power or recharge devices, such as tablets and mobile phones, upping the versatility of these impressive units. Both fridges utilise a highly regarded dual-speed LG compressor for reliability and are backed by a three-stage battery protection system to ensure you don’t flatten your vehicle’s single battery (it also allows draw via a dual-battery system if your vehicle is fitted with one). You can keep your eye on the fridge via the lockable touchscreen display and Bluetooth app.

Single Zone equals versatility

There are some impressive design highlights on the new Single Zone Lithium Fridge/Freezer range. These include 55mm of insulation, a lid that can be opened from either side, internal LED lighting, multiple USB outlets (both USB-C and USB-A) and – yes! – an integrated bottle opener. The 37L model measures 712mm wide x 444mm deep x 451mm high and weighs 22.6kg. The 25.6kg 55L variant sits at 816mm W x 484mm D x 453mm H. The height of both models ensures they will fit under a ute-lid.

OZtrail claims the 37L battery will keep your food/drinks cold for up to 32 hours, while the 55L claims a 26-hour run-time. Oh, and for those who only put that one thing in their fridge/freezer: the 37L can fit 48 cans, while the big-bopper 55L swallows 78 cans. Just in case you needed to know, of course…

The OZtrail Single Zone Lithium Fridge/Freezer 37L and 55L are available exclusively from Anacaonda.

The post OZtrail releases new Single Zone Lithium Fridge/Freezer range appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Escapist On-Back packs

The Escapist packs come in three volumes – 30 litres, 25L and 20L. The Escapist 30 is the big bopper that allows you to tackle those longer journeys where this pack would be used in conjunction with bike bags to lug essential gear, while the 25 and 20 are perfect for shorter, faster adventures without sacrificing functionality.

Each Escapist pack includes nifty bike-specific design features, such as pockets that are easy-to-reach when you’re on your bike, a large front pocket with stretch material, lid lock helmet attachments, hi-vis rain cover, reflective material and large buckles that are easily used even when wearing gloves.

The Osprey designers also paid attention to how the pack sits on the rider, with the dropped lumbar keeping the weight down on your sit-bones and the back panel’s upper split allowing more aggressive-posture riders plenty of comfort. The Airscape back panel keeps you cool/ventilated, while the biostretch harness and the hipbelt provide ample all-round comfort.

Escapist On-Bike frame bags

Designed as a complete, modular, system, the Escapist On-Bike frame bags can be fitted to a wide range of bike frames and sizes. The saddle bag can even be adapted to fit with a dropper-post if need be. The bags feature RF welded seams and waterproof zips, with the handlebar bag and saddle bag including air purge holes to vent out pressure and add compression and stability when loaded on the bike.

The handlebar bag (10 litres) is of interesting construction, featuring two pieces – a custom-mounting holster and waterproof bag. The bag sits inside the holster on the bike. The 9L saddle bag is of similar, two-piece, design; the under-saddle holster secures the load to prevent sway, while the waterproof bag is easily slid out from the holster when needed.

The frame bag is available in three sizes – S, M, L, equalling 4, 3.5 and 2 litres, respectively – to cater for different frame sizes and includes double-ended zips. The 2L wedge bag is, as its moniker suggests, steeper on one side than the other to allows for easy fitment to different shaped frames. There is dual-side, waterproof zips, and variable attachment points that feature anti-scratch hook-and-look straps.

The top tube bag (250ml) includes one vertical access point, a cable exit, plenty of attachment points and a structured, semi-solid outer for easier packing of your gear.

See Osprey for more info.

The post Osprey launches new Escapist bikepacking gear appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The North Face Trail Lite 24L (available in S/M and L/XL) adheres to standard daypack design cues, while adding unique interpretations of some of those. The pack is light, with an average weight of 850g, with its body fabric a 210-denier (D) recycled nylon (protected from moisture ingress by a non-PFC DWR treatment), while the base of the pack is a 600D recycled polyester (with the same water-repellent treatment applied). This tough base is a stand-out; nothing is more annoying than a pack-base that wears down quickly if used regularly in trying conditions.

The design team has incorporated a lot of learnings from TNF’s trail-running pack design, which is a good thing for fit, comfort and (to an extent) breathability. The back panel is contoured to mimic the run packs, and this pays off with excellent comfort and keeping the pack close to your torso for ease of manoeuvrability. The back panel is ‘breathable’ according to TNF but, as with other brands’ claims, the amount of moisture on your back will depend on the wearer’s body shape/exertion levels.

There are plenty of storage options for items such as phones, keys, etc. Two water bottle pockets (one each side) are cleverly angled to allow for easy access when the pack is on your back, while the padded hip belt aids stability and has two pockets. There’s an internal water bladder sleeve inside the large main compartment and an internal pocket as well. Add in the large outer pocket and you’ve got storage space aplenty.

With a nod to its climbing heritage, TNF has included a bungee system on the front, along with the ability to carry trek poles (or ice axes) and dual sternum straps. The side compression setup ensures you can further snug-in the pack to your body, while all buckles and clips are robust. 

In the field

We’ve had the Trail Lite 24L on test for a few weeks, and it has proved popular with testers. This is due to a few factors but is best explained by saying The North Face designers have not skimped on any feature that improves the pack’s actual performance. By this, I mean that, often, a pack is adorned with superfluous features that do little. The Trail Lite 24L has none of these: every component is designed for a purpose.  

The 850g is no ‘heavy load’ to bother most of us. Plus, it adds assurance; the padded hip belt is a boon for those times when you’re lugging heavy gear (think: ropes, rack, helmet)and is very comfortable. Speaking of comfort, the wide shoulder straps don’t ‘cut in’, either. 

For day hikes, the pack is excellent, with that 24L optimal for a full day outside. TNF promotes this pack as suitable for MTB, although we think it is too ‘big”; most MTB packs are in the 10L to 20L range. I’d say the same for it as a commuter pack (dependent on how much crap you bring to work). However, for bikepacking or cycle touring, the Trail Lite 24L is ideal. Also welcome, was the pack’s slim profile; not having to worry about a wide pack snagging on tree branches, etc., is great. 

The final word

The North Face Trail Lite 24L backpack stands out in a crowded market thanks to its robust construction, high level of useful features, and outright versatility, all at a reasonable price. I doubt there will ever be ‘one daypack’ that is perfect for all outdoor activities but this comfortable and tough 24L load-lugger from The North Face comes pretty darn close. We have managed to convince The North Face’s Aus office to let us keep the Trail LIte 24L for another few months so look for a long-term review mid-year.

RRP: $250 See The North Face for more info.

The post The North Face Trail Lite 24L backpack: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Since then, the Tallboy has morphed from that slightly cross-country oriented rig to this latest incarnation – Version 5, featuring 120mm of VPP (Virtual Pivot Point) rear suspension and 130mm up front – that is closer to a two-wheeled all-rounder in its design remit. From the outside, it looks capable of tackling anything from long, epic trail rides and bikepacking, to cross-country and enduro riding. In short, the latest Tallboy appears ideal for those after that ‘one bike’. We will be spending the next few months testing that theory. And yeah, it’s gonna be fun… Here’s a brief run-down.

What’s it got?

Santa Cruz’s Australian HQ must love Aus Geo ADVENTURE as we’ve managed to get hold of the top-tier, XX SL AXS RSV Tallboy, in a size Large (sizes range from XS to XXL). The Tallboy is available in seven models, priced from the R model at $6999, to this $16,999 monster (yep, we’re already slightly scared of scratching it!). 

As expected, this top-end model drips with serious bling: a top-tier CC carbon frame (with threaded bottom bracket) and SRAM’s schmick wireless SRAM XX AXS drivetrain are standouts, while the ‘RSV’ acronym points to the highly regarded Reserve carbon rims (with Industry Nine Hydra hubs), wrapped in Maxxis Forekaster 29 x 2.4-inch tyres. Add in a 130mm Fox 34 Float Factory Grip 2 fork, Fox Float DPS shock, SRAM Level Ultimate brakes, a flip-chip on the rear shock mount for slight geometry tweaks, OneUp V2 dropper post and excellent lifetime frame warranty, and it’s close to the dream trail machine.

Each frame features Santa Cruz’s nifty downtube storage, fully guided internal cabling, a universal derailleur hanger, space for a 2.5-inch tyre, and enough room for a full-size water bottle. Suspension kinematics have been tweaked for more support, while seat-tube angles and chainstay lengths are size-specific. The geo is relaxed up front with a 65.5-degree head angle, while the reach on all models has increased subtly since Version 4.

Where’s it going?

The Tallboy will be used on MTB road trips to new trail networks on the NSW Far South Coast and will see plenty of riding around our local trails, as well as a jaunt on the Indigo Epic Trail in the Victorian High Country. It will also be loaded up for a bikepacking overnighter in the Blue Mountains, among other adventures.  

Our regular updates will keep everyone informed as to how this sweet rig fulfils its design brief. Look for our first full report in April. Now, it’s time to ride!

See Santa Cruz for more info on the Tallboy and all other Santa Cruz bikes.

The post Just landed: Santa Cruz Tallboy long-termer appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The ad campaign for the OM-1 was totally focused on how this small camera is so incredibly durable and reliable. But is it, really? We spent a month with an OM-1, looking at it from primarily a photographer’s perspective, covering off most of the testing conditions it is touted to be built for…

Design

The OM System OM-1 weighs in at just under 600g (with battery and two SD cards installed), is of primarily magnesium alloy construction, and includes a 20-megapixel micro four-thirds (M4/3) sensor. OM System has pushed this format size (it is approximately half the size of a full sensor) for many years, citing the smaller size allowing for much smaller camera bodies and camera lenses. The M4/3 sensor in the OM-1 is all-new, and is a stacked, back side illuminated CMOS sensor, allowing for faster processing time. The M4/3 sensor means you need to ‘double’ the lens numbers to see the equivalent in 35mm full-frame, i.e. an M.Zuiko 12-40mm f/2.8 PRO II lens is equivalent to a 24-80 ‘full-frame’ lens but is a hell of a lot smaller and much lighter.

The OM-1 is the only camera to offer an IP53 rating for protection against moisture and dust. IP53 can be broken down as this: the ‘5’ indicates the camera provides “partial protection against dust and other particulates, such that any ingress will not damage or impede the satisfactory performance of internal components; while the ‘3’ denotes the fact the camera is protected against water spray at angles of up to 60-degrees off vertical for a minimum of three minutes. In short, the OM-1 is close to bombproof and the only camera that offers such dust and water ingress protection you can buy today. The camera body is full of seals to ensure it is up to performing in any conditions. OM System also produces a series of PRO lenses that offer the same IP53 rating; during testing we used the M.Zuiko ED 12-40mm f/2.8 PRO II. 

That robust camera body also hides a highly regarded image-stabilisation system (a claimed eight stops; lens dependent), a 5.76M dot electronic view finder (EVF) that offers blackout-free shooting, a three-inch 1.62M dot touch screen (fully articulating), and a monster quad-pixel auto-focus system that comprises 1053 cross-type points. And speaking of focus; there are a number of AF Subject Detection modes, covering cars, aircraft, birds, dogs, cats, as well as face and eye detection. To ensure it catches the fastest outdoor/wildlife action, its highest shutter speed is 50 frames per second with full auto-focus when using the electronic shutter, and with six of the Pro series zoom lenses (it drops to 25fps when used with other lenses – still very fast). The mechanical shutter offers a respectable 10fps.

Clever computational features in the OM-1 include a Hand-held High Res shot mode which results in a 50-megapixel image, or a second High Res mode which requires use of a tripod but produces a whopping 80MP image. Other very handy computational goodies include the Live ND mode, that replicates a N64 (six-stop) filter, to attain those long exposure shots. There’s also the nifty Pro Capture, that allows you to start pre-recording images after a half-press down of the shutter button, just so you can minimise missing that ‘moment’. Add in a specific Starry Sky setting (for astrophotography) and focus stacking (great for macro work) and this mighty mite is seriously loaded with tech. The video features of the OM-1 are equally as impressive, being able to shoot in 4K (UHD or DCI ratio) at up to 60fps, includes both 8-bit H.264 and 10-bit H.265 modes and can also output Raw video. 

The camera menu has been re-jigged from previous cameras, according to OM System, and it shows in the ease in which you can access settings. More help for this can be found via the Super Control Panel on the back touchscreen. The battery is claimed to offer 520 shots per charge, and there is a dual-battery charger accessory as well. The camera is recharged via USB-C (you can charge it using a portable powerpack this way).

The buttons and dials on the camera body are easy to access and – considering the body’s overall diminutive size – they are not too small, either. The handgrip is also quite pronounced – a welcome feature for this ham-fisted tester. In the hand, with the M.Zuiko ED 12-40 f/2.8 PRO II lens, the camera feels substantial but light – especially when compared to this tester’s usual full-frame DSLR setup. Indeed, side-by-side, with lenses of equivalent zoom range, the OM System setup was nearly half the size, something that became more apparent, and more welcome, over the month of testing…

In the field with the OM System OM-1

The OM-1 was used for a variety of photography over the test period, with outdoor/adventure the primary focus. We only had the M.Zuiko ED 12-40 f/2.8 PRO II lens (incredibly sharp, as you’d expect from M.Zuiko glass), so wildlife photography was limited, although we did test Subject Recognition on some waterbirds at a nearby national park. In terms of fast action sports, i.e., mountain biking/cycling, the OM-1’s AF system performed very well. Occasionally it would lose the focus of a rider’s eye or face, but no more so than any other high-end focus system this tester has shot with over the years. 

In low-light scenarios, and when using a higher ISO to help freeze the faster action, we found that digital noise (grain) was acceptable up to ISO 6400, albeit not at the level of a full-frame equivalent camera. We also noted that if you did under- or over-expose, then noise was more pronounced. In short, though, if you nail your exposure (as you should), you will be surprised at the image quality at high ISO. This is a revelation for those who, previously, would have dismissed a M4/3 camera for professional use; the high-ISO performance is generally good, and when combined with ability to ‘fix’ excessive noise with programs such as Adobe Lightroom, it’s not an issue. 

The new menu system is (even for this decades-long Canon user) relatively straightforward to access and work with. All the buttons and dials worked well in the field, with the ability to assign custom functions to some of them a boon when a quick change of settings was required. The sharp and bright EVF was great; when set to 120fps it was as close to an optical viewfinder as you can get. 

There were no concerns when the weather went sideways; that IP53 water/dust ingress rating proved itself during more than a few rainy shoots, as well as an accidental drop down a sand dune during testing. Of course, coming from a full-size DSLR system, the big thing (excuse the pun) is the dramatic drop in weight when carrying the OM-1 around. I did a quick calculation of the weight difference between an OM-1-based setup from OM System and an equivalent Canon setup and found the OM-1 setup to be 2.5kg lighter and far more compact. Both setups included fast glass (f/2.8) that comprised an ultra-wide zoom, a standard zoom and a telephoto zoom, which is what I use regularly for Aus Geo ADVENTURE. Impressive.

The final word on the OM System OM-1

For anyone who photographs adventure and wildlife (and anything else, really) and who is looking to save weight without sacrificing image quality, the OM-1 is a no-brainer. The camera’s light weight, combined with its top-tier weather-sealing, wide choice of lenses (some of which are IP53 rated as well) that are smaller, lighter, and cheaper, and it’s hard not to see any downsides. 

For pixel-peepers (those who obsess over the slightest noise or exposure issue when an image is viewed at 100 per cent) you may want to stick with a full-frame system but, as mentioned earlier, noise in photos is less of an issue than it ever was. The other ‘sort-of’ negative is that, if you are already heavily invested in a camera system (as this reviewer is), then it is a bigger ask to change over, although one that is offset by the fact that the OM System lenses are generally cheaper compared to a full-frame equivalent with no loss in quality. This is especially notable in the M.Zuiko PRO lens range.

In terms of video, we did minimal testing of the OM-1’s video capabilities but have spoken to a couple of OM System pro videographers, who have produced videos for international and national clients, and they have been very happy with how the OM-1 produces moving imagery.

Overall, we would consider the OM-1 an absolute go-to for any aspiring (or long-term) adventure and wildlife photographer and videographer. That oft-overused cliché of punching above your weight applies directly to this small brawler of a camera; anyone who invests in the OM-1 will be rewarded with a reliable, tough camera that produces great images and footage.

RRP: $3299 See OM System for more info on its full camera and lens range.

The post OM System OM-1 camera: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

What Kathmandu has delivered in its sun protection range is a range of apparel that is lightweight, offers plenty of ventilation and fitted to keep us cool, all the while aimed at covering us up. The SUN-Scout UPF Men’s Long Sleeve Hooded Shirt is a loose fitting, long sleeve hooded shirt that is great for hiking and, as we found, perfect for kayaking. Made of bluesign® approved 100% recycled ripstop polyester, the shirt delivers UPF50+ protection, wicking and breathability properties, whilst a peppermint oil infusion helps control body odour. The hem, cuffs and hood are elastic bound to keep them in place and a quarter snap button front and back vents accompanying the garments relaxed fit allows for plenty of airflow.

Our EVRY-Day Men’s Cargo Shorts also offer UPF50+ protection use a slightly harder wearing 100% recycled nylon with a durable water repellent finish and integrated webbing belt. The cargo shorts offer a relaxed fit with a semi-elasticated waist, quality YKK zips and a useful five pockets. To top off our sun-smart outfit we covered our noggin with a Jason Woodside EVRY-Day UPF 50+ Bucket Hat. The hat, a collaboration with Kiwi artist Jason Woodside, rounds out our UPF50+ protection kit in a lightweight cotton bucket hat with eyelets for ventilation and a toggle adjustment on the crown for a good fit. 

In the field

In busting out for a ‘kayak and hike’ adventure we wanted a casual fitting outfit to protect us from the sun’s harmful UV rays whilst remaining comfortable and cool both paddling the waterways and exploring the hidden beaches and trails of Ku-ring-gai Chase NP. Immediately we were impressed with the 216-gram (g) weight (Large) of our five-pocket EVRY-Day Men’s Cargo Shorts. They nylon shorts felt super airy and light, and the elasticated waist and belt combo, that provided a comfy fit, also dried fast when wet. Impressively, the design team at Kathmandu also delivered a zipped cargo pocket that fits todays ‘plus/max’ sized smartphones.

A couple of hand pockets do their job for chucking in a lip balm and a snap clasp cargo pocket for a muesli bar. A nice touch is all pockets are either mesh based or have drainage ports, meaning the lightweight shorts happily double as ‘boardies’ or in our case, the perfect kayak short. The single snap clasp on the right cargo pocket means for easy access but is not a pocket for the phone, credit cards or smaller valuables … best put them in the zip pocket. 

When it came to covering up on-top, I was dubious about the SUN-Scout UPF Men’s Long Sleeve Hooded Shirt, considering a synthetic, long sleeved, hooded top a little ‘too much’ for a hot, humid day out. I was soon to be humbled. The super-light polyester top weighed in less than even the shorts, at a mere 180g (Large), and the loose fit made for a perfect paddle top; the quarter snap front with back vents kept enough airflow to deliver as comfy a top as could be expected on our super-humid 30-degree day. Rather happily, the top dried fast and the elasticated hood was a bonus for covering the neck whilst cruising the waterways.

The ripstop polyester held up well enough for our wandering of boulders and scrub bordering the beaches of Ku-ring-gai Chase. The kangaroo- style zip pockets (a single front pocket accesses from both sides), to be honest, is something have never really found greatly useful, however our test offered new learnings and I realised the ability to access the single chest pocket with either hand is great for shoving ‘stuff’ like lip balm, muesli bars, small sunscreen, sunnies, and even a folded bucket hat for kayaking. Speaking of which…

The Jason Woodside EVRY-Day UPF 50+ Bucket Hat added a little class and style to our attire and promotes Kathmandu’s world-leading ‘Better Cotton’ sustainability initiative for cotton. There’s not a huge amount to discuss on a good ol’ bucket hat, other than to say the sweatband worked a treat and the crown-toggle-adjustment is the icing on the cake, meaning the hat didn’t end up floating the Pittwater waterways, rather than on my noggin. 

The final word on Kathmandu UPF50+ Sun Protection

As dubious as many might be about the advantages of a predominantly synthetic summer outfit outweighing the disadvantages, there is no doubt Kathmandu has delivered a rather impressive line of well-considered, lightweight UPF50+ sun protection, that provides ample ventilation. Who would have thought, in the process, it’d also deliver a perfect summer kayaking kit. Whilst the loose fit of the SUN-Scout UPF Men’s Long Sleeve Hooded Shirt might not be the most flattering of high-street designs, it’s perfect for hitting the waterways and trails in an Aussie summer and can still cut-it at any pub. More importantly, you won’t look like a lobster at the bar.

The EVRY-Day Men’s Cargo Shorts have rapidly become a favourite for those sweaty summer days with the usability, coolness and lightweight standing out, and how good is it to have some shorts that double as boardies, and both drain and dry quickly? The Jason Woodside EVRY-Day UPF 50+ Bucket Hat simply does its job well and adds a subtle hint of style, having now become a regular in the beach bag. All in all, if you’re looking for sun protection in a comfy, usable product, there is no doubt Kathmandu has hit the nail on the head with its UPF50+ Sun Protection apparel.

$90 – EVRY-Day Men’s Cargo Shorts
$140 – SUN-Scout UPF Men’s Long Sleeve Hooded Shirt 
$50 – Jason Woodside EVRY-Day UPF 50+ Bucket Hat

See Kathmandu for more info on this apparel range and all other Kathmandu gear.

The post Kathmandu UPF50+ gear: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

It’d be easy to say designing an effective duffel or travel pack is simple but that could not be further from the truth. Add in the versatility to use said pack as a duffel and/or backpack in the one trip (or separate trips), and suddenly things like harness systems, straps, additional handles for either lifting or tying down on a roof-rack, and extra storage areas, for example, all come into play. It is here that Kathmandu’s product team has gone to town – and in an effective, no-nonsense way – to address all the needs of the various ways in which the Litehaul Pack can be carried and used.

The Litehaul Pack is made using a composite fabric (79% nylon/21% polyester), with poly lining and mesh. That outer fabric is actually certified as bluesign® approved in regard to meeting that certification’s strict criteria around its production’s impact on people and the environment.  It measures 710mm in length, 360mm in width and is 340mm deep, for a total volume capacity of 65 litres and an impressively light weight of just 2kg. The Kathmandu designers have set the pack’s overall size and volume right at the most popular capacity for a pack or luggage needed for a week or two of travel, and it’s one that can be carried by anyone from around 10 years of age upwards.

Additional – and very welcome – design features include lockable YKK zips and that aforementioned RS2 harness that is, itself, stored in a zipped section of the bag. The shoulder strap is detachable and there is an excellent wide zipped front for easy access to the inner space to stow gear easily (and be able to see what’s in there, once it is all packed). 

The Litehaul Pack borrows from backpack design with an easily accessed top compartment where you can store small gear and mobile phones (there’s also a Litehaul RFID Pod that fits in here, too). The top and side grab handles are beefy and, as we found in testing, are also handy if/when you may have to tie the Litehaul Pack down to a vehicle’s roof-rack.  Add in an outer bottle pocket, an inner mesh pocket, and outer compression straps and you’ve got a comprehensive travel pack that should be up for all sorts of treatment, whether at the airport or in the back/on top of a vehicle. 

In the field

The Litehaul Pack is a new resident in the AG Adventure gear shed, with only around a month of use at the time of writing. However, during this time, it’s been used for overnighters, weekend camping trips, and as a mountain bike gear bag for a day trip to some trails. During each of these, the bag has simply worked and been used, mainly, in its duffel bag format. The large strap (and padded shoulder section) is comfortable and easy to adjust and lifting the Litehaul in and out of a vehicle has been no problems, thanks to those hefty handles. 

Interestingly, the top/side zipped compartment has been great; fishing around for a phone/driver’s licence/ATM cards, etc., has been very easy as they’ve all been stored in there, rather than floating around inside the large compartment. The larger compartment’s full-opening zip – and light-coloured interior – is also very much appreciated, both when packing and, again, when looking for something in its depths.

Using the bag’s RS2 harness is an easy process, with the cover quick to unzip and, once you’ve adjusted the harness to your height/shape, away you go. For something that may be viewed as an afterthought or gimmick, the RS2 harness is anything but – it functions exactly as it should, providing ample support (and comfort) when you’re loaded up; it’s a full-monty harness system with oodles of adjustment. Impressive.

There are few negatives to the Litehaul, with probably the only one of note being the slight bulk of the RS2 harness when it is packed. When the harness is packed away, it does intrude slightly on the bag’s main storage compartment. However, this is to be expected and, really, if you want a bag that has both a shoulder strap and a (very good) full harness system, that’s just how it is. Other than that minor point, there’s very little to think twice about with the Litehaul; as mentioned earlier, this load-lugger just does the job it’s designed to do.

The final word on the Kathmandu Litehaul Pack

The outdoor luggage market is crowded with different segments, whether it’s bare-bones duffel bags, travel packs, or the latest and greatest hybrid designs, where the Litehaul resides. For those looking for a versatile carry-all that offers a clever design, a fully featured and comfy harness system, light weight, eco-friendly (and tough) materials, and is built to last, the Litehaul Pack is well worth a look.

RRP: $450 See Kathmandu for more info on the Litehaul and other outdoor gear.

The post Kathmandu Litehaul Pack: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Nemo Dagger OSMO 2P tent

This dual-wall tent uses Nemo’s proprietary OSMO poly-nylon composite fabric that is woven from 100% recycled yarns, is free of fire retardants, and is claimed to be stronger (and stretch less than wet) when compared to similar tent fabrics. The OSMO 2P is also very tough, roomy, well ventilated, and boasts a clever design, all wrapped in a package weighing 1.86kg (1.52kg stripped down for trail use). It ain’t the cheapest, but it was an absolute stand-out during testing. Even with that steep price, we reckon it’s one of the best two-person tent offerings on the market today.

Companion Rover 100 Lithium Ion Power Station

The Companion Rover 100 Lithium packs plenty of portable power into its svelte shape and is, for the regular campers at Aus Geo Adventure, one of the first things loaded into the vehicle for a weekend away. It weighs 11.45kg, is compact (410mm L x 325mm W x 370mm H), has two 10-amp power outlets, two 10A Anderson outlets, two 5V 3a USB outlets, two 5V 3a USB-C outlets, a punchy 5W LED area light and an easy-to-read display. Plus, it is solar compatible if you need to recharge it. Powered by the Companion Rover 100 Lithium Ion Power Station, the fridge will keep the family in fresh food and cold drinks, and the kids’ gadgets charged on that weekend away.

Victorinox ‘Mountaineer’ Swiss Army knife

This handy gadget has reached icon status over its 125 years of production, in its various forms. The ‘Mountaineer’ is another in the long line of no-bullshit/it just works mutli-tools that Victorinox has made its legacy. Don’t be fooled by its diminutive appearance (it weighs a scant 109.1g, is 91mm long and 20.5mm wide when folded), the Mountaineer has plenty to offer, with 18 outdoor tools packed inside. This is close to the ultimate example of big things in small packages. 

Mountain Designs Redline 1P tent

From the moment this one-person tent arrived at the Aus Geo Adventure office, more than 12 months ago now, it has been in near-constant demand from staff and contributors. The Redline 1P bucks the trend of solo shelters by offering more than the bare minimum of space and doing so through intelligent design cues so as not to impact the appeal of these shelters, i.e., their light weight and compact size. The Redline 1P delivers on the light/compact remit and then impresses again with its spacious interior (and decent-sized vestibule), with length, height, and width above average for this market segment. Add in its robust construction – one robust single hubbed pole, excellent ventilation for three-season use, plus a tough outer fly and floor – and you’ve got one very impressive single-person shelter that is brilliant bang for your bucks.

Kathmandu Heli R down jacket

Lightweight, clever design, all-rounder capability and eco-friendly (complete with QR code to check its environmental credentials). It’s hard to go past the lightweight (300g) Heli R down jacket as one of Kathmandu’s most exciting apparel releases for 2023. 

With bluesign® certified 100% recycled polyester outer fabric and lining, combined with recycled plastic trims and zip-tape, and Responsible Down Standard (RDS) certified 600-fill down (80% duck down/20% duck feather), you can wear this for warmth and with a warm heart, knowing your choice of this jacket encourages Kathmandu (and other apparel companies) to continue down the eco-friendly path. Winner, winner… you know the rest. 

Aeroe bikepacking gear

When Aus Geo Adventure’s bikepacking cohort first heard of this new Kiwi brand – and its promise of a unique multi-bike-compatible gear-lugging solution – we were intrigued. Our first hands-on look was via Aeroe’s Spider Rear Rack (with two dry bags) and Handlebar Cradle. The Spider Rear Rack (in particular) was a standout in how easy it was to fit, how effective it was at carrying gear and, equally, in how well it worked on any type of bike – dual-suspension MTB included – exactly as promised. Later in 2023, we looked further at the Aeroe accessories list and grabbed the Quick Mount Pod for testing. It proved just as effective as the rest of Aeroe’s simple and brilliant system. Or should that be simply brilliant? 

OZtrail Fast Frame BlockOut 10-Person Tent

It’s hard not to recoil when the words “10-person tent” ring in your ear, with visions of a huge canvas Taj Mahal that weighs a literal ton, takes an hour to set up/pack away and, when packed, is the size of an over-fed bullock, following soon after. Well, that was us, until we got our hands on the OZtrail Fast Frame BlockOut 10P Tent. This, folks, is a gamechanger. The positives start with the weight; at 33kg, the tent is relatively light for its capacity and is not too much of a job to load in the vehicle and carry it to the campsite. The separate ‘rooms’ are of huge appeal, as is the robust materials in use throughout. Add in the tent’s easy-to-use fast setup hub system and plenty of ventilation, and you’ll no longer run screaming when someone suggests a big extended-family camping trip.

Arc’teryx Cerium LT Hoody

Think of outdoor brands with serious credence and it’s hard to go past Arc’teryx. The Canadian brand has been at the pointy end of technical outdoor gear for close to 35 years. This mid-weight down-fill jacket is a prime example, with its high-quality manufacturing, durable and user-friendly attributes, and clever tech, including the combo of Coreloft synthetic insulation (in high-wear areas) and 850-fill down, wrapped in a lightweight (305g) and compact jacket. For anything short of snow/blizzard conditions in Australia, the Cerium LT Hoody (when worn with base- and mid-layer) will keep you warm. Yep, it’s up there pricewise, but meets the adage of “you pay for quality”, and then some.

Mont Zero Superlight sleeping bag

Aussie brand Mont has been manufacturing tough and reliable outdoor gear for decades and the Mont Zero SL encompasses all the brand’s renowned qualities of attention to detail, robust build and a very (for the tech) decent pricing. A 2-3 season (rated 8 degrees Celsius for cold sleepers; 2 degrees for warm folks), ultralight bag, it does not skimp on quality, with a toasty 230g of 1000+ loft goose-down and the use of Anti-Gravity Nylon outer fabric (claimed to be the world’s lightest nylon), to bring the bag in at a featherweight 417g. The SL also packs down super-compact, making it ideal for fast/light hiking and bikepacking adventures. 

Yakima OnRamp e-bike carrier

The e-bike market has exploded in the past few years, but with that welcome electrical assist comes a motor, and beefed-up components, all of which add heft. Enter Yakima’s OnRamp e-bike carrier. This big bopper can accept two 30kg bikes and offers tool-free adjustment, fold-up capability when not in use, and an integrated 1300mm slot-in ramp for ease of loading/unloading bikes. The OnRamp accepts bikes up to 1270mm in length with tyres up to 3.25”, however you can purchase a fat-tyre bracket for tyres up to 4.5”. Add in typically tough Yakima construction, along with inclusion of the brand’s ubiquitous inbuilt bottle opener, and you have a winner.

The North Face Stormbreak 2 tent

When this two-person outdoor shelter arrived for testing we thought it’d be another run-of-the-mill hiking tent, albeit one at an appealing asking price. It ended up being a lot more than that. At 2.42kg and three-season rated, the dual-wall Stormbreak 2 packs down small, but still offers plenty of interior space and gear storage in its two vestibules (each is of 0.45 square-metre in size). Plus, there are additional interior pockets for more stowage of kit. The interior measures 220cm x 127cm and offers 1.09m roof height – one of the tallest in this segment. The use of two roof poles (rather than the usual one) in conjunction with the two main cross-over poles, aids stability, plus it is quick to set up/pull down. In short, this tent is great bang for your bucks.

Ozpig Series 2 Portable Stove

Yep, the name is great, is it not? And it gets better; this unique camp cooking solution is versatile, too, providing a great cooking base for any handy camp/backyard chef, and also used as a portable (or backyard) potbelly heater. The OzPig Series 2 comes with two hotplates (which can be easily swapped around to be positioned over the fire or off to the side), and there is an optional chimney. Yeah, it sounds like a novelty, but the chimney works brilliantly when cooking under cover, directing the fire-smoke out and away from the covered cooking area. Other options include a rotisserie, wok, and more. Built from cast-iron, it’s beefy, but we were surprised how often we made room for it in our vehicle when heading bush. 

Merida Silex 700

Boasting a huge revision for 2024, the popular Silex is available in a range of models, with a choice of aluminium or carbon-fibre frames, both matched to a carbon front fork. This new-gen Silex has had a major geometry tweak, with a 69.5-degree head-angle providing a more relaxed ride (that’s 1.5 degrees slacker than the previous incarnation). Tyre clearance has been increased (you can now fit 700x45c tyres) and the Luddites among us can opt for a 1x or a 2x Shimano GRX drivetrain. Beefy 180mm disc brakes ensure plenty of stopping power and there’s internally routed dropper capacity. You can throw on a set of suspension forks if you wish, as the frame has been designed around this option. With a raft of model options Merida looks to have a capable gravel/bikepacking rig for everyone. Roll on, we say.

Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT sleeping pad

The Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT is a lightweight four-season sleeping pad that is suited to all seasons and especially winter in the alpine regions of Oz (indeed, we spent the winter months using this exclusively on a trans-alps expedition through NSW/VIC). Its horizontal baffles and multi-chambered core (with a tough 70-denier base and 30D top layer) produce a lightweight (439g) sleeping pad with an incredible 7.3 R-value (R-values measure warming qualities; the higher the better). That very high R-value is courtesy of the clever Triangular Core Matrix (a twin-layer of triangular baffles) and the reflective film inside that reflects radiant heat back to the sleeper. Clever stuff from a highly regarded outdoor brand with the NeoAir Therm NXT now an all-time favourite of our senior gear testing team.

Mountain Designs Stratus Hooded Rain Jacket

Iconic Aussie brand, Mountain Designs, released this waterproof outer shell this year and it quickly proved that MD’s design team know exactly what is required (and what isn’t) in an outer shell for Australian outdoor conditions. The Stratus uses the popular, well-proved, Pertex Shield waterproof/breathable fabric, in a 2.5-layer format (a combo of a 100 per cent recycled polyester outer shell and 75 per cent recycled polyester layer) that is designed for extreme conditions (it has a 20,000mm Hydrostatic Head waterproof rating, which is very high, as well as a PFC-free coating). Add in plenty of ventilation, an adjustable hood and other smart design cues and it was a winner in 2023. 

Expedition 134 Heavy Duty Plastic Storage Box 55L

Don’t, for any reason whatsoever, think of this as ‘just a box’. To do so would be to ignore the fact the Expedition 134 Heavy Duty Plastic Storage Box packs in plenty of clever features to ensure you’ll never need to worry about packing your camping gear effectively and, secondly, whether that gear will get wet or dusty (full disclosure: it won’t). From the food-grade plastic used in its construction, the multiple tie-down points that still – even when tied down – allow you to open the lid, to the rubber seal that keeps dust/water/dirt out, all point at a smartly designed storage product. Add in three robust latches, the under-box moulding to assist stacking them on top of each other and being able to withstand 120kg of weight (for double duty as a campsite step), and this innocuous ‘box’ is the brilliant endgame for camp storage. We love it. 

MET Crossover and Crackerjack bike helmets

Renowned bike helmet brand, MET, covered the entire riding market with the release of the Crossover and the Crackerjack helmets. The Crossover is the ultimate all-rounder with its suitability to everything from that week-day commute to that trail-blast or gravel ride on the weekend. It offers extended head coverage, an EPS liner and removable visor (for swapping from commute to MTB duties). Its MIPS-Evolve® rotational management system is integrated with the fit system, and it has plenty of airflow to offer wearers, thanks to the 17 vents. Clever design features include the 360-degree head belt to avoid head pressure points, and a reflective rear decal, as well as integrated rear LED light (along with four spotlights).

The Crackerjack is a brilliant option for the younger riders and this latest incarnation boasts improved coverage (extended head coverage) and more comfort, thanks to its 13 vents. It shares the 36-degree head belt of the Crossover, and includes an integrated LED light, with three spotlights. It’s easy to see why it’s MET’s most popular helmet for kids.

The North Face Gold Kazoo sleeping bag

Light in weight, a clever relaxed-mummy design to optimise warmth and sleep-comfort and made from 100% recycled materials (with a water-repellent finish), the Gold Kazoo has become a firm favourite of the Aus Geo ADVENTURE gear test team. The Gold Kazoo has a +2-degree to +7-degree Comfort rating, making it ideal for spring/summer in Oz. 

The mummy design’s generous interior is evident in the 157cm shoulder, 145cm hip and 107cm foot circumference. There’s two 2/3 two-way side zippers and an oversized lay-flat hood to further optimise warmth/cooling. Its standard size fits occupants up to 183cm in height. It also comes in at a respectable price for such a well featured sleeping bag. 

Shimano GRX

Shimano’s latest incarnation of its highly regarded gravel specific GRX component group landed late in 2023 and straight away we were (and still are) impressed. The GRX RX820 1×12 drivetrain includes two 1x options as well as (for us Luddites) a 2x drivetrain. The single-ring (1x) options are the UNBEATABLE 10-45 cassette or wider-range 10-51 (dubbed UNSTOPPABLE). Both can be paired with a 40 or 42T chainring. For 2x fans, the RX820 UNDROPPABLE includes 48/41front chainring and either an 11-34 or 11-36 cassette. No hill will be too steep. Updated RX880 carbon gravel wheels are now 8g lighter per pair. The 32mm low-profile rim height and 25mm inner rim width can fit tyres from 32mm to 50mm. A revamped direct engagement hub also features, along with the ability to quickly convert from Micro Spline to HG L2 12-speed freehubs.

Next up are the GRX RX820 brake/shift levers, specifically designed for the popular flared handlebars. Cleverly, the 1×12 shifter/brakes include two options for the left lever, being used as just the brake, or a dropper-specific option for dropper post actuation. Yep, clever. Last, but definitely not least, are the RX610 cranks and shift levers, for 1x and 2x drivetrains. Crank length options include 165mm, 170mm, 172.5mm and 175mm. There’s also a new 38T front ring option – along with the 40T – for the 1x drivetrain. Yep, the iconic Japanese brand has been busy, and it’s brilliant news for gravel/bikepacking enthusiasts. 

OM System Tough TG-7

Waterproof, shockproof, freezeproof, the TG-7 builds on OM System’s (formerly Olympus) reputation for building bombproof compact adventure cameras, with its predecessor – the Tough TG-6 – widely recognised as the best rugged camera on the market. The TG-7 has a 12-megapixel sensor and is dustproof, freezeproof (down to -10 degrees Celsius) and waterproof to 15 metres. It offers a fast five frames per second (5FPS) with the mechanical shutter, or super-quick 20FPS if using the electronic shutter. The camera’s 25-200mm zoom lens (35mm equivalent) is a fast f/2.0 to f/4.9. Add in a three-inch colour LCD, WIFI and GPS capability, 4K video, lightweight (249g) and compact (113.9mm wide; 65.8mm high and 32.7mm deep) and you can see why the team at Aus Geo Adventure is suitably impressed. 

Mountain Designs Pro Elite Down Jacket

Part of Mountain Designs’ all-new alpine-oriented Pro Elite range, the Down Jacket is the most versatile Pro Elite garment. The Down Jacket still shares a lot of features with the Down Parka, while offering a wider breadth of capability in that it would be also ideal for high-altitude trekking and expeditions in cold climates, such as NZ’s Southern Alps in autumn and winter, the NSW/VIC back-country, Tassie, etc. It includes the use of goose-down and synthetic fill throughout, the Pertex Quantum Pro shell outer, plus DownTek and Repel water treatments. There is heavier-duty material in high-wear areas, plenty of ventilation, and toasty warm dual-insulated pockets, too.
RRP $800

Yeti SB120 LR (Lunch Ride)

One of the world’s most iconic MTB brands released the rowdy LR (‘Lunch Ride’) version of its popular SB120 trail bike in 2023. The Yeti crew hasn’t messed too much with the already-impressive standard SB120 when creating the Lunch Ride version (so named in recognition of the custom mods – Yeti staffers make to their own bikes for the company’s midday rides in the Colorado mountains). Mods include a jump in front-end travel, from a FOX 34 130mm fork to a RockShox Pike 140mm. Stopping power is now courtesy of beefy Code RSC brakes. Finishing off the LR-centric tweaks is a RockShox Super Deluxe shock out the back; additional oil volume is always welcome in a hard-working rear shock. Add in a lifetime frame warranty, and we reckon it’s time for lunch, don’t you?
RRP from $6500

Australia’s Best 100 Bike Rides

Everyone has fond memories of their first bike ride – and this collection of the best 100 rides in Australia will add plenty more of those. Whether you are just starting off on two wheels, or have been cycling for decades, the sensation of absolute freedom as you pedal along a path or trail, exploring some of Australia’s most spectacular locations, is why riding a bike always brings a smile to everyone’s face. This really is the lucky country when it comes to cycling: from leisurely routes along our beautiful coastline, to amazing two-wheels journeys through our unique wilderness, Australia has a ride for every cyclist, no matter their age or ability. This Australian Geographic book collects 100 amazing Aussie bike rides and includes a full ride description, grading of the ride, what type of bike you will need, distances and, of course, spectacular photography that will inspire you to pump up those tyres and get out there. 
RRP $40

Samsung T7 Shield portable SSD

There’s a lot more to being a rugged portable drive than just a label, however: said PSD needs to fulfill its promises of speed, functionality and durability, every single time. There are a few rugged/tough drives around, and we recently spent nearly six months testing one of the market’s most popular: the Samsung T7 Shield. The Samsung T7 Shield solid state drive (SSD) is available in three capacities: 1TB, 2TB and the 4TB version tested here, and it is compatible with a number of operating systems, such as macOS, Android and Windows. Loaded with tech, very light in weight and tough in construction, the T7 Shield was subjected to tough conditions during its testing tenure and came through unscathed and, most importantly, with all data intact. It ain’t cheap, but you get plenty of reliable portable storage bang for your bucks. We don’t want to give it back.

The post Hot stuff: The best outdoor gear of 2023 appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The evening was formatted as an Adventure Story Slam, in which attendees were encouraged to relate a particular deed of misadventure to the crowd, with five minutes in which to do so. Celebrity MC Caro Ryan from Lotsafreshair ably organised proceedings from the welcome to country smoke ceremony onwards, even threatening to sing if the orators broke their five-minute time limit.

Nine slammers were picked randomly from the hatful of brave applicants to speak alongside three guest storytellers, one of which was Tim Macartney-Snape, who regaled us with the time he fell off Gasherbrum IV. Prizes, judged by an expert panel which included hemiplegic climber Paul Pritchard, were awarded for best delivery, most adventurous story, and the Golden Duffel for inspiration. Winners walked away with armfuls of The North Face gear, Yeti coolers, beer and wine. 

Throughout the proceedings, the crowd could get stuck into complimentary beverages from HBC’s range of tasty craft beers, and line their stomachs with pizza slices from the Booze Bus or Taco Taco’s tacos. All in all, it was a very enjoyable event.

The post Storytellers: The North Face Hobart Adventure Story Slam appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Samsung T7 Shield solid state drive (SSD) is available in three capacities: 1TB, 2TB and the 4TB version tested here, and it is compatible with a number of operating systems, such as macOS, Android and Windows. For this test, it was used primarily with macOS. The T7 Shield’s diminutive size (88m L x 59mm W x 13mm H) belies its grunt, as does its weight, at a feathery 98g. Inside, however, is the latest and (as we found) the greatest in portable storage tech, all based around fast transfer and that obviously robust construction. Transfer speeds (USB 3.2 Gen 2)are a claimed 1050MB/s (read) and 1000MB/s (write) and this can be maintained very well thanks to the outer case’s rubber exterior and its Dynamic Thermal Guard. Yes, that’s a mouthful, but after six months of watching (and timing, occasionally) this mighty midget transfer files we can vouch for its effectiveness.

Of course, the big story of this small powerhouse is its robust design; outdoor/adventure photographers and videographers will be very happy with the IP65 water- and dust-resistance rating. This means the T7 Shield can withstand “low-pressure water jets from any direction” (read rain-drops and splashes, etc.) and protects the drive’s inner from liquid ingress. Same goes for dust. It is, however, important to note this is not fully waterproof, so it won’t protect against full immersion. Having said that – and after what our testers have put this unit through (more on that below) – this rating is more than enough. Oh, and the T7 Shield is also able to withstand a drop from 3m in height, too. Impressive.

Moving to the inside, the T7 Shield boasts Samsung’s excellent “Magician” management system, allowing you to check the drive’s performance (and optimise it), it’s health (so you can see in advance any potential issues/points of potential failure), while offering data security and a secure erase function if you need it. Magician offers more, too, with included data migration software, portable SSD software and plenty more. In short, it offers an incredible depth of management underneath that near-innocuous exterior, which is all very impressive, but how did it perform out in the field? Well, we thought you’d never ask.

In the field

None of the testers at Aus Geo ADVENTURE are renowned for being very careful with gear, whether it’s review units or their own personal kit. That does not mean anything is mistreated, it is just that, due to the conditions we often work in – remote areas and across rugged terrain – for long periods of time, we need equipment that is reliable in very testing conditions.

To this end, the Samsung T7 Shield was not spared or coddled in any way. A number of assignments saw the T7 Shield used on location during river expeditions, bikepacking adventures, long (and short) hikes, and on one outback road trip, in the northern Simpson Desert. The T7 Shield was subjected to unexpected splashes when being used in a boat and was twice covered in dust and sand when a vehicle being photographed drove past and covered the photographer, the laptop and the T7 in fine sand and dust. 

No matter the treatment, the T7 just needed a brush-off or wipe, and it was ready to go; on one occasion it was plugged in to transfer files at short notice back to our Sydney HQ while still covered in dirt and grit and it performed that function at a fast speed and effectively. 

When the T7 Shield is not out and about, it resides in the Editor’s home office and/or our city offices, being used as the main back-up for all things Aus Geo ADVENTURE. Impressively, there’s never been one single hiccup during the six months of testing. A fluke? Perhaps, but we reckon it is the fact that the T7 Shield’s design simply works – and it has continued to work with minimal fuss throughout its tenure. 

The final word on the Samsung T7 Shield

For anyone who spends a considerable amount of time in the outdoors and is a photographer/videographer/vlogger and needs to be able to transfer data quickly between sources in any conditions, the Samsung T7 Shield looks to be tailor-made. At its essence, it is a very efficient portable storage device, regardless of where you will be using it. Indeed, with its robust construction, fast transfer speeds and its compact size and weight it will (obviously) work in any circumstances, from the most remote dusty/rugged desert environment to in the office.

In short, you’ll go a long way to find a portable SSD that has such breadth of capability. It ain’t cheap, but you will most likely have this mini monster of a portable SSD reliably transferring your precious data for many years, which makes it a good (and smart) investment.

RRP: $209 (1TB); $349 (2TB); $489 (4TB) See Samsung for more information.

The post Samsung T7 Shield portable SSD: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design of the Scarpa Kailash Trek GTX

The reason for my original Scarpa boots’ longevity, in the face of my lacklustre care and maintenance regime, is simple: that boot was built incredibly tough – and this Kailash Trek GTX is, albeit only after a couple of months’ use, looking to provide the same robustness (with my new enthusiasm for care of my gear), with some additional comfort, and at a distinctly lighter weight (my previous pair were predominantly leather in construction). This is the wide-foot variant of this boot that, for this shovel-footed hiker, is great news; my previous boots fitted well but were always ever-so-slightly snug in the forefoot. Not enough to cause any dramas, but still, even in this initial test period, I can report that the little bit of extra wiggle-room has been welcome.

The Kailash Trek GTX is constructed of a 1.8mm suede leather/nylon combo upper (with waterproof Gore-tex lining) and a tough TPU toe-cap. The boots aren’t all that heavy; the supple suede leather upper and lightweight PU mid-sole helps here, and that combo also aids in ensuring there is ample flex in the boot. The polyurethane (PU) mid-sole is further supported by the tough Vibram outsole, which is designed for optimum grip and durability.

A nifty feature of the outsole is the high number of self-cleaning channels that, again, ensures that the sole does not get ‘clogged up’ with track debris, which could otherwise inhibit the base of the sole’s effective contact with the track surface. The extedned TPU toe-cap is a welcome design implementation as well. The lace hooks are all robust and, overall, the boot’s physical design reflects its intended use, i.e., day-hikes, longer multi-day treks, etc.

In the field

In the past month or so, the Scarpa Kailash Trek GTX boots have seen a mix of day-walks (predominantly) and two overnight hikes. The boots have been comfortabel since day one; the mix of leather and synthetic upper, with just the right amount of flex, has no doubt helped, but the wider foot-base has also been a welcome revelation. One concern I had – and this applies to all boots with waterproof membranes – was my feet getting overly hot due to a lack of breathability thanks to that extra layer. This has, to date, not been an issue; the mesh areas of the outer seem to help and the fact the boot is quite light overall (635g per boot for a size 42) means I am expending less effort while walking.

The medium density mid-sole works very well to absorb impact and also combines well with the tougher, and very grippy, Vibram outsole – this, in itself, reaffirms my confidence when tackling rugged and uneven terrain, allowing me to spend less time looking down, and more time enjoying the surrounds.

I have always been a fan of a high-cut ankle has proved welcome with its additional aid to stability on rougher terrain, as well. The wearer’s foot is protected on more rugged and technical tracks thanks to the moulded TPU toe-cap, which helpfully extends back quite a bit, too – that additional protection is something always welcome. It’s early days still for these boots – summer trekking will be a tougher test of breathability and comfort, I believe – but this first six weeks have proved that Scarpa has not lost its touch when it comes to boots that simply work.

The final word on the Scarpa Kailash Trek GTX – for now

As mentioned above, it is still relatively early days for the Kailash Trek GTX. The next six months will see these boots well and truly tested, with a few multi-day treks on the horizon, the biggest being a seven-day jaunt through NZ’s Southern Alps in February.

Even at this early stage, I can see no negatives to these boots. For those looking for a sturdy, reliable and comfortable hiking boot, the Scarpa Kailash GTX is a worthwile consideration. The build quality, smart design implementations and the fact you know that Scarpa has been making hiking/trekking boots for decades, all point to these being a smart, long-term purchase for the keen walker.

Look for another online update in December and then a full long-term report of these boots in Issue 11 of Australian Geographic ADVENTURE.

RRP: $519.95 See Scarpa for more info.

The post Scarpa Kailash Trek GTX hiking boots: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Photo exhibitions toured, magazine pages were thick and hardcover books showed off our adventurous interactions with the world. Then TV joined the party with documentaries and mountain films, and Warren Miller changed the landscape of ski films on VHS. And what seemed like moments later we were watching Felix Baumgartner jump from the stratosphere to Earth on these crazy little devices we called iPhones and on this crazy little thing we call the internet.

But not everything has changed, long-haired groms are still busting backside half cab heelflips at the local skatepark (whatever that means), just like they did decades ago. The only difference is now they’re capturing it on their smartphones and streaming it live. 

Our ‘new world’ is about speed. How quickly can we capture moments? And how quickly can we share them with others?  Whether you’re a lover or hater of the high paced world of digital image sharing, there’s a good chance you’re a ‘user’, even if you won’t admit it, and smartphone magic is now creeping into the realms of professional delivery for commercial clients on a large scale. 

Nowhere is this shift more visible that the Southern Hemisphere’s home of extreme action (or extreme insanity), AJ Hackett Bungy Jumping in Queenstown NZ. 

An adrenalin sport icon

For many, the mere words AJ Hackett tightens the chest muscles; Some in fear, others in excitement. You see, way back in the late 1980s, ‘Kiwi-Kid’ Allan John (AJ) Hackett decided jumping off structures on oversized elastic bands was not only bloody good fun, but potentially a commercially viable adventure attraction. In the late ’80s he chose to ‘test the waters’ of his big dream by jumping from the the Eiffel Tower in Paris. AJ was promptly arrested by the French Gendarmerie but soon let go, apparently with a few subtle pats on the back. Beyond the fines, AJ knew he was onto something.

Returning to New Zealand, AJ opened the first ever commercial Bungy site at the Kawarau Bridge in Queenstown NZ in 1988. AJ and his business partners soon realised that like the filmer’s and photographers before them, capturing action was key to Bungy’s success and they installed oversized video cameras and later, high resolution DSLR’s to manually feed imagery to complex room-sized multi-screen editing suites with an aim to deliver the ultimate customer experience. 

The AJ Hackett name quickly grew to become one of the world’s most iconic brands in adventure tourism and they now operate in more than ten countries around the world. But like many adventure sports, the challenge to capture the thrill of Bungy was no easy feat.

And this is where I join their rather odd story. A decade ago, I decided, myself, to gaffa-tape a DSLR to my hand and jump from a perfectly good tower into thin air to try and capture that ‘bungy feeling’. I promptly promised myself I would never Bungy again. 

A promise broken, all in the name of research

That promise lasted until very recently, when I found myself at Nevis Bungy in Queenstown, NZ. The Southern Hemisphere’s largest and longest free-fall bungy jump; I’d heard rumours they were using Apple iPhones to capture the massive 134m and 8.5 second free-fall and I was intrigued. 

As usual, my intrigue rapidly led to being in over my head. I somehow found myself signed up for a bungy jump, but if that wasn’t enough, I unthinkingly also appeared to have ticked the boxes for a canyon swing, and catapult… Yep! you heard right. A “Catapult”. Why not go for the thrillogy? 

Pretty soon, teetering on the edge of a 134m free-fall with only a couple of elastic bands wrapped around my ankles, I was second-guessing my interest in AJ’s new-age iPhone video and photo capabilities. 

Oddly, instead of pondering my imminent death, or whether the iPhone tech would capture it, instead I considered whether olive oil ice-cream might in fact be the best flavour ice-cream in the world?” (don’t knock it until you’ve tried it). From memory I was still pondering the olive-oil dilemma when a casual kiwi-kid half my age, but with a very authoritative tone, counted 3-2-1… then I was plummeting. 

Related: Apple’s Emergency SOS via satellite now available in Australia

And this is when the magic happened. Not for me – I was far too busy being terrified – but more in the realms of imaging. Whilst my brain was trying to catch up with the fact that I was about to die without imparting my olive oil ice-cream wisdom, thirteen iPhone 14 Pros somehow manage to use some high-tech stuff like ARKit and LiDAR technology to recognise a human subject and detect distance from the camera. AJ Hackett’s very own app called ‘Epic’ then used Apple’s machine learning algorithm, Core ML, to detect myself and the Bungy cord travelling through the frame. The multiple phones then managed to capture both video, and high-res still imagery of every moment of my terrifying plummet into nothingness … all from multiple angles. 

If I wasn’t so terrified, I would have been impressed. This all sounds like space-age tech but is at our fingertips, literally. Or at least in our pockets. 

Not only was AJ’s complex iPhone system rather more advanced than my previous gaffa-taped DSLR effort but incredibly all the phones instantaneously buzzed their content through cyberspace to Nevis HQ to be compiled, edited and packaged up for me, all before I could even check whether my eyeballs were still in their sockets. 

By the time I shakily stumbled pale-faced back to Nevis HQ a complete video edit and photo package were waiting for me, apparently to prove that the latest smartphone tech is much faster than my terrified human brain can comprehend.

When my brain finally settled, I began to ponder if I could somehow outrun this new tech?

iPhone: the perfect complement to adventure?

Fortunately, I had the world’s biggest human catapult at my disposal. And so yet another kiwi-kid tightened my neck brace, to ready my body to accelerate at 3Gs from 0-100km/h in a 150m slingshot, I contemplated whether this really was a smart way to consider the latest A16 Bionic chip tech. I guessed it probably wasn’t, but too late. Whoosh. Then it’s time for the “Swing”… by now you know the pattern. “It’s best to go backward and no-handed,”the kiwi-kid reassures me. I don’t believe him, but I do it all the same and then three, two, one… brain explosion.

Again, and again, vision of a wide-eyed me is captured and whizzed back to home base where, yet again, a photo and video package sits waiting to reiterate how silly this entire game is. 

I finally decide I can’t outrun all those little lenses peeking up at me; to be honest the 48MP cameras and six-core CPUs of the iPhone are coping better than my own grey matter.

From the safety of a bar back in Queenstown I find myself impressed with the implementation of the latest iPhone tech into a pro workflow and wonder, “where to next?”. I decide, however, that the next time I choose to query the merging world of smartphones and adrenalin sports, maybe I’ll just check out what the local groms are doing at the local skate park; this idea of plummeting off perfectly good structures never was a good idea, but I must admit, like AJ discovered, it is kind of bloody good fun.

See Apple for more info on the latest iPhone camera tech.

The post Three, two, one, snap: AJ Hackett teams with Apple to capture action appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Fortunately, mother nature does not demand swag-sleepers or instant coffee addicts only, but rather rewards anybody with a willingness to spend a night under the stars.  Somewhere in between the simplicity of a swag and comfort of a tent lies the OZtrail Easy Fold 1 Person Stretcher Tent, a halfway ground between luxury and laziness, and we kind of love it.

Design

The OZtrail Easy Fold 1 Person Stretcher Tent is an easy-to-use one-person, three-season stretcher tent for car camping. The packed unit is no ‘lightweight’ with its powder-coated steel frame making up much of the 12.91kg weight, however the unit folds down to a tidy 103cm L x 21cm W x 21cm H. Upon opening into ‘sleep mode’ the stretcher unfolds to a 200cm L x 80cm W and the heavy-duty polyester stretcher-bed sits 45cm off the ground, offering a maximum weight-rating of 150kg.

The steel tent frame self-erects and expands via two extendable poles to deliver an internal head-roof-height of 80 cm with 35cm at the feet, with four handy pockets at the head. Tent material is a combination of Ultra Fine No-See-Um Mesh and UV-protected polyester fabric providing copious ventilation, whilst waterproofing is delivered via a UVTex™ Sun Tough Fly sheet with Dryseam factory taped seams. Prices vary online with an RRP of $330 and the item also comes with a two-year manufacturing warranty.

In the field

There is no doubt the OZtrail Easy Fold 1 Person Stretcher Tent is a car-camper’s delight but no weight-weenie’s cup-of-tea. The set-up is, put simply, a lazy-person’s bed and tent all-in-one, and we love it. It finds the halfway ground between a swag and tent and provides a simple, easy to use, rapid all-in-one shelter and bed that can be assembled in under one-minute and disassembled nearly as quickly. At 12.91kg it is a reasonably hefty unit to lug around but realistically most users are unlikely to carry it more than a few hundred meters to camp. The killer-feature of the design is the simplicity and ease of use. 

Upon finding a level piece of ground, just unzip the carry bag, lay the unit on its side and unfold it. As you open the stretcher, the tent self-erects and two extension-poles with push-button locks finish off the setup. The fly sheet drapes easily over the top of the frame, if you remember to unzip the door, and is secured by four clips to the stretcher base. Two further poles and guy lines can be used to support an awning, and a guy line at the base tensions a foot vent. The spacious gap between fly sheet and inner along with large mesh panels helps eliminate condensation build-up and isn’t an issue if the fly is vented well. 

We found the stretcher to be comfortable and ideal for warm weather camping, however a lack of under-body-insulation means a camp-mattress is advised for cold weather camping. The internal dimensions are spacious enough to sit up and however my 188cm frame was rather snug head-to-toe when I stretched out to sleep and the 35cm foot-height doesn’t leave much room to spare. It was ‘happy days’ for my 160cm girlfriend who loved the bonus of being ‘off the ground’ and was a fan of the well-placed internal pockets for book, phone, head-torch, etc. The only real niggles were small; the fly sheet attachment could do with a re-think to retain tension when doors are unzipped, and maybe a tiny bit more length or a smidge more foot-space, or a couple of peg options for the feet might be a good idea for windy days, but these are personal preferences over any design fault. Additionally, we are never a fan of cheap pegs that tend to bend at the slightest suggestion of solid-earth, but we accept they are a bearable nuisance for a shelter at this price-point.

The final word on the OZtrail Easy Fold 1 Person Stretcher Tent

The OZtrail Easy Fold 1 Person Stretcher Tent is a great all in one tent and shelter solution for those who prefer to spend time enjoying nature rather than setting up elaborate camps (there is a BlockOut version, plus a two-person model, too. See here). It is a great solution for solo car campers and a great alternative to a swag for those who prefer to get ‘off the ground’. Whilst it cannot be rolled up as an all-in-one solution like a swag, the Easy Fold 1P Stretcher Tent is far simpler (and might I suggest comfier) than many one- or two-person tents and should be on the radar for anybody who likes the idea of a sub one-minute bed and tent set-up.  

RRP: $330 See OZtrail for more info on this and all the brand’s extensive range of camping and outdoor gear.

The post OZtrail Easy Fold 1 Person Stretcher Tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The list goes on, and on, and delivering a tent that ticks all the boxes suddenly is harder than selling an e-bike to a single-speeder. Fortunately, quality outdoor manufacturer Nemo Equipment is no stranger to the challenges of finding creative solutions to keeping us comfortable in the wilds, and they join the family-camping-fray with its Aurora Highrise 4P and 6P tents. Here at AGA we’re growing more and more fond of the consistent high quality of Nemo kit, and so we took its big-mumma for a whirlwind test run to discover the pros, cons and everything in between of the mighty monster of the Nemo range.

Design

The Nemo Aurora Highrise 6P Tent brings the high quality we’ve come to expect from Nemo to the world of car camping in a compact 8.46-kilogram, 66cm x 24cm x 24cm package. For Nemo products this might appear rather ‘hefty’ but in the world of vehicle-based camping, such a package is featherweight. The oversized, six-person, freestanding, family camping tent might pack small, but it delivers a super spacious 7.7 square metres (254cm x 304.8cm) of floor space once pitched. A combination of both clip and sleeve attachments affixes four strong 13mm-diameter aluminium poles to a 68D Polyester and No-See-Um Mesh inner to create a super sturdy semi-geodesic three-season tent.

The large standing height tent sees two full length poles cross diagonally ground to ground to create a 196cm-high dome structure whilst two suspended half-length poles slot into eyelets above the windows to not only provide strength but simultaneously deliver outward sloping walls, with a window, at both ends. A D-shape door on one side and a massive near full-width double-door on the other provides ample access and cross ventilation, folding neatly into a floor pocket at the base of the door. A unique patterned floor of 150D PU Polyester floor creates a bit of fun for this family tent and a 1500mm waterproof rating keeps both kids and kit dry. An optional footprint can also be purchased to further enhance waterproofing and extend tent longevity.

A brilliant Atoll/Oasis blue coloured rain fly of 68D PU Polyester (1200 mm) covers the entire roof and protrudes halfway down the two shorter walls to extend out and shelter both windows. The fly sheet extends to ground level over each doorway to form two large 2.2 square meter vestibules that can be tied open with Nemo’s one-handed Gatekeeper door tabs. Internally four triangular shoulder-height corner-pockets offer storage space whilst a roof mounted Nightlight Pocket creates a warm glow after dark when diffusing a regular headlamp. For peace of mind, workmanship and materials are covered by Nemo’s lifetime warranty against defects.

In the field

The first thing to love about the Nemo Aurora Highrise 6P Tent is the small, packed size and rather light 8.46kg weight. It’s right on the money for chucking in the back of the car and is lightweight enough for the kids to haul to camp where simple but nice-to-have features like the colour coded pole-tabs make pitching a breeze. Pitching is straight forward with two crossover poles that slide into rooftop sleeves before being tensioned via three solid pole-clips at each corner. Two further half-length poles strengthen and tighten the entire structure without a need for any Hercules like pole-bending. 

Nemo’s attention to detail and quality workmanship is clearly evident upon pitching with clean lines and a distinct lack of ill-fitting poles, cheap guy ropes or dodgy zips. The fun patterned floor or brilliant Atoll/Oasis blue colour may be a little too ‘party’ for some, but we loved it. We also liked the fact that all flame-retardant fabrics are manufactured without the use of harmful chemicals, effectively displaying Nemo’s continued commitment to the environment.

Once pitched there is no doubt the 7.7 square metres of floor space combined with dual vestibules create a true six-person tent (meaning it will fit six regular sleeping pads for six adults) however like most tents of similar size, the Aurora Highrise’s 254cm x 304.8cm floor area is better suited to four people with a bit of kit rather than six adults. A 196cm midpoint of the roof is a blessing for those of us over 185cm tall and enables plenty of room to stand and move, however the sloping dome roof does mean for some crouching as campers move closer to the window walls.  

The massive, oversized doors and cross ventilation are a huge win for this tent offering super easy access and making it a great warm-weather option. Two large windows and copious use of No-See-Um Mesh further aids airflow and helps to eliminate condensation build up in cooler or humid environments.

If the weather turns nasty, the 68D PU Polyester (1200 mm Hydrostatic Head) rain fly keeps rain at bay and internal hook and loop pole attachments along with reinforced guy points mean for a sturdy shelter even on windy days. The dual vestibules are a bonus for gear storage, and Nemo’s one-handed Gatekeeper door tabs are a favourite of ours for easily tying doors back. A bonus for when the rain stops is the Aurora Highrise’s ability to tie the entire vestibule back to each tent corner for increased airflow; A simple nicety that is often overlooked in less well-designed tents.

But as much as we are a fan of this tent, it’s not all rainbows and unicorns. The half-fly on the window-walls creates a slightly extended window awning, but also leaves an exposed single skin wall and mesh window without a fly. This is not a problem on sunny days, or when the sky delivers vertical rain, but for blustery days the unsupported window awning does tend to ‘billow’ a little, exposing the mesh window that only has two fastening points. We couldn’t remedy the billowing awning with guy ropes and so a zipped window and couple of extra guy lines might better the tent’s ability to ‘batten down’ on those really nasty days.

Internally were pretty much in love. The high roof and spacious interior create a light airy feeling and the roof mounted diffusing Nightlight and snap fastening tabs for a lantern are both a nice touch. Four triangular pockets adorn the walls and were enough for our gear, although other tents of this size can offer more pocket space. Fortunately, the Aurora Highrise’s massive internal volume means a little less pocket space is no big deal. 

Truth be told, we really like this tent. 

We might love to nitpick, but the Aurora Highrise 6P had little to pick at, and we had to dig deeper than usual to find the bits we didn’t like.

The final word on the Nemo Aurora Highrise 6-Person Tent

With its spacious standing-height, clean design, simple setup and vibrant colours the Nemo Aurora Highrise 6P adds a solid dose of joy to family camping adventures. Nemo has delivered a quality tent that stands out in its class. Whilst we found some niggles, we were massively impressed by the quality materials and workmanship, in particular the oversized doors and simple but sturdy structure in fun, bold colours. At a relatively lofty price, the Nemo Highrise is not a short-term camping solution but rather an investment in a high-end, durable shelter. The Aurora Highrise 6P is, put simply, a great family camping tent of outstanding quality.

RRP: $900 (online pricing may vary) See Nemo Equipment for more info and stockists.

The post Nemo Aurora Highrise 6-Person Tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Portability has several benefits when it comes to an electrical power source, including the fact you can transfer it from vehicle to vehicle, or use it to power electrical items without a vehicle nearby, which can come in handy at campgrounds with bollards where your campsite might be some distance from where you can park.

Design

The Companion Rover 100 Lithium Ion Power Station is extremely portable thanks to its compact dimensions (410mm (l) x 325mm (w) x 370mm (h)), its light weight (just 11.45kg) and its sturdy carry handle. But despite being small and light, the Rover 100 packs plenty of power thanks to its 100Ah lithium battery.

Depending on ambient temperature and use, 100Ah should be enough to run a decent-sized 12V DC portable fridge for two to three days, along with a few other electrical items, before recharging is required. In the case of the Rover 100, there are two 10-amp (a) ciggy-style power outlets, two 10-amp Anderson outlets, two 5V 3a USB outlets and two 5V 3a USB-C outlets. In other words, it’s ideally suited to powering a wide range of electrical items as well as charging phones, tablets, laptops, and camera batteries. If you want to power 240V AC equipment, you’ll need a separate inverter.

The Rover 100 also has a couple of DC jacks so you can plug in LED strip lighting, and it features an inbuilt LED torch light in the handle and a 5W LED area light on the back of the unit that is ideally suited to lighting up a campsite. To monitor power usage, there’s a screen on the front that displays the battery’s state of charge as a percentage, how many volts are remaining, and amps in and out.

In the field

When the Rover 100 needs recharging you have several options. It is supplied with an AC adaptor and cable so it can be plugged into a 240V AC power point allowing you to fully charge it before you leave home. It is also supplied with a fused 12V DC cable so you can charge it from your vehicle’s 12V ciggie outlet while travelling. For those with solar panels, the Rover 100 also has an inbuilt 10a MPPT solar controller and it is supplied with a short cable that allows connection direct to a solar panel or solar blanket via an Anderson plug.

If you want an idea of how fast battery tech is advancing, it was only five years ago that I bought a 44Ah Portable Power Pack that contained two 22Ah AGM batteries and weighed a hefty 16kg. That’s less than half the capacity of the Rover 100 but 4.55kg heavier than it!

The 44Ah unit’s small capacity and the fact it wouldn’t properly charge from a 12V DC power source meant it was never a genuine alternative to a wired-in dual-battery setup in a vehicle, but that is not the case with the Rover 100. Thanks to its 100Ah capacity, and ability to recharge from different power sources, including solar, you could almost power a small campsite indefinitely.

The final word on the Companion Rover 100

Not only does the Rover 100 pack a powerful punch, it’s also well packaged and loaded with features. For those looking for an alternative power source to an in-vehicle second battery system for their camping adventures, this portable powerhouse is a fantastic option. Being relatively light in weight and compact – plus the fact you can utilise solar panels (and they’re easy to set up with it) for additional basecamp power – the Rover 100 could be considered a very smart buy.

RRP: $1630 (also available on sale online at some stockists for a limited time). See Companion Outdoor for more info on this and its other portable power products.

The post Companion Rover 100 Lithium Ion Power Station: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The North Face Stormbreak 2 is a 2.42kg (trail-weight) budget-friendly three-season two-person freestanding hiking tent that bundles up into a reasonably compact 17.8cm x 55.9cm stuff sack. It is a compact dome style tent with two crossover aluminium poles and two shorter roof-poles combining to create a sturdy rectangular based, steep walled frame. Floor space is 220cm x 127cm, 2.84 square-metre bathtub design, fully seam-taped 68-denier (D) polyester with a 3000 mm PU coating.

Overall, it is not overly large in the two-person tent world, but that workable size is complemented by a 109cm-high roof to create a spacious interior. The inner tent comprises of 40D polyester mesh walls with a 75D polyester taffeta privacy panel at the base of all four walls and 75D polyester taffeta roof. Four pockets adorn each corner, of which can be used to stow doors when unzipped, and/or store kit. Four wall tabs and a roof-mounted lantern-tab enable hanging of lighting, or anything else for that matter (eve to string up a clothesline). A 75D polyester, 1200mm PU coating rain-fly clips into both the roof poles and all four corner poles via colour-coded tabs and draws down to ground level on the two side walls, as well as extending via two pegs/stakes at each door to create a 0.45 square-metre vestibule on each side. 

In the field

The North Face Stormbreak 2 is very much a workhorse within the budget hiking tent world and solid bang for buck. It is easy to pitch, solid and spacious enough for two. Whilst delivering a small footprint, the tent feels more voluminous than it should due to the lofty ceiling height and near vertical sidewalls. The copious use of mesh on the inner allows for great ventilation, as does the ability to tie back the dual side zips on the rain fly to expose the large inner doors (that also nicely tuck into a pocket rather than always needing to be tied back). 

Once the hatches are battened down the 3000mm PU coated floor and 1200mm fly sheet ensure the tent can ride out most nasty weather whilst, internally, the 220cm x 127cm floor provides enough room for two users to play cards and read books. Campers over 183cm in height can be reassured they will get a non-cramped sleep without a face-full of fly fabric and the four corner pockets mean you don’t need to fumble in the night to find your head torch. Externally, the large trapezoid vestibules allow more gear space than most tents of single vestibule or triangular vestibule designs, and the reinforced guy points make for a solid structure in windy weather. 

All this goodness comes with a penalty however, in the form of weight and size. Listed as a 2.42kg trail weight in a 17.8cm x 55.9cm stuff sack, we weighed our tent in at 2.88kg and 57cm x 19cm, with full guy ropes and all pegs. Speaking of pegs (stakes), those provided with the tent are more what we’d expect from an Aldi tent so make sure you spend an extra $10 on lightweight aluminium tri-pegs. 

The final word on The North Face Stormbreak 2

With those negative points noted, it’s also worth noting that those peg niggles are easily and cheaply fixed, and whilst the extra weight is not easily shed, it’s much easier if shared with a camping partner. Overall, the positives weigh out those negative points; the spacious interior (especially the roof-height), usable vestibules, abundant features, and a high level of build quality – when combined with being able to find it at an affordable price confirms the Stormbreak 2 as excellent value for money in the very competitive three-season/two-person hiking tent market segment. For hiking couples on a budget, it’s well worth checking out.

RRP: $450 See The North Face for more info on this tent and the brand’s wide range of outdoor gear.

The post The North Face Stormbreak 2 hiking tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

NeoAir XTherm pads are highly revered in the realms of four-season camping, for good reason, and as Aus Geo Adventure’s resident winter-wanderer, and cold sleeper, I offered myself up both last year and this year as crash-test-snow-dummy to separate the good from the bad. Or, in this case, the cold from the warm, aboard the latest and greatest in sleeping pad design. I took to the hills, beaches, rivers, and ravines and lay down on everything from sand and snow to rock and ice in a bid to determine whether this highly acclaimed sleeping pad really lived up to all the hype. Spoiler alert: It did.

Design

In short, the Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT is a lightweight super-warm four-season sleeping pad designed for extreme cold and alpine conditions. It is designed with horizontal baffles, a multi chambered core, high tech materials and a WingLock valve, all combining to deliver a 439 gram (regular size) sleeping pad with a rather mind-blowing 7.3 R-value. The former Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT was no slouch either, with an R-Value of 6.9 at 430g.

The pad achieves such warmth for weight by replacing the insulating ‘fill’ many manufacturers use, with the super nifty technology of ThermaCapture and Triangular Core Matrix. ThermaCapture is a super thin, featherweight reflective film designed to reflect radiant heat back to your body and is used extensively throughout the internal structure of the Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT. Triangular Core Matrix is a cleverly designed dual layer of triangular baffles developed to limit free flow of air within the pad, thus limiting convective heat loss and separating the cooler ‘base’ air from the warmer ‘radiant’ heat above. 

A hard-wearing 70-denier (D) nylon base offers protection against the wear and tear of extended expedition use whilst a 30D ripstop nylon top fabric sheds weight to keep the pad super light and packable. The WingLock Valve offers super-fast inflation via the pump-sack, the ability to micro-adjust pad firmness, even as you lay on it, and rapid deflation. The mummy shaped sleeping pad ups its thickness from last year’s 6.4cm Xtherm to 7.3cm for the XTherm NXT. The new model is optioned in three sizes: regular (51cm x 183cm, 440g), regular wide (63cm x 183cm, 540g) and large (63cm x 196cm, 570g).

In the field

I freely admit I may have had previous love affairs with Sea to Summit’s Ether Light XT (love the valve and pillow-lock) and Exped’s Downmat (sooooo warm and cushy), however the Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT has won me over to become my new favourite for cold weather wanderings.

Field testing last season’s Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm quickly proved ThermaCapture and Triangular Core Matrix are not just marketing hype but in fact deliver exceptional warmth for weight. At 440g the regular size pad is as light as some three-season sleeping pads, and whilst our large pad is 130g heavier than the regular, it is well worth it for cosy toes, even on a frozen ground.

A mid-winter split boarding mission to the South Ramshead Range saw the pad perform exceptionally well, however the mercury never really dropped to bone-chilling temperatures and so it wasn’t until I camped high above a frozen Lake Albina, with temperatures dropping to double digit negatives, that the pad really proved its mettle. In a minus eight degree Celsius (comfort rating) sleeping bag, the NeoAir XTherm was the only barrier between my sleeping bag and a frozen single-skin tent floor, and I managed to stay reasonably warm (I did get a cold nose). My XTherm adventures continued through mountaineering courses and historic-hut-adventures in the Victorian Alps, then atop a frozen Mt Bogong and even into the Pilot wilderness before finally revisiting the NSW main range again. All throughout the trial period the sleeping pad excelled and remained warm, even when damp, and importantly puncture-free thanks to that 70D base finding the right balance between weight-shaving and durability.

Related: Camp sleep systems: Top tips for a perfect night in the outdoors

The new 7.6cm thick pad is 1.2cm thicker than its predecessor, and whilst not the thickest mattress on the market its horizontal baffles work a treat, delivering a sturdy base for a comfortable night’s sleep, whether it be on rock, grass, snow or ice. ThermaCapture and Triangular Core Matrix perform better than many thicker mattresses, even some insulated ones, for retaining heat and delivering a warm, dry bed. On a number of backcountry explorations I afforded myself the luxury of a closed cell Therm-a-Rest Z-Mat as a base pad and suggest the duo might just be the warmest and most comfortable lightweight alpine bed setup I’ve ever used. 

The WingLock Valve is a vast improvement over the old valve system and now performs three times faster via the supplied pump-sack, but just as importantly the WingLock offers user-friendly fine-tuning (even whilst wearing gloves) along with rapid deflation, and thus delivers the final piece of the jigsaw for a great all round sleeping pad.

The final word on the Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT

There is no doubt that hardcore adventurers, especially in Australian conditions, can suffer with super-light three-season kit (yes, that’s you, Huw Kingston) but for the cold sleepers amongst us (like me) the four-season Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT is the epitome of the ultra-light, ultra-warm sleeping pad. Whilst it’s not a cheap offering, Therm-a-Rest has delivered what might be considered one of the best – if not the best – lightweight four-season sleeping pad presently available. Plus, it is lightweight enough to nearly do all-season duties. If you’re willing to cough up a few extra dollars to keep those toes toasty, then the Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT might just be the pick of the bunch. 

RRP: $575 See Therm-a-Rest for more info, stockists and the brand’s full range of sleeping pads.

The post Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm NXT sleeping pad: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Ozpig Series 2 is no lightweight cooking solution, weighing at a hefty 18kg and, when packed in its supplied carry bag, taking up about as much space as milk crate, so before buying one you’ll need to make sure you have the space for it in your vehicle, and the carrying capacity. If you do, fantastic… because the Ozpig is an incredibly versatile cooking and heating solution that’s perfectly suited to campsites and use at home in the backyard.

Before throwing the Ozpig in the back of your 4×4, you should first fire it up at home, not only to familiarise yourself with its set-up and operation, but also to ‘burn in’ the paint on the cooker body, and to remove the protective coating on the hotplates and ‘season’ them. 

To put the the Ozpig together, tip it on its side and screw in the four zinc-coated legs and, if you want, the leg extensions. Tip it on to its legs, place the mesh floor fire grate inside the steel cooker body, fit the chimney sections, slip on the spark arrestor to the top chimney piece and start building a fire using some scrunched up paper and kindling… or cheat like me and use some firelighters. Ozpig recommends using firewood cut into small pieces no thicker than 50mm and no longer than 280mm, or about the size of a beer can. Leaving the front door open and the hotplate swivelled open will assist in getting a fire going, but once established you can close the door and adjust the position of the hotplate to manage the intensity of the fire.

The paint burn-in process requires a fire of 350°C for one hour, and this gives ample opportunity to play around with airflow and fuel loads.

Sound complicated? It really isn’t, and you’ll soon get the hang of it.

In the field

One of the great things about the Ozpig is that the fire is completely contained. With the front door shut and the hotplate positioned over the fire, all the smoke and sparks go up the chimney, and those sparks are kept in check by the supplied spark arrestor. And because the Ozpig is well off the ground on its four legs, it won’t scorch your lawn or leave a mark at campsites.

The Ozpig Series 2 comes with two hotplates (one is called a warming tray) and these can be easily swapped around using the supplied multipurpose tool, and positioned over the fire or on the side of the cooker body where they can be used to keep food warm, to serve from, or as a surface on which to place a camp oven or pot. 

The Ozpig we tested was also supplied with an optional offset chimney kit, which allows it to be used under cover, with said chimney directing smoke outside. It was also supplied with an optional diffuser that allows management of heat for different cooking methods, as well as an optional chargrill plate and drip tray for barbecuing meat.

Besides its excellent cooking capabilities, the Ozpig can also do double duty as an outdoor heat source for those colder nights, whether in your own backyard or at your campsite – a great alternative to having to faff around with a ground-based camp fire.

There are plenty of other accessories too, including an oven smoker for smoking, roasting and baking; a pizza stone for, you guessed it, cooking traditional woodfired pizzas; a wok; a rotisserie; a heat-bead basket; and much more. The supplied Ozpig handbook explains what everything does and also includes some handy cooking tips and recipes.

The final word on the Ozpig Series 2

The Ozpig Series 2 is covered by a three-year warranty, but Ozpig reckons it will outlast most of its owners and, after examining its robust construction, I certainly wouldn’t be surprised if it outlasted me! Sure, you probably wouldn’t want to pack the Ozpig in your vehicle every time you head off camping, but I reckon when you reach to your destination, you’ll wish you had it with you every time.

RRP: $370

Supplied optional accessories: 
Ozpig Double Offset Chimney Kit: $75
Ozpig Diffuser: $21
Ozpig Chargrill Plate and Drip Tray: $99

See Ozpig for more info on the Series 2, the other Ozpig models, and all accessories.

The post Ozpig Series 2 Portable Stove: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The high-tech designs of the different items in this range directly reflect the brand’s long association with high-altitude adventurers, and they also reflect the extreme environs in which they will be used. Encompassing a down suit, two down jackets (one with hood; one without), salopettes and two down sleeping bags (plus a set of down mitts, currently in production), the Pro Elite range is comprehensive and looks very impressive. 

The ultimate test

The Pro Elite Alpine range has, in fact, already been tested in the toughest field, with Mountain Designs Ambassador Jennifer Willis recently aiming to be the first Aussie with Multiple Sclerosis to summit Mount Everest. Even though weather conditions put an end to Jennifer’s attempt, she did reach higher than 8000 metres (becoming the only Aussie with MS to climb to 8000m – and Everest’s South Col) and was impressed with the performance of her Pro Elite Alpine gear during her attempt. 

All the gear, right here

The Pro Elite Alpine range uses a combo of a mix of fabrics and fills, such as 800 or 850 loft RDS goose down fill, PrimaLoft Gold Insulation Eco synthetic fill, Pertex Quantum Pro shell fabric, Repel Water fabric reinforcement and a DownTek water repellency treatment. 

Pro Elite Alpine Down Suit: This suit provides full-body protection and features 850-loft RDS goose down in the top half of the suit and 700-loft down in the bottom half, a robust Pertex Quantum Pro shell, PrimaLoft Gold Insulation Eco synthetic fill, the DownTek water repellent treatment and Repel Water-treated fabric reinforcements. Cleverly, the synthetic fill is used around areas of the suit where down would be compressed (thus rendering its warmth qualities redundant). There is also a mix of down, too; high-loft down is found up top, while low-loft down is in the lower (legs) sections. Clever stuff. RRP $2500

Pro Elite Alpine Down Salopettes: This teams perfectly with the Pro Elite Down Parka (below) and includes all of the same tech materials (and construction) featured in the Down Suit except for using 800-loft down (rather than 700 as per the suit) in the lower (legs) area. The adjustable brace system provides a nice fit, the adjustable hem and extended zip along the leg-side seam help control ventilation and the zippered rainbow flap and fly ensure when nature calls, it’s an easy process. And, the overall weight is light, at 1170g for a Medium. RRP $1000

Pro Elite Alpine Down Parka: This hooded expedition jacket obviously shares a lot of features with the down suit, including the use of both goose-down and synthetic fill throughout, the Pertex Quantum Pro shell outer, plus the moisture managing DownTek and Repel water treatments. This parka also includes thicker material on high-wear areas, such as the shoulders (where pack straps sit), and a welcome pair of pockets that are insulated on both sides (there’s also two external zippered chest pockets and two internal chest pockets). The down is kept in place thanks to the box-wall baffle construction, while ventilation can be managed via the underarm zips, as well as the adjustable cuffs and snow-skirt (with adjustable hem) The hood is oxygen mask and helmet compatible, of course, for those high-alpine adventures, and it has separate storage and compression sacks.  RRP $1300

Pro Elite Alpine Down Jacket: Although shorter in length, the Down Jacket still shares a lot of features with the Down Parka, while offering a wider breadth of capability in that it would be also ideal for high-altitude trekking and expeditions in cold climates, such as NZ’s Southern Alps in winter, the NSW/VIC back-country, etc. It includes the use of both goose-down and synthetic fill throughout, the Pertex Quantum Pro shell outer, plus the moisture managing DownTek and Repel water treatments. This jacket also has the heavier-duty material in high-wear areas, plenty of ventilation options, as per the Down Parka, and those toasty warm dual-insulated pockets, too. There’s even a storage sack and compression sack. We can’t wait to get one for review! RRP $800 

Pro Elite Alpine Down sleeping bags: This two-model range of sleeping bags impresses with its high level of detail to the design, specific to the environs in which they’ll be used. The 1500 uses a mix of 850-loft RDS goose down, Pertex Quantum Pro shell and PrimaLoft Gold Insulation Eco synthetic fill, with a DownTek Water Repellent treatment. Total weight is 2.55kg, with a Limit warmth rating of -28 degrees Celsius. The 1000 eschews the PrimaLoft fill and is rated slightly less warm (Limit level of -20 degrees Celsius) than the 1500, while weighing 1.76kg. Both bags feature trapezoidal box wall baffle construction, while the 1500 includes a vertical baffle design zone in the torso area for optimum warmth. Both bags also feature strengthened foot area sections (for when you jump in, literally, boots ’n’ all) and the mummy shape is relatively roomy (again, to allow for fully clothed occupants). They both feature three-quarter side-zips, internal zip pockets for storage (and two mesh hand pockets), along with well-proved anti-snag YKK zips and separate sacks for storage and travel. RRP $2000 (1500); RRP $1500 (1000)

The final word on the Mountain Designs Pro Elite Alpine range

For those serious adventurers – and for those who want durable and reliable outerwear for the most challenging of environments – Mountain Designs’ Pro Elite Alpine gear is a must to check out. This new tier of high-end technical apparel also points at the potential for more MD gear to wear this badge in the future – say, in the trekking sphere – which is also very exciting.

See Mountain Designs for more information on the Pro Elite Alpine range and the brand’s complete range of gear.

The post Mountain Designs’ new Pro Elite Alpine range takes outdoor gear to the extremes appeared first on Australian Geographic.

To find out, AGA threw Watto, and the pack, into a brutal Aussie winter. Loaded with a tent, sleeping bag, food, ice axes, crampons, skis and split-boards he ventured out on more than a dozen trips, including camping, snowshoeing, ski-mountaineering, snowboarding and more. We’ve since knocked off mountain biking, motorbike touring, trekking and everyday endeavors as well. Some excursions were overnight, others for ten days. We froze the pack, waterlogged the pack, overloaded the pack, and dragged it over rocks, grass and through sodden forests… here’s what we found.

Design 

The Lowepro PhotoSport Backpack PRO 70L AW III is a full-featured 70-litre all-season photography-oriented pack designed for multi-day backcountry excursions. Weighing 3.2kg, with internal measurements of 34 x 19 x 73cm this sizable pack hits the sweet spot for a multi-day pack; providing space for tent, bedding and survival gear, in addition to camera kit. Included is a padded removable GearUp Pro XL Camera Insert, accessible via either front or rear zip panels.  Quick-release straps allow the GearUp Pro XL to double as an external chest pack and a removable shoulder strap turns it into a standalone camera-tote.  The PhotoSport PRO 70L is a Green Line label, made from 86 per cent recycled fabric, and utilising 100 per cent recycled materials. The 420D Nylon Oxford and 420D Nylon Diamond Ripstop with carbonate exterior is therefore good for both your gear, and the planet. Both Oxford and Ripstop fabrics provide ample weatherproofness and durability, but an all-weather (AW) cover is included for when weather turns really nasty. 

Lowepro’s ActivLift™ harness is adjustable and comfortable, incorporating airflow channels for breathability and provided in two sizes S-M and M-L whilst a pivoting waist belt retains range of motion whilst reducing strain on the back and torso. The backpack offers an incredible four access points including drawstring top, zippered front and rear, and a separate zip enclosure at the base of the pack. Also included is a removable lid with two zippered pockets and extra gear loops, three-litre hydration pocket, rope strap, Ice-axe loops, side and bottom compression/accessory straps, expandable front sleeve, two mesh side pockets and a removable shoulder-phone pocket. 

In the field 

At 70 litres, the Lowepro PhotoSport PRO 70L AW III hits the nail on the head for multi day pack size… any smaller would limit space for camera/camp/snow/survival kit whilst any larger and wieldiness becomes an issue. The volume allows for missions of four to five days, but you’ll need to be frugal with your kit. The base pocket is sizable enough for a compact alpine sleeping bag and sleeping pad at a squeeze (A nifty trick is to slide a foldable Fozzils bowl and cup in the base for added protection and extra waterproofness). For multi day expeditions, the main compartment houses a GearUp Pro XL with camera kit (For Watto it was a Nikon Z9, 80-200mm f/2.8 lens, 14-30mm f/4 lens and DJI Mini-3 pro with controller). Internally, camera kit is accessible via the rear zipped panel, however a favourite setup was to convert the GearUp Pro XL into a chest pack, attaching it to the ActivLift™ harness via the supplied quick release strap and buckle system. The GearUp has both top and side zips enabling access as a protective insert and a chest mounted case or shoulder bag. Lowepro’s modular system is a huge win, opening the pack up to multiple uses, and our only improvement might be a two-way side-zip on the Gear-Up to enable easier access to camera gear when in vertical ‘chest pack’ mode, and to provide an all-weather cover for the Gear-Up.

Internally, the Gear-Up insert secures inside the main compartment via the same quick release buckles used for the chest pack. There is ample space surrounding the camera-insert for essentials. Our alpine missions included food, water, camp stove, fuel, crampons, Avalanche probe, PLB, 1st aid kit, emergency survival kit, spare gloves, rain/snow gear & spare insulating layers in the main compartment. All this kit was accessible via the full front zip or drawstring top of the main enclosure. 

The removable lid is a nice feature but was too small for our liking, so we’d love to see it double in volume, however it was enough to house a few snacks, a multitool and goggles. Externally, the front pocket is large enough to fit a snow shovel but whilst the side pockets are large enough for water bottles, we found them too taut to be useful when the pack was heavily loaded. The base straps are long enough to affix a four-season tent and the oversized side compression straps handled skis, poles, bindings and more. 

Initially, we found the hook and loop fixing of the ActivLift™ harness rather disconcerting, but alloy buckles backed-up the system and after two months of solid use it remained solid, trustworthy and most importantly comfortable. The heavy-duty face fabrics performed admirably, keeping kit dry and protected whilst the grey/black/orange colour appealed to the eye, as well as ensuring the pack stood out from ‘the rest’. The bright orange All Weather cover is a bonus in white-out conditions and helped protect gear from real nasty weather, and even fit over external gear strapped to the pack.

Whilst Watto fell in love with the PhotoSport Backpack PRO 70L AW III, as usual, there’s always a few niggles we’d like to see addressed. Mainly, we’d like to see weatherproof covers for the GearUp Pro XL and a larger capacity lid for the main pack. We’d like to see a tweak to the ActivLift™ harness and reinforced shoulder straps to strengthen it during loading and unloading. We’d love to see the side pockets better able to be used when the pack is fully loaded and also sewn-in ice-axe loops (the bungee tends to fall off if you’re not careful). One day we might get solar-panel integration (no. 24 on our list), but for now we’re happy with what we’ve got.

The final word on the Lowepro PhotoSport Backpack Pro 70 AW III

Whilst there might be a few personal tweaks we’d like to do to make this pack even better, we consider the Lowepro PhotoSport Backpack PRO 70L AW III a 9.5/10 and hard to fault. Kudos must go to the design team at Lowepro for they listened to their users (well to Watto) and have arguably delivered one of the best, if not “the best”, adventure photography backpack on the market to date.

RRP: $935 (Note pricing varies considerably across online retail outlets) See Lowepro for more info on this and other camera packs and bags.

The post Lowepro PhotoSport Backpack PRO 70L AW III: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

We are fans of sustainable materials and quality designs in outdoor kit, especially when bundled with smart features, and the Nemo Dagger OSMO 2P tent ticks all such boxes. From the secure jakes-foot pole-anchors and blue-light reducing diffuser headlamp pocket, to the one-handed gatekeeper door clips, the new Dagger OSMO delivers on smart design and smart materials. Stuffed away, the compact three-season tent measures 50x16x9 centimetres, but with poles separated into the planet-friendly, un-dyed, 100% recycled Repreve pole bag, the inner and fly can be squished (tech term) much smaller.

At 1.86 kilograms (or 1.52kg stripped trail weight) the Dagger OSMO slots nicely in the pointy end of the ‘lightweight’ category for dual-walled two-person tents.  Pre-bent DAC Featherlite NSL poles (colour-coded) make up a hubbed pole set with colour-matched webbing. Proprietary OSMO poly-nylon ripstop fabric combines with this to help deliver impressive weight advantages and amazing usability alongside increased durability. Nemo is confident enough in the tent’s construction to offer a lifetime warranty.

Nemo tech boffins have put their heads together to create OSMO, a composite fabric of 100% recycled polyester and nylon, promoted as 20% stronger, and a claimed four times better water repellency, with three times less stretch (when wet) than traditional tent fabrics. Both the fly and tent base offer a 2000mm hydrostatic head water repellency. A single hubbed pole (dual-Y plus ridge pole and cross member) with 229x127cm footprint and 106cm peak height makes for a spacious interior with plenty of sit-up room for two occupants and once pegged out delivers a sturdy, freestanding, aerodynamic three-season dome with dual 1.1 square-metre trapezoid vestibules for kit.

In the field

The Dagger OSMO is not for those with a super slim wallet, however buyers who stretch the budget are rewarded with an exceptionally high quality build that will last years of multi-seasonal use. It is immediately apparent Nemo has hit the nail on the hydrostatic-head (see what I did there), with its new OSMO fabric, presenting as super strong and ‘sillily light’ (another tech term) in this Dagger 2P. It is both flame-retardant and 2000mm water repellant without the use of toxic PFC or PFAS chemicals such as the commonly-used bioaccumulating environmental pollutant C6 DWR. We did not test the OSMO fabric on a molecular level, because we’d rather go camping (and we don’t have the lab), but can assure hikers the Dagger OSMO sits taught, doesn’t sag when wet, vents well and keeps the elements out… We love it.

The easy set-up with the jakes-feet (ball and socket pole mount) and hubbed pole design leads to a sub-five minute set-up and the one-handed gatekeeper clips on the fly-doors allow for easy drawing back of the fly sheet for ventilation. In fact, the fly sheet, whilst easily clipped to the inner in seconds, can double-draw-back on both sides of the tent to reveal two-thirds of the over-sized dual side doors where the large No-See-Um Mesh areas of the inner combined with the high-cut fly-sheet offers vast ventilation.

The double-wall (inner and fly) is tried, tested and proven for great waterproofness and breathability and we found near-zero condensation during our testing in an Australian autumn. The Dagger OSMO 2P offers greater internal space than many alternate lightweight 2P tents and the large floor area combined with steep sidewalls allowed this testers 188cm frame to both sit up and lie flat, without a face full of fabric, all whilst delivering copious of room for a second occupant.

The six internal pockets of varying size worked a treat for kit and the yellow headlamp diffuser pocket is a bonus. The lightweight OSMO bathtub floor provides solid waterproofness but is certainly best with a groundsheet (if you can afford the extra weight) to aid longevity. The Landing Zone (a mini clip-in triangular vestibule groundsheet) is a great addition, adding a second waterproof area in the vestibule, but does add a little bit of weight; for weight-weenies this may be an issue, but for us regular walkers, it’s still worth packing for a hike.

The final word on the Nemo Dagger OSMO 2P

The Nemo Dagger OSMO 2P’s quickly proved to be a favourite in our lightweight, all-round hiking-tent category (I may have just made this category up). It’s easy to pitch but sturdy, is weather resistant but vents well, and is made of high quality materials with exceptionally well considered features. It is by no means a cheap shelter, but it does right in the price bracket of other comparative high-end two person hiking tents, and will no doubt become a favourite for many who venture off the beaten path.

RRP: $950 (Note: online pricing ranges from $765 up). See Nemo Equipment for more info on this and other gear.

The post Nemo Dagger OSMO 2P hiking tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Here at AGA, we love anything that makes our outdoor adventures more enjoyable and so we decided to take a step back in design history, to examine whether the Victorinox Mountaineer Swiss Army Knife is as relevant today as it was when Karl Elsener opened his cutler’s workshop in Ibach-Schwyz, Switzerland in 1884.

Design

For adventurous weight-weenies the 109.1-gram Victorinox Mountaineer Swiss Army Knife might just be the best of both worlds when it comes to a pocket-sized tool that won’t break the bank (or trouser-lining) but still delivers a load of useful gizmos for adventures off the beaten path. At 91mm x 20.5mm when folded, the Mountaineer is compact enough to fit in a shirt pocket but still opens to 160mm long with a handy 58mm stainless steel blade, enough to slide off a chunk of salami when needed. 

As per the original ‘Modell 1890’ knife, today’s ‘Mountaineer’ model still features a can-opener and flat head screwdriver, just in case you need to tend to your Schmidt–Rubin service rifle, or more likely pry open a tin of Milo. In fact, the Mountaineer also delivers a small blade, corkscrew, small-screwdriver, bottle opener, screwdriver, wire stripper, reamer (punch), scissors, multipurpose hook, nail file, metal file, nail cleaner and metal saw… and, of course, the conventional tweezers and toothpick. If you’re the “I must have a tool for every occasion” type, then the 73-function Swiss Champ XXL is maybe more your cup of tea, or if you’re feeling a little ‘rockstar’ then the 320-layered Damasteel® blade on the Damast Limited Edition Swiss Army Knife might be for you. Here at AGA, we were rather content with the Mountaineer.

In the field

Right off the bat I’ll admit I am a biased in my love for the trusty ol’ pocketknife. At 13 years old my father handed me a small single-bladed Victorinox Swiss Army Knife and immediately I felt ‘all grown up’. I loved that knife. Today’s Mountaineer model is a slightly beefed-up version of my beat-up teen-pocketknife, but at $95 it slots right in the value for money category of multi-tools, offering a, “here’s what you need, and nothing you don’t” kind of build.

The knife works a dream, the 58mm blade is the right size for most requirements, the can-opener works just as well as it always has, and the scissors continue to be more useful than I ever believe they’ll be. OK, a corkscrew is rarely needed in today’s world of screw-tops, but it’s a blessing when it’s needed, and I’m not sure I’ve ever used the toothpick for its intended purpose. The Mountaineer also doesn’t deliver a locking blade and, truth be told, the small blade is only ever used when the large blade is blunt. However, the tweezers are as useful as they’ve ever been, and I have surprisingly used the reamer (punch) more than I’d have ever dreamt I would. 

The most attractive feature of the Swiss Army Knife, however, is its lightweight compactness and the Victorinox Mountaineer highlights this with the benefit of slotting nicely into the pocket of everything from my camera bag to motorcycle jacket to multi-day rucksack. There is no doubt I missed the usefulness of pliers found on my modern-day multi-tools; however I certainly didn’t miss the heft and weight that accompany these heavier duty tools.

The final word on the Victorinox Mountaineer Swiss Army Knife

If you want a high quality, lightweight, compact blade that doubles as a tent fixer, bottle/can opener, splinter puller or rope cutter, then the Victorinox Mountaineer Swiss Army Knife might be worth adding to your side/backcountry kit.

RRP $95 See Victorinox for more info on the Mountaineer and other Swiss Army Knife models.

The post The Victorinox ‘Mountaineer’ Swiss Army Knife: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Big news in Sydney town

For knowledgeable Sydney-based outdoor enthusiasts the opening of the Arc’teryx Bondi Junction flagship store (located at Shop 5003/5004, Level 5, Westfield Bondi Junction) is exciting news as it allows the brand to showcase a wider range of its apparel and gear than is possible in its many authorised dealer retail outlets (who Arc’teryx value highly), where other brands share floor and display space. This ability to view a wider range of Arc’teryx gear will prove a boon for the serious outdoor apparel consumer (as well as the brand itself), who is keen to see/experience as much Arc’teryx gear as possible, before purchasing.

This was never more evident than in the huge crowd that lined up for the Bondi Junction store’s opening day – something the brand’s Aussie team was not expecting, but were stoked to see, as Daniel Wojciechowski, Arc’teryx Commercial Manager AU/NZ, explains.

“In many ways we have been humbled and overwhelmed by the response from the opening of Bondi Junction,” he says. “We appreciate everyone who has taken the time to visit us. The store is much busier than we expected for opening and we thank everyone for their patience and understanding as we scale and adapt to support the level of demand we have.”

Growing for success

Arc’teryx is a relatively young outdoor brand (it was founded in 1989) but one that has, in its 34 years of existence, built a reputation as a top-tier outdoor brand, with its apparel (and equipment) very highly regarded in the outdoor scene. Arc’teryx designs technical apparel and gear for outdoor activities ranging from mountaineering and ice/rock climbing, through to trail running and trekking.

It wasn’t until 2019 that Australia scored a flagship store, however, with the first Melbourne store opening, and experiencing organic growth that also timed in with the craziness of COVID-19. The second Victorian store, in Chadstone, was opened in 2020 and since that time, both stores (and the brand itself) have experienced growth not only in sales, but also in the local outdoor community, something the Aussie Arc’teryx team values highly.

“For a brand or store to be successful it must be authentic and form part of the community,” affirms Wojciechowski. “Being able to directly engage with our guests as they share their plans and experiences while guiding them through various solutions to their needs forms the fabric of our instore guest experience. It doesn’t matter if you are an old customer looking for advice on how to care for a piece you have or a new customer interacting with us for the first time our stores are first and foremost a place to share the beta.”

Confirmed events through the store include a ski night, a climbing party and a group trail run, with a view to connecting with local businesses and outdoor enthusiasts with more events planned in the near future.

And there’s more…

The opening of the original Melbourne store, followed closely by the Chadstone outlet, showed just how successful brand-specific flagship stores can be, and Arc’teryx always knew a Sydney store would continue that trend in growth of brand-awareness Down Under – it was just a matter of ‘where’ and ‘when’. Hearteningly, for Aussie ‘Arc’ fans, the Bondi Junction store is the first of a few more planned flagship outlets for the NSW capital.

It is certainly an exciting time for the brand, with Arc’teryx also recently launching its ReBIRD recycling/repair facility (available at the Bondi Junction store) which, according to Wojciechowski, frames “a three-part ongoing commitment and responsibility to the products we make”.

This three-part framework comprises ReCare, which is focused on manufacturing long-wearing products; ReGear, which rehomes underutilised products to extend their useful life; and ReCut, which takes apparel and gear that is beyond repair and repurpose the materials and components for a ‘second life’ as part of another product(s), rather than becoming landfill. 

Related: Arc’teryx Cerium LT Hoody: Tested

Yep, Arc’teryx is really on a roll here in Oz and knowing some of the background to the company’s thought-process around manufacturing – and especially its focus on ensuring its equipment is durable and long-lasting, with an end-of-life plan – makes handing over your hard-earned for an item with that famous Archaeopteryx fossil logo an easy decision.

See Arc’teryx for more info on its full range of gear and any future events.

The post Arc’teryx opens Sydney flagship store as it enjoys strong growth in Australia appeared first on Australian Geographic.

You see, Yakima’s existing roof bar offering was already pretty darned decent, and to be honest here at AGA we are often Yakima’s number one fans when it comes to attaching our ‘toys’ to our chariots. We’ve tried and tested kayak carriers, roof bike mounts, roof platforms, towbar MTB mounts, rooftop tents, awnings and more, and the reality is, we usually have to dig pretty deep to find any nuances for our ‘cons list’. But we have also been known to be shallow, and occasionally ‘easily sold’, I mean a stubbie-opener on a mountain bike carrier… brilliant! 

So, “What’s the big deal with StreamLine?” I hear you ask. The honest answer is, “Well, nothing.” There’s no “big deal”, because what Yakima has done – without all the fanfare – is to just grab a bloody good product, like its popular aero bars, and simply make them even better. 

Design

Let’s simplify matters by looking at roof-racks as a two-part system: the legs (towers) and the crossbars (bars). The legs have a rather simple job, i.e., to fit a crossbar to a vehicle. However, to fit a variety of vehicle types, roof-rack manufacturers must develop multiple legs/feet or mounts. This is exactly what Yakima has done with its StreamLine system. 

There are four new StreamLine leg designs – BaseLine (naked roof), SkyLine (fixed point) TimberLine (Raised Rail) and SightLine (flush rail) – with each offered in two variants: one for top-mounted through-bars, and the second variant for flush-fit FX bars. The legs look clean with a finished weather- and UV-resistant plastic outer, but hidden within are long-lasting, rust-resistant, steel components.

Non-FX legs affix the ‘through-bar’ on top of the leg, allowing for a longer bar and more usable space, but in turn, create a higher profile. FX legs, on the other hand, offer a lower profile and super clean, sleek look with hidden SKS locks, although the result is slightly less carrying capacity due to a shortened bar profile. 

All legs can adjust toe (5 degrees either way) and pitch (6 degrees either way) angles to suit the curvature of differing vehicle roofs/rails and create a better aerodynamic fit (In layman’s terms this means the legs offer a tweak-able rotation both sideways and up and down to suit your car). The fixed-point SkyLine leg also offers a bonus hidden feature of a quick-release mechanism allowing for tool-free installation and removal of the legs in only seconds. And so, in summary, you’ll be hard pressed to find a vehicle the new StreamLine legs do not accommodate, and the good news is users can choose either a through-bar style or FX bar to suit their vehicle’s roof profile.  

Once a user has selected a leg and profile type to suit their vehicle, its time to turn attention to crossbars. Yakima offers three all-new aluminum crossbars in its StreamLine range: the JetStream FX, JetStream and Trim HD bar. The JetStream FX is a sleek, dedicated, 75kg capacity bar suited to FX legs and the pairing is designed to be vehicle specific. Users who want the cleanest, lowest profile system will no doubt choose the FX system in either a black powder-coat or anodised silver finish, with 21mm accessory T-slots and SmartFill push-down infills for reduced noise, reduced water ingress and ease of adding and removing accessories. 

For users who want a little more space up top, and aren’t as concerned with a flush finish, then non-FX legs deliver a choice of two crossbars. Either the more aerodynamic 75kg rated JetStream bar, or the slightly burlier 100kg rated Trim HD Bars. The JetStream bar delivers again on 21mm accessory T-slots, and rubber SmartFill push-down infills with two colour options, while the Trim HD only comes in a black powder-coat but does have the bonus of tie-down points on the endcap of each bar.

For the sake of you Kombi-van lovers, Yakima is not completely doing away with the old and you can choose to retrofit either aero bars, or even the original round bar, with the appropriate adaptor if you so wish.

In the field

Okay, we’re going to keep this one brief as we’ve not had enough time to use and abuse every iteration of every leg and bar combo yet, and we are unlikely to do so in the near future. What we can tell you though is, so far, the StreamLine system just works. We’re massive fans of the quick release on the SkyLine leg, especially if you have a few bike mounts on top, because with a buddy you can remove the entire system in seconds to avoid having any unnecessary wind drag on your roof.

The simple things, like the new profile of the JetStream bars dropping some weight (and lowering wind-noise) means we have a few more grams for that spare kayak paddle atop or set of skis in the roof box. And who would have guessed that push-down rubber inserts would be such a joy, avoiding a need to cut little pieces of rubber inserts to inevitably lose them the following week. And finally, any company that puts a torque-key into their installation kit is a win in our eyes because the “that’s about tight enough” can very quickly turn into “did I just strip that thread” with a half-turn of the wrist. It is simple, but clever, stuff that reflects Yakima’s decades of experience in designing roof-racks and carry systems.

The final word on the Yakima StreamLine roof-rack system

Yakima’s track record of offering quality products to handle even coastal Aussie conditions means we are confident the new StreamLine products won’t let us down. As usual, we’re big fans of the little things. We’d love to be able to throw a huge ‘cons’ list at you to list all the bad things about these new bars but the honest truth is we’ve not yet come across anything glaringly obvious. Yes, fitting them can be a bit of a pain but fitting all roof bars is a pain. We’d also prefer everything was the same sized Allen key or torque wrench, rather than a need for a flat head screwdriver on the TimberLine, but that’s not a deal breaker. 

In the end, the new Yakima StreamLine is really just a base for attaching our toys and it simply does what it says on the tin… but it does it very bloody well. The system looks good, does what we want it to do, and doesn’t deliver a load of faff we don’t need.

For more info on the StreamLine system, click here. See Yakima’s website for more information on all of its products and to find a dealer.

The post Yakima StreamLine roof-rack system: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

But our gear test began days earlier at the start of Tassie’s Overland Track. A pre-dawn start, and a brisk 4-degree temp, called for multi layering and yep, you guessed it, the first was my merino wool – berry-coloured – long-sleeved crew neck. With a fabric weight of 200gsm (the higher the fabric-weight number the warmer you’ll be, with weights ranging from 125–400), it was, I hoped, warm enough to ward off the morning chill and light enough that when the sun heated things up later in the day I wouldn’t steam. 

I needn’t have worried. The day didn’t warm, in fact it clung belligerently to single digits as we trekked along duckboard, around pandanus, and up the steep, rocky route to Marion’s Lookout and the clouded-out summit of Cradle Mountain. And then the rain came – nay, almost sleet – and by the time we reached our hut beneath towering (and completely obscured) Barn Bluff, I worried whether the 200 was nary a wise choice at all.

Design

There’s a lot to like about the design of what is a fairly basic-looking long-sleeved top, one that can be worn as an around-the-house staple when the air has a bit of a nip to it, and every day when you’re on the trails. I’d tested mine out up and down coastal headlands while training for the Overland – the 100 per cent merino wool masterfully regulated my body temp – but the proof would be in the main event, hauling a heavy pack up, down and around mountains over six days of hiking.

I’d also carried a weighted daypack to get my shoulders and legs primed, and the base layer’s gusseted underarms made swinging it on and off easy – they allow for extra movement and comfort – while the offset, flatlock shoulder seams did a great job of preventing pack rub. I’m also partial to a drop-tail hem, which the top has, for added coverage when you take a breather and plonk yourself down on the forest floor. (No bum crack or tramp stamp exposed here!)

In the field

Day 4 on the OT started early. With more than 7km of walking ahead of me as well as the side trip to the peak of Ossa (roughly 5 hours there and back), I was up with the extremely early birds. Decked out in the base layer, then a fleece and finally a lightweight down jacket (and, obviously, the obligatory hiking pants, gaiters and boots), I dashed off. I’d tackled Heartbreak Hill the day before but, for mine, this morning’s climb from the hut to Pelion Gap (1113m) – the jumping off point for Ossa – was far more taxing on the body’s blood pumper, and the down jacket was peeled off and stowed around halfway up. By the time I reached the weathered timber sign pointing out the duckboard track heavenward, I was down to my base layer.

True to its ‘bodyfit’ claim, it hugged my upper body and torso perfectly and that fabric weight of 200 was the perfect one for the blue-sky day. I dumped my tortoise shell, loaded up my day pack (fleece and rain jacket, just in case the weather turned, and scroggin) and set off, climbing up Mt Doris, on the way to the steep skirt of Mt Ossa, before scrambling over enormous boulders, below skyrocketing dolerite pipes and beside precarious drops. It was sweaty work, especially up a few of the vertical climbs, but through it all the base layer kept me comfortably toasty. On reaching the summit, the wind picked up and I wondered about sweat chill. I needn’t have bothered. The merino had wicked away most of the moisture, leaving me dry and, despite my exertions, relatively unstinky.

The final word on the Icebreaker Women’s Merino 200 Oasis Long Sleeve Crewe

At around 180g-ish, this base layer is an ideal lightweight addition to your gear set for multi-day hiking (I took three with me on the Overland), and it’s versatile enough for regular duty across other outdoor activities. It is my go-to for trail running at the moment, and if the night’s particularly cold, it does double duty as a PJ top. There are five colourways (black, griftstone heather aka grey, midnight navy, grape, go berry and purple gaze aka mauve) and there’s also a scoop-neck version (black and mink).

So, is this indeed the world’s best base layer? I’m not one to deal in absolutes, but as we shiver through what meteorologists are labelling “another dramatic week of winter weather” with “extreme cold” forecast for most of the country, it’s definitely on high rotation.

RRP: $110. For more info see Icebreaker.

The post Icebreaker Women’s Merino 200 Oasis Long Sleeve Crewe: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

When an iconic Aussie bicycle brand releases a steel-framed version of its much-lauded titanium (ti) adventure bike – and offers a colourway in tribute to one of the Outback’s most iconic roadhouses – you know it’s going to be well designed, tough and just damn cool. Meet Curve Cycles’ GMX+ Steel, available in Roadhouse Pink and Nitro Chocolate. 

Steel is definitely real

Curve’s not so subtle nod to the famous Oodnadatta Pink Roadhouse is accompanied by a more serious acknowledgement of Australia’s famous ‘overlanders’, those hardy bike-borne explorers of the late 19th and early 20th century, who criss-crossed this vast country of ours on their steel bikes.

Fittingly, Curve has utilised no ordinary steels (note the plural) for this iteration of the GMX+, with Columbus Cromor and 4130 chromoly used for the frame. According to Curve’s Jesse Carlsson, these two steels work best to achieve that balance of geometry, size, ride quality and price. 

Forkin’ impressive!

Along with that awesome new steel frame, the GMX+ Steel comes with Curve’s new Seek 430 FM fork. This carbon-fibre fork is rated for a maximum load capacity of 14kg – 7kg per fork leg – with four reinforced M5 mount-points per fork blade (Curve developed its own thru-mounts for these points). The Seek 430 FM features updated brake hose and dynamo cable routing, along with compatibility with flat-mount brakes. Impressive stuff.

Add the standard frame features of the titanium GMX+ frame that are included in this steel version – wide tyre clearance, a plethora of mount points (including offset mounts on the downtube, and mounts on the rear stays), along with the option of flat or ultra-wide drop bars, and plenty more, and it is a bike that will, literally, be able to take you anywhere, comfortably and reliably. This new steel rig builds on the sterling reputation of its predecessors – the ti GMX and ti GMX+ – which have taken riders across the Aussie outback and deserts, as well as seen competition in events such as the Tour Divide and Race to the Rock. 

Don’t be slow

The Curve Cycles GMX+ Steel is available as a frameset (retailing at $2499) or complete bike, with SRAM’s wireless Rival-Eagle eTap AXS 1 x 12 as a drivetrain choice. And yeah, we reckon that Roadhouse Pink colourway will sell out in no time, too (Editor Justin Walker is trying to find a way to sneak one into his bike shed as we write this).

If you’re tempted, head to Curve Cycles for more info.

The post Curve Cycling’s new GMX+ Steel: A bicycle for very big adventures appeared first on Australian Geographic.

While these two items might appear rather contrasting, they’re both ridiculously useful, whether it be an impromptu gathering at a hot spring in the alpine regions, or a want for a travel pillow on a dodgy Bolivian airline. Rarely is either item left unused. But what if I was limited to only one item? Well, it would be the downie of course; most likely because the word ‘prudish’ is not often associated with myself. So, when the opportunity to use and abuse Kathmandu’s lightweight, eco-friendly Heli R jacket was thrown my way I feigned impartialness whilst my subconscious started planning the next adventure.

Design

The Heli has been a staple of the Kathmandu range for years, and for good reason; it’s an affordable, general use all round lightweight down jacket designed for a range of activities. The Heli R is, put simply, a Heli, but better. At a regular retail price of only $220 the R is lighter, warmer, stronger, and more eco-friendly than its predecessor. It offers the right balance of warmth for weight for a multipurpose insulating layer, and importantly also has an ace up its sleeve, or more importantly a QR code in its lining. 

The Heli R’s QR code is Kathmandu’s new high-tech approach to delivering greater transparency on the way a garment is manufactured. A digital ID is sewn into every single jacket. Scan the code and your phone will take you to your jacket’s design, history, impact & sustainability story.

What you’ll soon learn is that your new Heli R is just pretty bloody good for the planet. The face fabric and lining are made from bluesign® certified 100% recycled polyester, accompanied by recycled plastic trims, recycled zip-tape and traceable and Responsible Down Standard (RDS) certified 600 fill power (80% duck down/20% duck feather). You can check the origins of the RDS down used in the jacket by scanning the QR code printed on the paper swing-tag. 

What all this means is the Heli R is not only better for the environment, but also keeps our torso toasty. The DWR coated, recycled, ripstop polyester is softer, stronger and 33% lighter than original Heli materials. In fact, a medium Heli R weighs in at a mere 300g, a massive 25% lighter than its predecessor. 

And the great news is if you happen to be a fashionista, the Heli R comes in five different colour ways with sizing from XS to XXXL, and even stuffs nicely into its own pocket for storage. 

In the field

The Heli R is the kind of jacket you throw on, no matter what, and our Beech/Dark Moss (with orange lining) colour meant it was just as wearable in the wilds as it is at the local microbrewery or checking the surf in the morning. 

Knowledge of the Heli R’s environmental impact story is a bonus and solid reassurance we’re not killing the places we might use the jacket to visit.

Sizing might be a little on the small side, I’m usually a large, but the extra-large fitted my 188cm frame rather perfectly and I was happy to note a long enough sleeve length to fit over gloves. At just over 300g the Heli R was super light and ridiculously ‘stuffable’ into its own pocket. Certainly, compact enough to throw into even the smallest of daypacks.

Importantly for a down jacket, the YKK zips remained snag-free and zipped up high on the neck to offer a snug collar to keep out the cold. Pocket placement and size were nice, big enough for gloved hands and/or a load of trail mix and a beanie. A nice touch is the external hand warmer pockets doubling as an internal goggle sleeve. I’m not sure if that’s what they were designed for… but it works a treat

The stitched-through baffles performed admirably and were more than adequate for multi-day winter hiking excursions or mild weather ski touring/snow shoeing but as with any stitched through garment there is possibility of cold spots, and/or wind ingress, particularly in subzero conditions. I’ll reserve judgement until I head out on the main range.

I love the idea of the digital ID which offers a great insight into recycled materials and ethically sourced down. Simply scanning the QR code on the paper-card swing tag takes you to info on the species of bird used to source the down from, the location, the fill power and the test report code and the RDS certification code. It’s impressive and ensures you’ve made a conscientious purchase when buying the Heli R.

The final word on the Kathmandu Heli R

From winter wanderings below the snowline to Wanaka wine bars, the Heli R ticks the right boxes. It’s bloody good for Mother Nature, is fantastic value for money (on sale at present for $132) and offers a great universal downie for three-season activities – and even a selection of four-season forays. If you’re headed to an 8000-metre peak, the Arctic or Antarctica, then this is not the jacket for you, but for adventures where a lightweight compact insulating mid-layer is a must, then the Heli R might be the most affordable box ticker we’ve come across to date.

RRP: $220 (on sale for $132) See Kathmandu for more info on this and other gear.

The post Kathmandu Heli R down jacket: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Touching the Void

An incredible story, this climbing classic is a no-brainer for inclusion on this list – it has all the adventure, emotion and heart-stopping moments you could want in a Hollywood thriller, yet it is true. From its (relatively) benign opening pages, where author Joe Simpson recounts the highs and lows of climbing in one of the world’s most remote mountain ranges in Peru’s Andes, the book hooks the reader.

The crux of the story – the moment where Simpson’s climbing partner, Simon Yates, believes the only way to save himself from joining his presumed-dead partner, hanging unseen at the end of a climbing rope, in the afterworld, is to cut the rope connecting the two has to be re-read again, and again. What happens after – Simpson survives the fall into a crevasse then, amazingly, crawls deeper into the crevasse before eventually dragging himself three days later all the way back to base-camp where a shocked Yates initially thinks he’s hallucinating and seeing and hearing a ghost – is something no scriptwriter could conjure up.

Touching the Void delivers on both sides of the story – it goes deep inside Simpson’s mind to reveal his indestructible will to survive each agonising minute of his return journey, while also reliving Yates’ concurrent thoughts of initially guilt and then resignation. And, of course, it asks the reader to answer that same question: if faced with a similar situation to that of Yates, what would you do?

River of Doubt: Theodore Roosevelt’s Darkest Journey

Most ex-politicians, once ousted from power, resign themselves to a life of privilege. For former US president, Theodore Roosevelt, this was never going to happen. Instead, in 1912, the intrepid Roosevelt set his sights on a first descent of a long (more than 640km) unmapped tributary of the mighty Amazon River known as the Rio da Dúvida, or River of Doubt. This was the Amazon River of piranha-filled waterways, immense rapids and myriad local tribes that were hostile to any invaders.

Author Candice Millard uses access to not only Roosevelt’s extensive notes, but also those of fellow team membersand the co-leader of this adventure, legendary Spanish explorer Cândido Rondo (who had first discovered the waterway’s existence) to conjure a sense of being a part of this incredible adventure. 

The River of Doubt is a rollicking story, with the river asking a terrible price. During the journey dug-out canoes had to be built river-side to replace damaged ones, then – sometimes just the following day – they would be dashed against the river’s unforgiving rapids – as were some of the men, occasionally fatally. The hoped-for brevity of wild game for food did not eventuate, leaving starvation and disease a constant threat. There was a murder midway down the river, and Roosevelt himself nearly succumbed to a leg infection, while his son, Kermit, contracted malaria. Yep, the result is a story that – to use a cliché – really does not let the reader go until river’s end. 

The Home of the Blizzard

Just another member of the Australasian Antarctic Expedition when it arrived at the white continent in early 1912, by the time Douglas Mawson left Antarctica, he was one of the most famous – living – explorers on the planet. The Home of the Blizzard (written by Mawson himself and published in 1915) recounts Mawson’s entire time in Antarctica but it is the recounting of his near-disastrous journey across King George Land in the summer of 1912/13 that secure this title’s place on the list.

It was while leading a team comprising himself and two others (Englishman Belgrave Ninnis and Swiss Xavier Mertz) that tragedy struck: Ninnis and most of the team’s food and some of their sled dogs disappeared down a deep crevasse. What happened next was incredible; with little food, Mawson and Mertz had to eat their dogs as they strived to make their way the 480km back to base camp. Mertz died of malnutrition, but Mawson made it back 30 days later, only to watch as the expedition ship Aurora floated out of camp and back to Tasmania.

Mawson spent the following winter at the AAE base-camp before rescue finally arrived the following summer. Befitting the era, Mawson’s book is wordy but incredibly engaging and descriptive, as this memorable quote demonstrates: “We dwelt on the fringe of an unspanned continent, where the chill breath of a vast polar wilderness, quickening to the rushing might of eternal blizzards, surged to the northern seas. We had discovered an accursed country. We had found the home of the blizzard.” Epic stuff.

Into Africa

It must have been the dream assignment for a journalist: head into the deepest, most wild and remote part of Africa and find a long-missing (presumed dead) famous explorer. For Henry Morton Stanley, it was the job of a lifetime; for his employer – The New York Herald – the famous words “Doctor Livingstone, I presume?” would encapsulate the story of the decade. It is, of course, a well-known and famous moment in exploratory history but the difference with this book is that author Martin Dugard delves far deeper, using a combination of unpublished diaries, Royal Geographical Society diaries, and a number of visits to various locations relevant to the tale, to produce a cracking read.

Dugard’s swapping of viewpoints between Livingstone and Stanley throughout Into Africa keeps the pace fast and also reveals the incredible differences between the two men – and how each one reacted to the myriad obstacles they faced, from being stuck in the middle of inter-tribal wars, through to the constant fear of – and battle with – the multitude of diseases that were rife in the continent. The Livingstone-Stanley story has been, literally, nearly done to death, but Dugard makes it all seem fresh – and bloody exciting. 

Shooting the Franklin

This cracking read follows the trials and tribulations of a group of mates who grew up paddling some of Tasmania’s most famous (and some now disappeared) rivers including, of course, the mighty Franklin. Author Johnson Dean and his crew (including his constant paddling companion, John Hawkins) made three attempts on the Franklin before succeeding in 1958. Along the way they experimented with everything from fold-up kayaks through to customised fibreglass canoes – the craft used in the successful descent. 

However, this 2002 book is about more than just the one (rather famous) southwest Tassie river; Dean and his mates had already paddled down the King, the Pieman (both now under dammed water) and others as they enjoyed exploring what is still, even today, one of the most remote parts of the world. Dean’s words convey a sense of what those now-drowned rivers must have been like to paddle – and what the surrounding wild landscape was like. 

The descents themselves were amazing – both in terms of what they paddled and how the men actually survived; the two earlier attempts resulted in near-drownings, destroyed watercraft and long walks back out to civilisation. It’s an amazing insight into a mostly disappeared (read: sunken) world.

Arabian Sands

The world’s largest sand desert, the Empty Quarter covers around 650,000 square kilometres, sprawling over the southern part of the Arabian Peninsula. Up until the 1950s this harsh, unforgiving land was the sole domain of the nomadic Bedouin. That is, until Sir Wilfred Thesiger, an Englishman, spent roughly five years in the region, becoming one of the first white men to set foot in this unforgiving landscape.

During his time in the Empty Quarter, Thesiger crossed the desert twice and lived with – and learned from – the Bedouin. Upon his return to “civilization” Thesiger later (in 1959) published Arabian Sands, one of the most amazing books on the thrills (and chills) of desert adventure. His recounting – in exacting detail – of the Bedouin way of life is amazing, especially in the light of just how much change was inflicted upon those people with the discovery of oil and the resulting rapid change in their way of life.

Thesiger’s adventures were many and included (during his second crossing of the desert in 1947) being briefly imprisoned by Saudi Arabia’s king, and having to deal with mutinous members of his first expeditionary party. Rather than the expected condescending tone, Thesiger’s words highlight his respect for the Bedouin way of life, and his descriptions of the landscape will make you want to book your flights, hire a 4WD, and travel deep into this still-amazing land.

First Overland

What do you do if you’re a group of (relatively) penniless university students (including author Tim Slessor) from Oxford and Cambridge universities who have hatched a crazy plan for an overland vehicular adventure, from London to Singapore, through some of the most inaccessible country on the planet, and wish to document it in written form, and on film? Well, you approach a very young BBC employee with the surname of Attenborough, first name David, who helps convince his employer that you need film (although only a limited supply initially, pending what the early footage looked like) and a 16mm, wind-up film camera. Land Rover also came on board, supplying two vehicles, and the student crew raised the rest of the funds via around 70 companies.

First Overland is touted as one of the world’s best travel stories and it is that, plus a simply cracking adventure, with Slessor’s words weaving a fantastical tale of journeying through wild foreign lands. It is probably one of the last “great British adventures” undertaken when the British Empire was still close to its full power. The book offers a fantastic view of what is now some of the world’s most inaccessible roads, including the Ledo Road from India to Myanmar (which is still closed to this day). The team also passed through what was then known as Persia (and some incredible archaeological sites here), as well as deal with all sorts of crazy encounters. When the foreword to a book is by David Attenborough, you know it’s the real deal. A real Boy’s Own Adventure.

The Emerald Mile

Even now, it sounds too crazy a plan to be true. In 1983, a group of paddlers in a wooden dory, led by Kenton Grua, took advantage of a heavily flooded Colorado River, to complete the fastest ever boat ride (powered or unpowered) down the full length of river in 1983.

However, The Emerald Mile is far more than just the story about a river journey; author Kevin Ferdarko gives readers the full history of the Grand Canyon and the Colorado River, from its formation millions of years ago, through to the evolution of the river guides who ply its waters, and the construction of a series of dams (and the lengthy conservation campaign) along its length. It was one of these dams – Glen Canyon – that was threatened with destruction by the unanticipated high snowmelt flow and heavy spring rain. The dam’s spillways failed miserably to contain the flow, with the result a huge wall of water rushing down the river. Grua saw his chance to break his own river descent record and the reader gets to jump in and enjoy what is an incredible ride downriver. 

The post Tall tales: Eight of the greatest adventure stories ever told appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Yakima has built a well-deserved reputation for robust carry systems, both roof-mounted and towbar/hitch-mounted (see our review of the Yakima OnRamp e-bike carrier, here). As well as compatibility with all Yakima products, the company’s designers and engineers focused on ensuring the new system is tougher than previous and also includes improved aerodynamics. This new system has also been subject to a lengthy testing period, as Yakima engineers have put the complete system – bars, legs, etc. – through the wringer to ensure its performance reflects the brand’s reputation for tough, uncompromising gear.

The crossbars are all made from lightweight aluminium, with black powdercoat or an anodised silver finish and have been designed to imitate the curvature of your vehicle’s roof shape to ensure optimum strength when fitted. The new leg systems are equally robust, featuring a steel chassis (with rust-resistant coating) and tough ASA plastic for weather and UV resistance. The result is a complete (and highly versatile) system that is up for any rugged outdoor conditions.

The JetStream Bar is a through-bar style and includes a T-slot system with Yakima’s clever SmartFill push-down tech to allow for easy attachment/removal of accessories. The bar’s aerodynamic profile helps reduce wind-noise, and it is rated for a maximum load of 75kg for a pair.  The JetStream FX Bar is a flush-fit style version of the JetStream and offers excellent wind-resistance and plenty of strength. The FX Bar also shares the JetStream’s 75kg maximum load rating.

The TrimHD Through Bar is the big-bopper, heavy-duty incarnation of the new bars, with a maximum 100kg (per pair) load rating. It includes T-slots for easy fit/removal of accessories and also includes a load strip with an ‘airflow diffuser ridge’ that is used to assist in reducing wind noise and securing gear.

The eight adjustable leg styles are, as mentioned earlier, built tough with that (rust resistance-coated) steel chassis and ASA plastic. There are four ‘FX’ versions, denoting their compatibility with the flush-fit FX bar system, and four ‘regular’ legs, that suit the other StreamLine bar versions. 

This new system from Yakima is incredibly versatile, with its modular design ensuring that most outdoor enthusiasts can ‘build’ a complete cargo carry system that suits their particular lifestyle and the types of adventures they enjoy. Yakima touts the StreamLine system as its most advanced roof rack system ever and, backed with Yakima’s well-earned reputation for producing gear that is tough and functional (and the the brand’s Limited Lifetime Warranty), it should see the US company continue to grow its share of this competitive market segment.

We’ve just received a Yakima StreamLine system for review, so stay tuned for our extensive gear test soon, here at www.ausgeoadventure.com.

See Yakima for more info on the StreamLine system and the brand’s range of gear.

The post Rack ‘em up! The new Yakima StreamLine roof rack system is out now appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

When I wrote, “it wouldn’t be much of a stretch…” I was, in fact, alluding to the reasoning behind Icebreaker’s new Shell+ technology; all about stretching – in this case, stretching merino wool – this new tech is what has resulted in this jacket and pants being made from merino wool fibre. This is something that would’ve been unheard of only a couple of years ago and what has resulted in Icebreaker’s first-ever wind- and water-resistant outer shell apparel.

The Icebreaker Shell+ is the result of a unique wool spinning process that pre-stretches those ultra-fine merino wool fibres before they are spun into, firstly, yarn and then, secondly, woven into fabric that contains a high level of thread density (read: very tight). It is the second part of this unique process – where the stretched fabric is released – where the magic happens. The yarn, once released from its stretched state, contracts to tighten up to the point where the resultant weave is tight enough to resist wind and a degree of water ingress (Icebreaker quotes “light showers”, while still offering a modicum of breathability for the wearer. Yep, clever!

Of course, a piece of technical apparel is more than just fabric and, again, the Icebreaker team has gone all-in on features that ensure this outer shell setup of jacket and the pants has all you need and offers plenty of versatility. These features include the jacket and pants being fully seam-sealed, to ensure no water ingress at the seams. The hood – again, reflecting versatility – can be used with or without a helmet (think: snowboarding, climbing, etc.) and can be adjusted via the toggled at the back. All fitment points – the hem (which also features a handy drop-tail for additional lower back protection), the sleeves (a standout, thanks to the push-button snap closures – the pants feature this nifty adjustment system on the waist, as well), are well thought-out and, most importantly, provide plenty of adjustability. 

The jacket also includes a two-way front zip to adjust for ventilation, along with high chest vertical zips that open to provide even more breathability. There’s also an internal pocket for additional stowage, along with two (zipped) hand pockets below the high chest zips, and – probably one of the most clever and welcome features – the jacket’s shoulder seams are offset to prevent wear/rubbing from backpacks. The pants add side zip pockets and a lower-leg zip to allow for easy fitment/removal of ski/board boots or hiking boots. Overall, the design of both the jacket and pants reflect Icebreaker’s long experience in designing apparel for the outdoors. Again, it’s very impressive on paper and when first worn, but how does it perform in the outdoors? 

In the field

Aus Geo ADVENTURE has had the Shell+ apparel for a couple of months now, and it’s been worn in conditions ranging from all that the wild south-west of Tassie can dish up, through to plenty of day-walks and overnight treks. Of the two items, the Shell+ jacket has seen by far the most use (the Shell+ pants we have lined up for some serious snow-season testing), and it has been quite impressive in the field.

The jacket’s overall fit is trim and snug, but it provides that without feeling too tight or restrictive; the articulated seams allow for plenty of movement when scrambling or lifting/raising your arms up. To this end, that drop-tail rear hemline has been great; being able to raise your arms up in inclement conditions without having to worry about cold air or rain hitting your exposed lower back is very welcome.

Speaking of rain, Icebreaker does say the DWR treatment on the Shell+ fabric is suited to “light showers” and this was borne out in testing when a couple of testers were caught out in afternoon rain. The MTB-based tester, in particular, was impressed with the jacket’s ability to withstand rainfall, with the droplets ‘beading-up’ and not noticing any wet-through sections of the jacket. During a day-hike we got caught out in a heavier shower but even then, it was only towards the end of an hour of heavy precipitation that the wearer noticed any moisture ingress.

The Shell+ fabric’s ability to withstand wind is impressive; Sydney’s recent howling-gale conditions have been a great test and the fabric’s incredibly tight weave (and those taped seams) has proven up to the task in terms of keeping the chill out. Breathability is always a variable that is hard to quantify, owing to how everyone’s core body-temp is different – as is the way they react to hot/cold conditions. Overall, though, it is well-controlled (especially in the jacket), and this is thanks to not only that innovative Shell+ fabric, but also the ‘extra’ ventilation possible through the two-way front zip and those high chest zip vents. At first glances, these looked like a gimmick but have proven to be anything but. 

We have noticed sweat/moisture build-up when wearing the Shell+ jacket and pants when tackling high-exertion activities, such as trail running and a hilly MTB course, but it has never been overwhelmingly ‘damp’ during those. 

The final word on the Icebreaker Shell+™ Merino Hooded Jacket and Pants

With two months of testing, you’d think we’d have a definitive answer on Icebreaker’s exciting new fabric technology. And we do – to a degree – but we are still very keen to continue testing the jacket and, especially, the pants over the winter. We believe that, if it performs as we expect in alpine conditions, that four-season performance will offset the hefty asking price.

Preceding our final review, we can report that, during late summer and spring, the Hooded Jacket has, by far, seen the most use, and it has performed very well, with a great mix of protection from the elements (notably wind) combined with a decent level of breathability. When the pants have been worn (in cold/windy conditions around camp and on a day hike) they have not disappointed, but we still think their primary appeal will be with the ski set. Speaking of which, we’re handing the jacket and pants over to our resident powder-hounds for winter and will return a full verdict once the snow season is under way. 

What we can say, for now, is that Icebreaker has impressed with the application of a whole new technology to one of the world’s oldest natural fibres. For years, merino wool base- and mid-layers have been the go-to for warmth, breathability and comfort and now that same fibre can be viewed in a similar light in regard to outer-shell apparel, with an additional injection of toughness in the fabric’s ability to withstand rugged treatment in the outdoors.

Whether all of that is enough to convince you to shell out (excuse the pun) what is, as mentioned earlier, a seriously hefty sum (especially if you’re stumping up for both jacket and pants), will be up to the individual buyer. However, for those who do, you can be assured that you will get to enjoy some impressive new fabric technology that will, thanks to its versatility, provide all-season assurance in testing conditions.

RRP: $900 (Shell+ Merino Hooded Jacket); $720 (Shell+ Merino Pants). See Icebreaker for more info on the Shell+ range and other outdoor apparel.

The post Icebreaker Shell+™ Merino Hooded Jacket and Pants: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Marin Nicasio 2 is made from double-butted cromoly steel and sports build specs that were popular when U2 still topped the pop charts. This 700c-wheeled gravel grinder is built around a cromoly steel frame with forged dropouts, external cabling routing and a threaded bottom bracket shell. With old-school build techniques like that, you’d be forgiven for thinking the Nicasio 2 is more throwback than back-country. However, its carbon-fibre fork, modern geometry and roomy front triangle point to a bike that’s been borne of experience… and a cheeky disdain of the rules.

While internal cable routing and press-fit bottom brackets are almost the norm now, there is nothing wrong with the Nicasio’s old-school ways; it makes things simpler for the home mechanic, and repairs in far-flung places easier to execute. The humble 10-speed drivetrain has made a bit of a comeback thanks to Covid-induced product shortages, and while Shimano Tiagra might not be ‘cool’, it does the job smoothly and with less fuss than 11- or 12-speed setups.

FSA provides the functional dual-ring crankset, while Marin-branded kit furnishes both the cockpit and the 700c alloy wheelset. The stock WTB Riddler 700x37mm tyres were swapped by this reviewer to Panaracer Gravelking SK 700 x 38mm tyres, to provide the last point of contact (the Nicasio can take up to 40mm tyres, or even 650b+ wheels), while Tiagra flat-mount brakes clamp 160mm rotors front and back.

In the field

At a shade over 10.6kg, the Nicasio 2 is on average a kilo or more porkier than alloy- or carbon-framed rivals with similar specs, but once up to speed, the weight disadvantage ceases to matter. The ride quality is typical for a mass-produced steel frame; muted, comfy and predictable, with the ability to filter out road and trail buzz that puts alloy and carbon in the shade. 

It pays for that compliance with a less rigid pedalling platform when pushed, and road bike riders will immediately note the more relaxed, benign handling of a bike that’s designed to be ridden all day, not in the middle of a pack. It manages paved dirt roads with absolute aplomb, too, though the stock WTB Riddler tyre can be caught out in damp dirt. (An early swap to the Panaracer Gravelkings proved the right one for additional traction across different surfaces.)

The only marks on the Nicasio’s copybook are minor ones. A third set of water bottle mounts underneath the downtube would be handy, while the external cables are routed untidily from the factory. I also experienced some brake flutter through the fork, though this eased with a switch from resin to metallic sintered brake pads.

Related: Explore the world on two wheels: The ultimate guide to bikepacking

The final word on the Marin Nicasio 2

The no-nonsense build and smart specs leave nothing behind in comparison to gravel/bikepacking bikes that cost thousands more when riding. Ignore the marketing hype, and the Marin Nicasio 2 jumps from the pack as a wallet-friendly do-it-all bike that’s easy to care for and a real joy to own.

RRP: $1899 See Bikes Online for more info on this and other Marin bikes.

The post Marin Nicasio 2: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

For some this will be yet another feather in the cap of Big Brother and further opportunity for enforcement of nanny-state rules leading to a loss of ‘true adventure’, but for most it will be a blessing, a resource saver and potential life saver. Here at Australian Geographic Adventure (AGA) we are advocates of ‘be prepared’ and view emergency satellite back-up as offering more pros than cons, especially when it comes to saving lives beyond the reach of cellular coverage.

Of course, satellite communication is by no means new technology and the last decade has seen brick-sized satellite phones and GPS units shrink into genius miniature combo-devices like the Garmin InReach mini. In 2023 however, Apple brings satellite safety to the masses.

How it works

Emergency SOS via Satellite is a service now available to all iPhone 14 (and beyond) users, free for two years from activation (Apple is yet to confirm whether to will remain free or become part of a subscription service beyond two years).  The emergency SOS via satellite feature seamlessly integrates, and further enhances, fall and crash detection available on Apple devices such as iPhone and Apple Watch.

Apple’s latest iPhone tech can not only manually activate SOS but also has an ability to auto detect a fall, mountain bike crash or vehicle accident, of a user outside of cellular and Wi-Fi coverage and attempt to contact emergency services (even if the patient is unresponsive). If no network is found, the device will now attempt to connect to one of Globalstar’s 24 satellites in low-earth orbit to relay critical information to local emergency services, family, and friends, via Apple-trained emergency specialists. 

Unresponsive patients will need some luck on their side for their device to find an orbiting satellite, however responsive patients will be instructed on how to attain and retain a satellite connection and be prompted to complete a short questionnaire to best determine the type of emergency response required. 

Questionnaire responses, location, altitude, iPhone battery level and Medical ID, are relayed to Apple-trained emergency specialists who will then stay in contact with the user as long as is either possible or required. A text compression algorithm reduces the average size of messages by 3x to further enable rapid transmission of critical information. Emergency contacts in the users Apple’s Health app will be able to view the location and emergency message transcripts of a patient (in real time if they’re an iOS user), on their own devices. 

Our thoughts

We see unlimited potential for Emergency SOS via Satellite and certainly view the feature as a sought after safety option for those travelling backcountry this winter, trekking or riding remote trails, or even driving to dad’s farm on a lonely country road. A bonus of the new satellite feature is an ability to reassure friends and family of whereabouts while traveling in an area with no cellular or Wi-Fi coverage, via the Find My app.

There is little iPhone users need to do other than update to the latest IOS and ensure they fill out medical ID in the Apple Health App. Sensibly, Apple have also provided a ‘demo’ mode that connects to satellites in range (without contacting emergency services), allowing users to experience the process and familiarise themselves with the service before stepping off the beaten path.

As with any new tech, it is not flawless and users should be aware that satellite connectivity and data transfer is dramatically reduced when a device is obstructed by foliage, high cliffs, building or mountains, and does not work inside. However, such limitations are the same for all satellite transceivers and such hindrances should be expected from any device.

Here at AGA, we hope no readers ever have a need to use emergency SOS via satellite, but we reckon if they do, they can at least be reassured that a dedicated satellite comms device is no longer the domain of hardcore adventurers and is now accessible to anyone on the latest iPhone 14.

See Apple for more info.

The post Apple’s Emergency SOS via satellite now available in Australia appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

Aeroe has designed the 11-litre (L) pod to be mounted on the brand’s Spider Rear Rack (read our review, here), either to the left or right side depending on your preference. If you are planning on going further afield (and really heading into the rough stuff) you can balance the rear of your bike with a Quick Mount Pod on each side, giving you 22L of storage. Made from high-quality, welded TPU nylon that is fully waterproof, the pod weighs 718 grams (g). Add in the uni-mount that is used to attach the pod to the Spider Rear Rack and the total weight comes in at 910g. 

In the field

Off the bike, the Quick Mount Pod is a very simple and effective storage solution. Access to your gear is via a heavy-duty waterproof zip. When unzipped, the Quick Mount Pod opens like a butterfly, giving you complete access to what you need.  Using the word ‘zip’ for a product like this could make you nervous, but when in your hand you’ll see how robust and heavy duty the zip and the Pod both are. Inside, you’ll find no special pockets or compartments, only two simple straps and clips to keep all your contents in place. This is all you need! The space gives you the luxury to pack and arrange the Pod as you please. I favour packing my bulkier items to start, so first in are the cooking and food items.

Unique to this product, and a point of difference from others, is how you attach and remove the Quick Mount Pod from your bike. Running through the solid back of the product is a sturdy retractable pin that, when pulled, releases the Pod from its circular mount. This design not only means you can take your possessions away from your bike in seconds, but it also gives you the option to place your pod at multiple angles on your bike.

The final word on the Aeroe Quick Mount Pod

The Quick Mount Pod is a well-designed and seemingly robust piece of touring kit. You will only need to use it once and won’t look back – it will become a regular on your bikepacking adventures. With 11L of well protected storage (or 22L if you opt for a twin set-up), and ease of use, the Quick Mount Pod will repay that initial investment in no time.

We now have a near-complete Aeroe bikepacking system, so look for more online updates on the system’s performance and a comprehensive long-term update in Issue 10 of Aus Geo ADVENTURE.

RRP: $189 See Aeroe for more info on this and the brand’s full range of bike touring gear.

The post Aeroe Quick Mount Pod: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

There are many facets to a rooftop tent’s appeal. For one, being off the ground is good when the weather is bad, as it means you don’t have to pitch your tent in muddy puddles. Secondly, the design of most rooftop tents allows for fast set-up and almost as fast pack-up, making camping a breeze for nomadic travellers who find it hard to spend more than one night in the same spot. 

The OZtrail Tarkine 1400 ticks both of these boxes, in that it allows us to sleep high and dry when we camp, and it only takes a couple of minutes to set up. 

Design

The smallest and lightest rooftop tent in the OZtrail range, when open the Tarkine 1400 measures 2.4m x 1.43m x 1.3m, and it weighs 59kg. OZtrail recommends it be fitted by a professional 4WD aftermarket store or a roof rack expert, but I opted to fit it myself to a pair of Yakima LockNLoad crossbars I have on my Ranger’s aluminium canopy. Fitment was straightforward using the supplied hardware and once secured, I attached the ladder and fitted the PVC transit cover. The whole process only took an hour or so, which means it is relatively easy to remove the tent when not in use and refit it when needed.

As well as the flyscreened doors and windows, and small vents on either side up near the roof, there is a flyscreened ‘SkyMesh’ roof panel that can be opened to let heat out. There’s even a corresponding clear panel in the fly so you can look at the stars as you drift off to sleep.

Inside the tent there’s a removable LED strip light that can be plugged into any USB outlet, while the dark flyscreens provide good privacy, and make it difficult for outsiders to see inside the tent even when the strip light is illuminated.

The tent material is 280gsm ripstop polycotton canvas that ensures good insulation and breathability. The sealed seams are double-stitched, and the zippers and flyscreens are good quality. The fly is waterproof 210D PolyOxford flysheet and it has straps and buckles for adjustment.

The Tarkine’s 60mm-thick high-density foam mattress measures 2.4m long and 1.4m wide and is very comfortable. There’s an anti-condensation layer between it and the hard tent base to prevent moisture build-up and mould, and the mattress is fitted with a removable and washable cover. 

For those who need additional shelter, there’s an optional annexe for the Tarkine that attaches via a sail track and a couple of zips and is then pegged into the ground. Measuring 2.3m x 1.7m, and with three large fly-screened doors and a tough (and removable) 600gsm PVC floor, the annexe can be used as an additional tent, somewhere to enjoy meals or simply as a storage area. The annexe also has a door on the inside that allows for vehicle access, and on my Ranger that means I can easily get to the fridge when standing in the annexe. The large external doors of the annexe can either be rolled up or, with tent poles, be used as awnings. 

In the field

The Tarkine’s first test was a family camping weekend in a caravan park, and thankfully set-up was quick and easy despite my lack of experience; unzip and remove the PVC transit cover, release a couple of tie-down straps that secure the tent, extend the telescopic ladder and pull on it to unfold the tent, and voila. The attached fly opens with the tent and is held aloft at the doors by easy-to-attach spring-steel poles, and this same arrangement is used to hold the side-window awnings in place. The generous fly and awnings provide enough cover that you can leave the window and door flaps open in rainy weather to maintain good ventilation. Climbing into and out of the Tarkine is a doddle thanks to the stable telescopic ladder which features wide rungs and is positioned at a relaxed angle.

I must admit that I didn’t get to sleep in the Tarkine on its first outing; instead, my wife and I slept in our swag while our 12-year-old daughter and her bestie got to sample the comfort of that 60mm-thick foam mattress. The smiles on their well-rested faces assured us they had a good night’s sleep and they declared the Tarkine “the best tent ever”.

Packing up the tent is simply the reverse process of set-up, but it takes a little longer as once the tent is folded you have to ensure all the loose material is tucked away neatly before tightening the tie-down straps and refitting the transit cover. Nevertheless, it’s still a quick operation and with a bit of practice under my belt, I can now set it up and pack it away in just a few minutes.  

The final word on the OZtrail Tarkine 1400

I have used the Tarkine 1400 a few times since that first trip and have found it to be as comfortable as the kids claimed it was. Some of the features I am particularly impressed by are the quality of construction, the ample ventilation, the comfortable mattress and the relatively low profile of the tent when packed for transit, which minimises wind drag when driving. For the asking price, I think it is great value for money. The optional annexe adds $400 and is a worthwhile add-on.

RRP: $1500 See OZtrail for more on this and other rooftop tents and outdoor gear.

The post OZtrail Tarkine 1400 rooftop tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Mont Zero Superlight (SL) is designed for 2-3 season, ultralight adventures, and this sleeping bag is temperature rated to 8 degrees for cold sleepers, 2 degrees for warm sleepers.

When it comes to weight, this full-size bag weighs in at an impressively low 417g – extra impressive considering that it’s filled with 230g of 1000+ loft goose down. Mont manage to keep the weight so low by using the very aptly named Anti-Gravity Nylon, which it claims to be the lightest nylon in the world. The weight is also reduced using a half-zip with an ultralight YKK #3 zip.

Using 1000+ loft goose down not only keeps the warmth rating comparatively high, but it also helps the Mont SL sleeping bag achieve a smaller packed size than if it had used a less lofty down. Vertical torso baffles and a contoured hood also help keep you warm overnight.

In the field

I’ve been using the Mont Zero Superlight sleeping bag for a couple of months now and taken it out on three different bikepacking trips, with varying overnight temperatures (see our guide to bikepacking, here). The small, packed size (roughly 12cm x 26cm) means that finding a spot for the sleeping bag on the bike has been a breeze. I’ve alternated between packing it in a dry bag on my forks and putting it in my handlebar bag.

Arriving at camp, it’s always a good idea to get your sleeping bag out of its bag as early as possible, to give it plenty of time to puff up and trap air. Giving it a good shake out is also a good idea. The Anti-Gravity Nylon allows the down to loft to its full potential, giving a visibly puffed-up look to the sleeping bag.

The half-zip affords ample room to climb into the sleeping bag, and there’s a stretchy pull cord to cinch the entry closed even more, as required. I consider myself a cold sleeper, and I’ve used the Zero SL sleeping bag in conditions ranging from 0 degrees to 8 degrees. On the colder night, I was also using the Mont Thermolite sleeping bag liner, which I was thankful for. 

The final word on the Mont Zero Superlight

The Mont Zero Superlight Sleeping Bag is comparatively priced to its competitors and reflects the quality of materials used. It’s proved to be an excellent spring and summer sleeping bag for the changeable conditions of the lower alpine regions I’ve been testing it in and I’m looking forward to using it as an ‘extender’ over the colder months.

RRP: $549.95 See Mont for more info on the Zero Superlight and the brand’s full range of outdoor gear.

The post Mont Zero Superlight sleeping bag: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Konseal Short 11″ are, as you’d expect from a highly regarded brand, packed with features – and all of which are very handy when in the field. They are also very well made, again reflecting Arc’teryx’s attention to detail, with a high stitch-count ensuring tight seams, plus quality zips used throughout. 

The shorts are made from a breathable, four-way stretch fabric that is a combination of 69 per cent cotton (organically grown), 29 per cent nylon and 2 per cent elastane (for that bit of stretch). The fabric is treated with a FCO DWR (Durable Water Repellent – it’s also PFC-free) finish. With freedom of movement a high priority in a number of outdoor activities, such as more technical hiking, rock climbing, scrambling, etc., the shorts have a gusseted crotch area, as well as what Arc’teryx dubs a semi-elasticated waist. 

There are five pockets, with a low-profile zippered pocket on the right thigh, two deep hand pockets and two rear pockets. Fitment around your waist is adjusted via the concealed adjuster, and the front fly and zip are both robust and easy to use.

Related: Best foot forward: A guide to hiking

In the field

Since July 2022, when the Arc’teryx Konseal shorts arrived, they’ve seen plenty of use – for a variety of activities. Mostly, I have used them for my day hikes, but they’ve also been called in to service as an emergency pair of MTB shorts (even though they’re not designed as MTB shorts, smartly, the seams in the seat section of the shorts are positioned so as to minimise chafing from a bike seat anyway) and also done duty when paddling canoes and kayaks. Each time, for each activity, the shorts have performed with no drama – and that is, really, what you want from key apparel such as this. 

The 11-inch (275mm) leg length has been, for this tester anyway, the ideal length, being just above the knee. The reason for this being ‘ideal, is that when shorts are longer, and go over your knee, this can inhibit leg movement. There’s just enough room in that zipped thigh pocket for a snack to be stored, while the two front pockets are (just) deep enough to hold keys, although my large iPhone 14 Pro Max won’t quite fit (I know – I need to leave the phone at home!). That concealed adjuster around the waist has come in handy for correct fitment, ahem, due to an over-enthusiasm on my part for food and beer on my part over summer. I don’t use the rear pockets, though, but they are of a decent size for some more small snacks if needed. The shorts have been treated pretty poorly, too, during the test period but the exterior fabric has held up well – and even when soaked through from rain, they have not been too ‘sticky’ on the skin. We expect them to still see plenty of use during winter, too, owing to their relative warmth when worn. (With winter approaching, it might be time to read our review on the Arc’teryx Cerium LT Hoody, here.)

The final word on the Arc’rteryx Konseal Short 11″

There’s not too much to say about the Arc’teryx Konseal Short 11″ other than they do the job – and do it very well. After more than nine months of rough treatment and being worn for days in a row on some adventures, they have retained their shape and feel, with minimal marks/rips or worn-out areas. 

It’s the attention to detail in the design (obviously reflecting the design team’s outdoor experience) that really stands out, though, and has done since I started testing the shorts. The gusseted crotch, smart positioning of seams (and the high stitch count of these seams), plus the material blend’s comfort have all been appreciated. Even the pricing is not too bad – especially from a premium brand – and I’d have no problems suggesting anyone looking for a versatile pair of outdoor shorts check out this offering from Arc’teryx. 

RRP: $130 See Arc’teryx for more info.

The post Arc’teryx Konseal Short 11″: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design of The North Face Dryzzle Full Zip Pants

The North Face’s Futurelight range of apparel has gone gangbusters since its original release, back in 2019. These Dryzzle pants (primarily aimed at hiking/trekking), with full-length side zips, feature the waterproof and breathable Futurelight fabric in its three-layer format, with a non-PFC DWR (Durable Water Repellent) finish. At the bottom of the pants are what The North Face terms ‘kickpatchs’ and, as the moniker suggests, these sections of a Kevlar material are designed to protect the pant leg bottoms from accidental damage from boots, crampons and abrasive terrain, such as rocks, sticks, etc. 

The fit is standard (i.e., no tapering or over-generously sized thigh section) but with ample space inside for multiple layers. The elastic waistband allows for some adjustability for the wearer, while the articulated knee sections are designed to assist freedom of movement. The pants weigh in at an average 410g.

In the field

For a continent viewed as primarily flat, there’s a lot of short vertical scrambles getting in and out of Zodiacs, plus plenty of walking. This does challenge the breathability and ease of use/comfort of the Dryzzle pants, but it was a challenge that was answered. The breathability was a stand-out; especially so considering the conditions were often very windy and cold. So, I was walking uphill, getting a bit sweaty, but not too much, and weren’t suffering from the cold wind. 

The articulated knee sections were a blessing for Zodiac ingress/egress – often in choppy conditions on shore and/or when having to clamber straight up out of the Zodiac on to some stairs that had been cut into the side of a snowbank by the expedition guides. In terms of waterproof performance, this was well proved on our first day when we had to rush back to the Zodiac’s as the ocean’s swell rose quickly, with waves ending up crashing over, and into, the Zodiac’s interior. I got covered in water a few times, but the Dryzzle pants kept the water out, effectively. 

The final word on North Face Dryzzle Full Zip Pants

Waterproof pants are, by their inherent purpose, only used intermittently. You can get waterproof pants a lot cheaper than the lofty asking price of the Futurelight Dryzzle versions. If your outdoor forays only extend to day hikes and bike rides, etc., a cheaper pair will work. However, if you’re looking at potentially being in a hostile (read wet, windy, cold) environment for longer periods – over a few days or more – The North Face Dryzzle Futurelight pants start to make a lot of sense.

RRP: $350 See The North Face for more info on the Dryzzle pants and other Futurelight apparel.

The post The North Face Dryzzle FUTURELIGHT™ Full Zip Pants: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design of the Roman Cradle 2P

If you like to head to the hills on a whim but don’t have a spare thousand dollars for a sub-1kg two-person hiking tent, then a Roman Cradle 2P might just do the trick. The Roman Cradle 2P Hiking Tent is a solid, sturdy and affordable two-person, four-season hiking tent, and offers a bunch of useful features for hikers, backpackers and car campers. Weighing in at 2.8 kilograms and measuring 45cm long x 17cm in circumference, the Cradle 2P is certainly no featherweight but is easily packable and can be stuffed into a backpack for multi-night adventures on foot. (See our guide to lightweight camping, here.)

Its three-pole geodesic design and pivoting pole slider offers a reasonably quick setup and a burly shelter, while the PU 5000mm taped floor and PU 3000mm water-rated Ripstop® fly offer durability and reliable protection from the elements. A 215cm x 130cm floor space delivers enough internal room for one occupant with self-inflating mattress and gear, or two occupants with sleeping pads, and a 110cm roof provides enough room to change inside on a wet morning. The ridge pole creates a hexagonal footprint and streamlined profile, all while booting vestibule space so hikers can keep packs tucked out of the elements. Two side doors enable easy access to both sides of the tent and when combined with the large mesh upper, allow for increased ventilation to aid airflow and reduce condensation. The waterproof roll-top stuff sack with dual compression straps is a bonus for storing and transporting the tent.

In the field

There is plenty to both like and some to dislike about the Roman Cradle 2P Hiking Tent. Whether it suits your needs will likely be determined by budget and intended use. But in short, the Roman Cradle 2P offers a lot (features) for not much (money). There are far lighter, higher-tech tents in the two-person hiking category, but few that deliver such a sturdy and sizeable sub-2.8kg geodesic tent for under $250. We were big fans of the dual vestibules and the ridge pole that created a more windproof footprint and expanded internal volume. 

The 5000mm water rated floor with seam sealing is a must-have and the 3000mm water rated, quick-release fly sheet was easy to fit, with well-considered Velcro tabs at guy attachment points to aid rigidity. Once laid out this tent will handle some harsh conditions. The tent offered a common tried and tested dual-wall system, and when combined with large mesh areas offered plenty of ventilation through the fly sheet vents. The external pole attachment was of a clip-type, a method we are fans of with our ‘if-it-ain’t-broke-don’t-fix-it” attitude. Small details like the off-the-floor internal pockets at both ends, a roof hook for light, along with non-foot-lacerating tent pegs and reflective guy attachment points all put a smile on our dial. 

Related: Best foot forward: A guide to hiking

What didn’t put a smile on our file was the pivoting pole slider that we discovered was both a blessing and a bane. The pole-slider aids strength and solidifies pole-placement but, it is also intended to aid ease of setup – we found the opposite. The pole-slider makes the assessment of which-pole-goes-where more difficult (colour-coding will fix this) and the pivot-points must be oriented correctly, with attention to detail, or may break (we managed to accidentally break a pivot, but fortunately, it just clipped back in place). 

We also weren’t massive fans of the loose door tiebacks, and oversized plastic buckles and guy ratchets. They all worked well enough but gave the tent a ‘cheap’ feel. Just a few more dollar for some alloy guy tensioners, reflective guy lines or higher spec tiebacks would have us smiling a lot more. 

All in all, though, the tent was a winner for the cost – it’s hard to knock the bits that allow it to be so affordable. However, if you’re looking for more perceived durability and less weight in a hiking tent, there are plenty of higher spec alternates that will deliver ‘the goods’ but be prepared to pay a decent chunk of change more.

The final word on the Roman Cradle 2P

While there are no doubt more advanced and lighter weight two-person four-season tents on the market, there are few that can offer such features at a similar price point to the Roman Cradle 2P Hiking Tent – it offers plenty of bang for those bucks. We recommend this tent to entry-to mid-level hikers on a budget who require a three- to four-season shelter, and where packable size and weight are less of a factor. 

RRP: $299 Click through to OZtrail for more info on the Roman Cradle 2P and other Roman and OZtrail gear.

The post Roman Cradle 2-Person Hiking Tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

This expansion of the Summit Series badge is the result of how outdoor athletes and explorers are utilising a multi-disciplinary approach to mountain adventures where, rather than a single outdoor discipline being the focus, adventurers are combining several, such as skiing and ice or alpine climbing, to achieve their goals. This has meant they need apparel and gear that offers optimum performance and reliability in a number of extremely trying environments.

The new Summit Series features a versatile layering system that combines base-, first- and mid-layers with activity-specific outer shell kits (jackets/pants, etc.) so anyone using this gear can tweak their layering and protection system to whether they are hot, cold or wet at particular times during an expedition, and to suit their personal preferences when in these challenging conditions.

On top of the men’s and women’s layering apparel, equipment and shell kits, the new Summit Series also includes footwear, in the form of the Summit Breithorn FUTURELIGHT boots. This waterproof/breathable footwear includes some amazing tech aimed at ensuring it is both protective and light in weight. (We cannot wait to get hold of a pair to test in the field).

The North Face Summit Series has been the top-tier level of the brand’s extensive product offerings for a number of years and it looks like this expansion and update of the collection will see it continue to be a go-to. This new collection reflects its past legacy of being focused on an athlete-centric, solution-minded approach to design and product development. For those adventurers pushing the limits – or for those who just want reliable, durable gear – the 2023 Summit Series looks to meet those challenges.

See The North Face for more info.

The post The North Face relaunches its iconic Summit Series collection appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Rocky Mountain Instinct C70 is the second-from-top model and, as you’d expect, comes with a high spec level. The carbon-fibre frame (note: there are alloy frame models available) is made from what Rocky calls Smoothwall carbon and it features a press-fit bottom bracket, internal (and quiet!) cable routing, and the company’s RIDE-9 adjustable geometry. There is 140mm of rear travel, courtesy of a Fox Float X Performance Elite shock, and it is delivered through Rocky’s Smoothlink suspension – a four-bar design. A Fox 36 Float EVOL FIT4 Performance Elite Series fork provides 150mm of squish up front. The drivetrain is full Shimano XT: a 32-tooth chainring, 10-51T rear cassette (yep, it is huge), M8100 chain and 170mm XT cranks (for XL, L and M and SM; XS Instincts have 165mm cranks), combining with a Shimano XT shifter and rear derailleur. Shimano also provides the stopping power, courtesy of XT four-piston brakes and 180mm rotors front and rear.

The Instinct is available in two wheel sizes: XS is 27.5-inch; SM is 27.5 or 29, and M through to XL is 29-inch only. The wheels are Race Face AR 30 alloy rims with dependable DT Swiss Competition spokes, and the Maxxis Minion DHF 2.5 WT (front) and Minion DHR II (rear) tyres hint at the Instinct’s capability. The dropper post is a Race Face Turbine R, running at 175mm in this Large size. The overall weight of the Instinct C70 is 14.3kg – a notable jump on the previous-gen carbon model equivalent, which weighed in at around 13kg.

This additional beefiness reflects the trend in MTB design toward more durability and robustness, with this being most notable in the attention Rocky’s engineers paid to upping the rigidity of the frame’s front triangle for more direct steering. The jump from a Fox 34 to the current Fox 36 fork brings more stability and support in the front end along with an additional few grams. Rocky Mountain has pulled a bit of a cool trick with the Instinct; this carbon frame is identical to that used in the Altitude, the Instinct’s Enduro World Series focused stablemate, with 170mm (f)/160mm (r) travel. As a result, this means Instinct (and Altitude) owners have the ability to swap out the (carbon model only) modular shock mount to run a shorter or longer stroke shock. So, you are – sort-of – gaining two bikes in one, provided you have the dosh for an extra shock and fork. 

The addition of a 10mm chainstay adjustment might sound like not much but when used in conjunction with Rocky Mountain’s RIDE-9 adjustment system, it’s possible to customise the bike’s performance to any trail; stretch that chainstay out and you gain more stability at speed or keep it short for more fun. RIDE-9 is a fast way (it takes five minutes and two Allen keys) to alter your bike’s geometry and suspension performance. As per the RIDE-9 moniker, there are nine possible configurations, attained through the different positions of two interlocking chips.

Related: The Ultimate Guide to Mountain Biking

In the field

It’s taken us a while to get our hands on the Instinct (huge thanks to Global Fitness and Leisure Pty Ltd, the Aussie distributor), which has meant this big rig has only been on test for a month. And, thanks to Sydney’s wetter-than-usual 2022, a lot of my local trails have been closed, which has limited time on the gold and red machine, albeit enough to garner some initial impressions. 

During this first phase of testing, I have kept the RIDE-9 setting in the Neutral position, and it simply works – for me, anyway, after getting used to the steeper seat tube, longer reach and slacker front end (note: we will be changing the RIDE-9 settings over the next few months and report back). That steeper seat tube has been a boon for one pain-in-the-proverbial climb on my local trail and I now rumble up it confidently. 

It’s worth noting that, even though Rocky has increased the mid-stroke and bottom-out support on this latest Instinct, its suspension is still very active; there are more efficient climbers in this market segment, but for me, I’d rather have the oodles of traction on offer, and flick the Float X to its ‘firm’ setting. That supple rear end also meshes well with the Fox 36 Performance Elite fork and what’s going on up front. The internet is full of comments noting that for the money, the C70 should come with Fox’s GRIP2 36 fork – and I agree – but this ‘lower spec’ fork still does a commendable job, especially pointed downhill.

Speaking of downhill, for a trail bike with 140mm/150mm of suspension, the Instinct cranks down as if it is a far bigger bike, with that supple suspension keeping you glued to the trail at speed. I should note – and it’s early days – that even though the Instinct likes staying on terra firma, it can provide a playful side; popping off obstacles is easy, and loads of fun.

The not-so final word on the Rocky Mountain Instinct

The Rocky Mountain Instinct looks to fulfil the role of ‘one bike for all’ and seems to do an effective job. If you had to define the bike, it’d still probably be as an ideal fit for the trail/all-mountain segment, which is what most of us ride anyway. However, that added versatility in terms of adjustable geometry – and the ability to fit a larger shock and fork –contribute to the bike’s wide breadth of capability, meaning that occasional XC race and/or enduro ride are more than achievable.

The big issue – and this is by no means exclusive to this bike – is the price. That’s a lot of money for a bike but, as most mountain bikers (and roadies) know, that is where the bike scene has gone, and equivalent boutique/highly regarded brands are similarly priced.

When comparing the Instinct to its competitors, it offers plenty, especially with that aforementioned versatility thanks to the geo adjustability – and as mentioned earlier, this same frame geometry (and RIDE-9 adjustability) is available across all seven models, with three carbon-fibre and three alloy variants available at a notably cheaper price point than this C70. 

Look for a long-term review of the C70 in Issue 9 of Aus Geo ADVENTURE, and check here for updates.

The post Rocky Mountain Instinct: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The answer is, (drum roll please), “Yes… and no!” Or is that, “No… and yes!”? 

“Get off the fence!” I hear you scream. But hear me out.  

What Apple has delivered in the Apple Watch Ultra is arguably the most, advanced, durable and feature-rich smartwatch that simultaneously performs as a rugged full-featured GPS and precision training device. And for most of us mere mortals, it will be more than enough.

However, let’s begin with the blatantly obvious. If you are a super hardcore extreme adventurer heading off into remote wilderness for days and weeks on end, with a need for inbuilt OEM topo-maps or near endless battery life, then there is little doubt Garmin’s Solar series will be in your sights, or maybe Coros. Not because they are vastly superior devices but quite simply, because of their proprietary route-plotting and topographic maps combined with energy-saving modes that massively extend battery longevity. 

But for nearly everybody else, in nearly every other location, in every other discipline and every other situation, the Apple Watch Ultra is not only going to deliver what you need, but also provide features you’ve previously only dreamt of. In fact, for triathletes, multi-sport athletes, runners, riders, swimmers, hikers, skiers and SCUBA divers (Yes SCUBA divers), The Apple Watch Ultra might just be the most spectacular piece of wearable tech you can presently adorn yourself with. Oh, and if like me, you like to duck off for a sneaky midweek ‘board-meeting’ at your local surf break, when you should be responding to urgent emails, then the Ultra should most definitely be on your watch list (see what I did there?).

Importantly, the Apple Watch Ultra is not trying to be something it is not. It is not trying to promise months of GPS tracking on a single solar charge. Instead, Apple promote the Ultra as exceptional tech with an abundance of exclusive features and a dramatically extended battery-life. Apple is bringing a world of app-development and smartwatch technology into the mud, sand, snow and water; and doing so with a ‘Bang!’ Or more aptly, with the shrill, piercing wail of an 86-decibel emergency siren. But more on that later.

Design

There’s no denying the new Apple Watch Ultra stands out from the crowd in the fast-growing competitive world of GPS watches; 49mm x 44mm of Sapphire Crystal paired with 61 grams of body sensors, three speakers, three microphones and copious internal-tech in a rounded-rectangular aerospace titanium casing certainly delivers a ‘presence’ that cannot be ignored. 

What is unique about the Apple Watch Ultra is the rugged looks do not appear to detract from its universal appeal. Even with an oversized digital crown and bright orange action button the Ultra appears stylish enough for the fedora hat-wearers of our world. The Ultra can be paired with easily swappable wristbands for custom looks, and performance, in varying pursuits. A Trail Loop delivers a thin, extremely lightweight, comfortable band with velcro-like closure for running and endurance sports. The Alpine Loop is for “explorers” who prefer a stitch-less high-strength band of dual layered nylon woven together and fastened with a titanium G-hook. And the Ocean Band is for watersport lovers and recreational divers, delivering a stretch rubber with customisable titanium buckle and optional extension strap to fit over a wetsuit. 

Truth be told, I initially considered the interchangeable wristbands of Apple watches a bit of a gimmick but have surprisingly found myself mixing and matching my Ultra bands on a near daily basis with the Alpine Loop quickly becoming a favourite due to its comfort and security and the Ocean Band perfect for surfing. 

The watch tends to rest on the wrist rather than wrapping around it, and for some this will be an annoyance, but for others, like myself, this weighty burliness is somewhat comforting, and the bulk is offset by Apple’s clean styling. The oversized digital crown is protected by a crown-guard and works both as a scroll-wheel and button, and two further buttons, including the bright orange action button, give the Ultra more manual control than touchscreen-only smartwatches.

The Action button is a fully customisable button programmable to activate workouts, drop waypoints, backtrack when navigating, turn on the torch or even record a Scuba Dive. I personally programmed the button to open my work-out app, and then to activate precision start. From there-on the same button manually recorded segments or a two-button sequence paused my workout. 

For each different app the Action button varies in its capabilities. It takes a little getting used to and a mild annoyance is an inability to fully customise the button to work across all apps, or program multi button sequences, such as double-press or triple-press actions, to end workouts or answer/end calls etc. I’d love to see the Action button being used to its maximum potential in future firmware upgrades.

The bulky casing and rugged looks are not just for show, however. The aerospace-grade titanium and ceramic casing delivers exceptional corrosion resistance and strength to weight ratio, whilst the sapphire crystal display measures 9 out of 10 on the Mohs hardness scale (where diamonds are 10/10), making it one of the hardest, most scratch resistant materials on earth. 

The Ultra’s ability to be worn in temperatures as low as -20 degrees Celsius and high as 55 degrees Celsius prove it’s not a device for fair weather only. Even so, in my experience, many devices developed to be worn in extreme cold don’t necessarily ‘operate’ without copious body warmth, but I haven’t yet been able to test the Ultra in such conditions. With many Ultra Apps still requiring a large degree of touchscreen input, the Ultra will potentially remain slightly handicapped in this arena until further development delivers crown and button only controls for conditions where frostbite, snow, ice or teeming rain might me an issue.

I was fortunate to catch up with National Geographic Adventurer and Explorer Wasfia Nazreen, who has been using the Apple Watch Ultra for several months, however, and she raved about the new kid on the block.

“As a high-altitude mountaineer, it’s critical to measure blood saturation levels, and having both Blood Oxygen and the ECG app on my wrist is incredible!” Nazreen says. Other favourites include the Compass app (for waypoints and when using the Backtrack feature to retrace steps) the customisable Action button (easy to use, even when wearing gloves) the temp sensor, women’s cycle tracking and the inbuilt comms (voice-memos, calls and messages).

Crucial information is measured using a mass of sensors, including dual-band GPS, accelerometer, gyroscope, electrical heart rate, optical HR, barometer, always-on altimeter, compass, SpO2, VO2max, body-temperature, water-temperature, depth gauge and more. Data is analysed via the watchOS 9 operating system and delivered to the Ultra’s bright 410 x 502 pixel, 2000nit OLED retina display. Now we’re not talking, ‘easy to view in a dark tent’ kind of display, but rather the Ultra can be viewed at arm’s length when backcountry skiing on a bluebird day, or at 20m under in murky water. The Ultra is twice as bright as the Apple Watch Series 8, surpassing nearly all other displays in the market. Importantly, display-brightness is customisable and the digital crown enables one-touch transition to a red-light night mode on the Wayfinder watch-face. Speaking of watch faces, Ultra users have the option of hundreds of watch face styles and configurations, downloaded to the Ultra itself, or via the IOS Watch app. The Watch app allows full customisation of each watch-face, with complications, as well as tailoring colour, app view, dock, Action button, notifications, sounds, haptics, and much more.

In the realms of health and fitness watchOS 9 also offers some of the most advanced metric and analysis available, such as vertical oscillation, ground contact time and stride length during running workouts. Information like time, distance, elevation, and heart rate are all available at a glance on the watches oversized display and users can easily scroll between views on the move for a mind-boggling array of data. Audible feedback of split times, heart rate zones and more is available through the Ultra’s dual-speakers or bluetooth earbuds as well as the ability to stream music or listen to tunes stored on the Ultra’s internal memory. Messaging, phone calls and voice memos utilise the Ultra’s triple microphone array and are available through Siri. There are still a few inconveniences like not being able to stop a workout when on a phone call, but hopefully these will be addressed in firmware updates.

In the field

There is an entire world of third-party fitness apps are available through the App Store, but the Ultra’s native Workout app is more than enough for most ‘everyday users’ and I personally found the app to be ideal for general running/cycling, and even surfing duties. I could easily view distance, speed, pace, heart rate (HR) and HR zones, and all data synced to the fitness and health apps on my iPhone. The Ultra also offers advanced workout features like automatic-detection and switching of disciplines for multi-sport workouts and – one of my favourites – an easily interpretable pace-diagram highlighting, in real time, if I am slower or faster than my intended pace. Post workout I can examine in-depth analysis of each individual workout, including workout locations (with maps), weather and routes, time and splits, distance and pace, calories, altitude, power output, heart rate data (including zones), cadence and more. 

I have been a user of Strava for many years so it’s seamless integration with Apple Watch Ultra is a bonus. Strava Pro subscribers have access to their workout history, plus advanced Strava metrics like power data and customisable HR zones, as well as training options.

For getting off the beaten path, the compass app now enables intrepid users to input waypoints, follow a bearing with distance information and backtrack routes. Dual Band (L1 and L5) capabilities across GPS,Glonass, Galileo, BeiDou, QZSS provides the most accurate location tracking of any system, even in complex and dense environments. For users who require advanced backcountry navigation, third-party apps like WorkOutdoors, GaiaGPS, Kamoot, All-Trails and TopoMaps+ are your new best friend. 

Some of these apps offer turn by turn instructions whilst others allow the user to download off-line topographic maps for remote navigation. I’ve been a fan of TopoMaps+ for years, mainly for double checking where the hell my campsite is when returning from backcountry split-boarding antics in a white out. The app also allows me to plan, navigate and backtrack routes, all on my iPhone. On my Ultra I can now use TopoMaps+ to mark waypoints, deliver bearing & distance observations, record tracks, and retrace my route if need be. Whilst the routes created on my Ultra sync to my iPhone, TopoMap+ doesn’t appear now to reverse the sharing to provide GPX files, or saved routes and tracks to my watch. 

For route planning GaiaGPS seems, at present, to be one of the best, offering waypoint creation and route-plotting via PC or smartphone. Using my Gaia IOS app I can send routes directly to the Ultra, even with turn-by-turn instructions. WorkOutdoors also syncs GPX files imported to the WorkOutdoors iPhone app. All in all the watchOS topo and navigation apps are very much nearly there, but still need a little tweaking to offer a system capable of rivalling Garmin.

Where the Ultra excels over all others however is in the water. The most noticeable evidence of the Ultra’s aquatic brilliance is through Apple’s collaboration with Huish Outdoors to develop the Oceanic+ app. Oceanic+ converts the Apple Watch Ultra into a fully featured dive computer, capable of recording and logging dives to 40-metres. Very few GPS watches are certified for SCUBA but the Ultra features a water-lock and is certified to WR100 and EN 13319, an internationally recognised standard for dive accessories. The Oceanic+ dive planner integrates dive conditions, tides, water temperature and even visibility and currents posted by other users.

I had the opportunity to join award-winning wildlife photographer and scuba expedition leader Nadia Aly while diving in Hawaii, and she explained the benefits of the Ultra over dedicated dive computers.

“Oceanic+ offers recreational divers the same data in a much more user-friendly interface. The simplicity and ease of use just can’t be beat! Believe it or not, most dive computers are hard to figure out, they have complicated menus, and don’t have great user interfaces.” 

My testing of the unit on multiple dives in both Australia and Hawaii proved Nadia’s comments true. I was mind-blown; not only does the Ultra perform as a fully featured dive computer but it even surpasses much of its competition with an easy-to-use interface, super bright display, haptic feedback, and intelligent use of digital crown and action button. I was easily able to plan dives, program Air or Nitrox and target depths, record dives and keep track of all vital dive data during a SCUBA session. 

Underwater, haptic feedback resonated through my wetsuit to inform me I’d reached my max dive depth. I could use the Ultra’s digital crown to scroll though dive data like depth, time on bottom, time to surface and even to set a bearing. My wrist buzzed and my watch flashed if I hit my target depth, ascended too fast, and for my safety/decompression stop, where the Ultra displayed a countdown timer. 

Post dive, I was able to immediately view my ‘OK to fly’ time as well as access my basic dive log on the Ultra. The dive log automatically syncs to the Oceanic+ IOS app for more in-depth dive data, including GPS entry and exit locations, dive profile and statistics. On the IOS app, users can assess graphs of depth, temperature, ascent speed and no-decompression-time as well as input data like weights used, surface conditions and visibility.

After my first two dives I asked Nadia Aly if maybe I was over-frothing, but she replied, “This is a huge game changer for me and many other divers. The fact that I can wake up, go to the gym, track my workout, hop on a boat and then scuba dive with the same device is just amazing!”

Whilst the SCUBA community is certainly niche, The Ultra’s aquatic capabilities are not just limited to those who enjoy exploring under the waves. Surfline transitions the Ultra into a dedicated surf watch. I use Surfline to check local conditions and receive alerts when my local breaks turn on. I can also use Surfline to record each surf as a workout, with each wave recorded on GPS, alongside swell size, wind direction and even the water temperature. All info is uploaded to my IOS Surfline App so, if need be, I have proof of that ‘epic session’ when boasting to mates at the pub.

Whether surfing, diving, running, snorkelling (see our snorkelling guide, here), backcountry navigation of just doing your HIIT workout, there is a plethora of features, apps and modes for everybody. Back at home, the Ultra even works hand in hand with CarPlay to deliver haptic feedback for turn-by-turn notifications enroute to my local trails. It even has crash detection if I am in a serious vehicle accident, using the Ultra’s accelerometer and gyroscope in conjunction with GPS, microphone activity, barometric pressure changes and machine learning algorithms to detect a serious vehicle accident. If a severe accident is detected the Ultra will display an alert, if the alert is not cancelled within 20-seconds the Ultra will call emergency services. If I am unresponsive, the watch even plays an emergency audio message to emergency services with latitudinal and longitudinal coordinates. And finally, if no signal is available and my iPhone 14 (or later) is close-by, Crash Detection uses the iPhone to send a notification using Emergency SOS via satellite if available. (Unfortunately, SOS is not yet available in Australia.)

Assuming I make it to the trailhead, all the niceties of the Ultra still don’t seem to stop me from running into trees on my mountain bike, but hidden safety features help me here as well. The Ultra offers both an emergency siren and fall detection; the Ultra’s siren is an 86-decibel siren that Apple claims can be heard 180 metres away.

On a windy day at my local trails the siren was easily activated and able to pierce ambient noises at close quarters, but at 50m it was difficult to discern, and at further away the wind noise got the better of it. While not the claimed 180m, the Ultra certainly has the ability to draw attention to the plight of somebody well out of sight. Of course, if I manage to crash my bike and become unresponsive then the siren is not much use, but the Ultra still has a trick ‘on a sleeve’ (get it?). If the Ultra detects a hard fall followed by a period of immobility, it will use haptics to tap my wrist, then sound an alarm, and finally initiate a call to emergency services.

I can continue to fill pages about useful apps and advanced safety features, but the reality is they all have one thing in common. They use battery power. And that brings us to the aforementioned ‘elephant in the room’. If there’s ever been a sore point surrounding Apple Watch, it has been battery life. Fortunately, Apple has listened to critics and the Ultra’s battery is 76 per cent larger and lasts twice as long as the Apple Watch Series 8. Apple claim up to 36 hours of battery life in normal mode and 60 hours in Low Power mode (Low Power mode switches LTE to check only once per hour, turns off some heart rate notifications, and turns off background heart rate recording when Workout is not being used). 

The good news is Apple’s numbers appear quite conservative and interestingly I managed 58 hours in normal mode, including two 45-minute workouts whilst listening to music on AirPods Pro II, so that’s nearly double Apple’s acclaimed battery limitations. What this all means is that on a single charge you can expect a couple of days of battery while using the watch for a few calls, messages, music, workouts and usual everyday stuff. The bonus is the included magnetic fast-charger boosts the Ultra from zero to 80 per cent in one hour, and to 100 per cent in a further 30 mins. 

The final word

Many might claim Apple has a long way to go to compete seriously against the Garmin fenix 7 or Coros Vertix 2, both offering days or even months in smartwatch and energy saver modes, and to a certain degree they are right. 

However, we’re not comparing apples with apples, and thus lies the challenge… the Apple Watch Ultra is unique in its position as both a GPS sports watch and fully featured smartwatch, whereas the big players in the GPS watch market are most definitely sport watches and not smart watches.

Apple Watch Ultra can call, message and email via Siri, keyboard or voice recognition, all from your wrist, and all in the absence of a phone. It will pay for groceries and direct you to your car in the car park or stream music on Apple Music, Spotify or Deezer. It will deliver turn by turn navigation in sync with CarPlay and control a Sonos sound system before turning your outside lights on if you’re away. You can even search for a nearby restaurant and read its Tripadvisor review right on your forearm. The Ultra merges the world of the smartphone with the world of outdoor-wearables and does so exceptionally well. The only thing it doesn’t do is last a week on a single charge… yet. 

And so, if you require a dedicated long-life sport watch with a few smartwatch features thrown in then a plethora of options await you at your local outdoor store. However, if you want a smartwatch that does everything the others cannot do, and then a truckload more on top, then the Apple Watch Ultra should most definitely be on your HIIT list.

RRP: $1299

THE GOOD STUFF: High quality build, looks great, great fitness features, endless apps, brings ‘smartwatch’ to the outdoors.

THE NOT-SO-GOOD STUFF: Expensive, battery longevity, need third party for offline mapping.

The post Apple Watch Ultra: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

Rated to -5 degrees Celsius, the Palm Passport is suitable for solid three season use, and utilises a combination of Insufil Thermo® and Thermospace® insulation to provide maximum warmth to weight ratio, especially in damp conditions where it excels over down sleeping bags. A 40D/280T nylon diamond ripstop outer offers durability, and a Silk-tex 75D/210T lining delivers comfort.

Weighing in at 1.6kg and compressing to 32cm x 20cm, the Passport is both compact and lightweight (for a synthetic bag) and unfurls to a tidy 210cm x 75cm semi-tapered design. The semi-tapered shape helps to provide warmth around the legs, fits users up to 180cm tall, and the left and right double anti-snag SBS zip variants allow two sleeping bags to be zipped together to form a double sleeping bag.

In the field

There’s no doubt Roman has delivered a tidy package with its Palm Passport sleeping bag. The Palm Passport -5 is a great value for money three-season hiking/bikepacking sleeping bag that can handle frigid nights (for warm sleepers) but we suggest using it predominantly for conditions above water-bottle-freezing temps. The Insufil Thermo®  and Thermospace® fill provide bang-for-buck when it comes to keeping the tootsies toasty on milder winter nights and the Silk-tex 75D/210T lining provides ample comfort.

Related: The Ultimate Guide To Outdoor Sleep Systems

The oversized zippers open and close seamlessly without snagging on the draft collars (a pet hate of ours) and the separate foot zipper not only allows for venting and cooling on those balmy nights but adds the benefit of the iconic campfire shuffle for extra warmth on chilly evenings by the fire. The full side zipper enables the bag to open to a blanket.

The Palm Passport is not niggle-free, however. Anyone built for the rugby front-row should forget this bag as it predominantly suits those who are relatively palm-sized in stature as well, with its internal girth of 140cm chest area and 100cm in the foot area. The internal stash pocket only just fits an oversized smartphone and is sealed with a single Velcro tab (we’d like to see a zipper).

While this bag is tested to EN13537 standards (European Standardised temperature ratings for sleeping bags) and rated at minus-5 degrees, we suggest the comfort rating of this bag leans more toward the warm sleeper over the cooler sleeper. That said, unless you’re heading into the alpine regions of Oz in late autumn or during the big thaw of early spring, the bag will keep you snug.

The final word on the Roman Palm Passport

Roman is on a roll at the moment (see our Roman Cradle 2-Person Hiking Tent review, here) and the Palm Passport keeps that momentum going, delivering an affordable compact synthetic sleeping bag for those who venture out in cool temperatures. In short, it is the epitome of what a three-season sleeping bag is meant to be. 

RRP: $209 See OZtrail for more info on this and other Roman products.

The post Roman Palm Passport sleeping bag: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

A car-camping based mat needs to combine a decent (read: relatively compact) packed size with comfort; go too thin and light and you’ll feel all the bumps underneath, go too thick/big and you won’t fit all your family’s camping gear in the car. To this end, we spent a few weekends dossing down in the outdoors to see if the Comfort 10 offers the (comfortable) solution to your sleep system problem. (For our extensive guide to outdoor sleep systems, see here.)

Design

The Mountain Designs Comfort 10 hits the mark for nailing the balance between comfort, warmth portability and affordability. At $199 this self-inflating mattress is well priced for the car camper who prefers not to dent their back, or the bank, on an ultra-light sleeping pad however would also rather not kick the kids out to fit their bedding in. As the name implies, the Comfort 10 is 10 centimetres deep when inflated, thick enough to keep hips and shoulders off the ground whilst not too thick to become overly bulky when packed away.

The anti-fungal foam inner self-inflates rapidly thanks to dual reversible oversized valves and provides the right level of ‘squishiness’ (tech term) and an R value of 8.5 for a warm and comfortable night’s sleep. The 30-denier (D) stretch top fabric is smooth on the bum cheeks for those sweltering nights, but hard wearing enough to handle kids shoe scuffs. At 3.2kg and 83cm long x 22cm circumference when rolled, this tidy package will stuff nicely into a standard car boot with room to spare for tent, sleeping bag, chairs and Esky. Inflating to 198cm in length x 76cm wide, a couple of Comfort 10s will fit inside the average three-person tent (we all know they’re two ‘real-person’ tents) and also deliver a lengthy enough mattress for a 6ft-plus snorer like myself.

In the field

On paper the Mountain Designs Comfort 10 appears at the pointy end of the field for self-inflating mattresses in the warmth for weight battle, a standout at its $200 Club price. In the field the Comfort 10 proves its mettle. Packed size is compact for a 10cm mat and at 3.2kg it’s lighter than most, which just makes everything that little bit easier when manipulating the chaos of the car. Like all 10cm self-inflators it takes a while to inflate, and so if you’re in a hurry to setup camp or hit the beach then a sneaky battery powered inflator helps.

Fortunately, the Comfort 10 has a trick up its sleeve in the form of dual reversible valves that allowed us to simply flip the valve for either inflation or deflation in seconds. Once inflated, the mattress firmness is adjusted easily by adding or removing air. We tested the mattress on a balmy evening, and it performed brilliantly but we look forward to testing the R value of 8.5 in winter; being one of the warmest 10cm mats on the market we expect it to excel.

The final word on the Mountain Designs Comfort 10

A great all round sleeping mat, the Mountain Designs Comfort 10 ticks most of our boxes for car camping comfort with the bonus that it doubles as a stow-able emergency mattress for ya mountain-biking buddy when they’ve rehydrated with one too many post-ride beers at the local craft brewery around the corner from yours.

RRP: $300 ($200 Alliance Club member pricing). See Mountain Designs for more info on this and other MD products.

The post Mountain Designs Comfort 10 mat: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Mountain Designs Geo 2P is a no-nonsense lightweight three-season hiking tent that does what it says it will do, and then some. The 45cm x 16.5cm packed size is right on the money for a compact two-person tent and if you’re the half-a-toothbrush and dehydrated food kind of camper, the 2.6kg bundle can be stripped back to a 2.41kg fighting weight (with six pegs). A steep-walled, three-pole geodesic design, coupled with a 112cm roof height, makes for plenty of room to sit up and move around. Add in a spacious 2.79m2, 215cm L x 130cm internal floor that fits two full-length sleeping pads with ease, and you’ve got a comfortable outdoor home away from home. 

The two-doored design offers occupants easy access and matching dual vestibules deliver a total 1.61m2 of covered external space for backpacks and boots if the weather turns nasty. Two full-length 8.5mm aluminium poles offer a double-crossover design, and when combined with a tensioned half-length 8.5mm roof pole, this delivers solid three-season performance. 

The inner’s fully taped, bathtub design, 75-denier (D) PU-coated polyester floor delivers a hefty 5000mm (hydrostatic-head – HH) of waterproofing and the right balance of durability and weight. The 40D nylon walls with mosquito-proof mesh deliver a good compromise of weather protection versus ventilation for balmy summer nights while a quick release silicon-coated full-coverage 40D ripstop nylon flysheet (with a 3000mm HH rating) is easily fitted for inclement conditions. Packed away, the tent is contained in a tidy reinforced top-loading compressible stuff sack delivering a highly compact and stowable package.

Related: Boots ’n’ all! Five amazing multi-day hikes in Australia and New Zealand

In the field

It’s hard to find anything glaringly wrong with the Mountain Designs Geo 2P, and that’s a good thing. The reasonably compact design and resilient materials lend themselves to a harsh Australian environment whilst the solid waterproofness and robust design deliver more than adequate weatherproofness for a three-season tent. The steep walls are a nice bonus and coupled with ample floor space, the Geo happily fits my 90kg, 188cm frame. I’m always a fan of double-doored tents and the Geo goes one better by delivering dual-zipped, bottom opening doors with a stash pocket to avoid the door ever falling to the mud. 

As with many tents of similar design, the vestibule space can feel quite small but larger vestibules mean more material, and thus more weight. The age-old dual-walled geodesic, pole and sleeve design works exactly as it should and doesn’t over-complicate things.

A mid-2kg two-person tent might be considered a little ‘weighty’ in this category, and for the weight-weenies there are far lighter (and more expensive) options in the market. It would be nice to see some colour coding on the flysheet to aid speedy setup and the roof-pole tabs are a bit fiddly, but these are minor annoyances in an otherwise positive package.

The final word on the Mountain Designs Geo 2P

Mountain Designs has been on a roll with its hiking tent range lately (read our review of its Redline 1P hiking tent here). With the Mountain Designs Geo 2P it has done it again, producing a great mid-priced all-round hiking tent for two. With its fast setup, sound design and robust materials, it is difficult to fault the tent in any particular area. With a $350 price-tag (see below re Alliance Club pricing) you’d be hard pushed to find a better value-for-money shelter in the three-season, two-person hiking tent market segment.

RRP $570 ($350 for Mountain Designs Alliance Club members. Membership is free.)

The post Mountain Designs Geo 2P Tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design of the Mountain Designs Redline 1P tent

The three-season rated Mountain Designs Redline 1P presents: its 930mm width (at the head; 570mm at the foot), 2250mm length and 950mm height put it at the ‘roomier’ end of the one-person tent spectrum. The vestibule space is a generous 0.58m2, too, while packed size is a compact 500mm x 125mm x 125mm. It weighs a respectable 1.52kg (with the minimum eight required pegs). 

These dimensions are ‘usable’; even though it is a tapered shape, the tent has steep walls and enough wiggle-room to be comfortable. The hubbed pole setup is well known these days in tent design, and it works effectively here. The high-tub floor and seam-taped outer fly – with a high 4000mm hydrostatic head (HH) waterproof rating – ensure water ingress is not an issue.

Related: New gear alert! Hot new outdoor kit from Mountain Designs

There are peg points on its base, along with additional guy ropes to ensure a taut fly and in case of wilder, windier conditions. Add in a high-set vent, two gear pouches, a handy mesh shelf for the roof, YKK zips and you’ve got a solo tent that is the embodiment of common-sense shelter design.

In the field

The tent arrived a little over a month ago, for our initial review in Issue 8 of Aus Geo ADVENTURE, so at that point we’d only had it out for two hiking weekends. During this time, though, the tent has performed as designed, with an easy and fast setup, and enough room for a solo adventurer and their gear. It is quick to set up, thanks to that single hubbed-pole system. The fly clips on just as quickly; in five minutes you’re done. The freestanding design has been handy as we’ve had to move it around once or twice (especially on one windy night, to ensure its narrow end faced the wind), and the mesh areas and vent came in handy on one particularly humid night. The Redline 1P simply works. 

Since that initial print review last month, testers have snuck away for another long weekend of hiking and report that the Redline 1P has continued in that same “simply works” vein. All of those who have used it have said how quick – and straightforward – it is to set up. The other standout for testers has been how, for its diminutive footprint, the tent has quite a bit of interior space. One night of rain on this last test weekend also put the outer fly to the test and, as expected, it performed with aplomb.

The D-shaped door is just adequate enough in terms of ease of ingress/egress; we’d love to see it a bit larger and those over 180cm will agree. Having said that it’s not a chore getting in and out. We managed to store our 55L pack inside the vestibule and had a bit of space for hiking boots and poles, too. That 950mm interior height (at the head end) was enough to be able to sit up without having to bend your neck/head, but we’d love to see that height extend further along the tent. 

The final word on the Mountain Designs Redline 1P tent

Mountain Designs has come up with a great all-rounder solo shelter. Its three-season rating, the adequate interior space, and the straightforward design and construction combine to make it an ideal shelter option for soloists. We intend keeping the tent for another few months of testing, into the middle of summer, so look to a long-term report online in February.

For now, we can say that, for the asking price (especially if you become a MD Club Member – it is free, and a no-brainer) it represents good value and really impresses with its ease of use in the field. 

RRP: $250 (Note: MD Club Member price is $180) See Mountain Designs for its complete range of hiking tents.

The post Mountain Designs Redline 1-Person Tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The unboxing of a Norco Torrent S1 HT is a sight to behold… not because of all the latest fandangle tech or lightweight carbon pieces you might expect from one of Canada’s top MTB manufacturers, but rather because of the pure delight and simplicity of a dual-triangle double-butted chromoly steel frame, coupled with premium components and oversized 29” wheels. In fact, one could be mistaken for thinking such a clean frame with external cable routing belongs in a time capsule, until closer examination reveals reinforcing at weld joints, or the hard hitting 150mm RockShox Lyrik Ultimate RC2 fork. This is all packaged in the geometry ‘sweet spot’ for an aggressive all-mountain oriented mountain bike.

Norco’s Torrent S1 is designed for those who prefer not to spend Sundays servicing a multi-chamber rear shock, but would rather revisit the ol’ days of bombing down a hill on a burly steel framed, gravity-oriented hardtail beast. The Torrent delivers a quality spec’d, steel framed trail weapon that goes up with ease and down with gusto. Adorned with 800mm riser bars, a hefty 150mm RockShox Lyrik Ultimate RC2 fork and four-piston Shimano MT520 stoppers, the Torrent is very much targeted at all-mountain fun and downhill antics. 

An oversized cockpit delivers plenty of room to play, whilst short chainstays let the bigger 29” wheels excel in tighter stuff where a bike its size shouldn’t. Throw in a mix of Shimano SLX and XT components along with a 170mm dropper post and you’ve got a solid hardtail rig that should be able to handle just about anything you can dish up. To see if the ‘old’ can really mix with the ‘new’, we took the Norco Torrent HT S1 out to our local trails to see how it would handle square-edged sandstone, loose off-camber corners, rock slabs and even a few berms, drops and jumps. Is this really the all-rounder we’ve been waiting for and is it worth the hefty price tag it comes with?

In the field

Immediately out of the gates the Torrent was a pleasure to ride. A spacious cockpit is a blessing in a world of steep seat angles and slack head angles and allowed my 188cm frame to stretch out on the firetrail climb to our singletrack. Don’t get me wrong, Norco is no stranger to the craze of ‘steeper rear and slacker front’ and the Torrent is no exception. A 76-degree seat tube angle coupled with a slack 64-degree head angle of our large frame proved the Torrent S1 is not built on old-school geometry, however the Torrent’s long 641mm top tube and lengthy 50mm stem alleviate ‘the hunch’ and when combined with a tall 646mm stack height, 430mm seatpost and 170mm X-Fusion Manic Dropper, the cockpit felt super roomy. So much so, in fact, our large frame’s 480mm reach may deliver too much stretch for those shorter in stature, who might benefit from selecting a size down from their usual frame size. 

On the way to the trailhead, my return to a steel hardtail frame was a joyful revisiting of a time when each turn of a crank could be felt instantly in the tyres on the ground. As soon as we hit the trail, it was evident that the lack of ‘power-sapping’ rear suspension, coupled with a steep seat angle and lengthy 175mm cranks meant pedal power translating directly to forward momentum. The bottom bracket offered plenty of obstacle clearance but the longer cranks did mean the occasional pedal strike. When the trails turned narrow and rocky on the climb, that effective delivery of power, coupled with a Maxxis Dissector 2.4” EXO rear tyre and Maxxis Assegai 2.5” EXO front allowed for plenty of traction. The hefty 29” tyres stretch out to a 1243mm wheelbase and so took some getting used to, especially in tighter stuff, but once again the short chainstays allowed the rear to follow the nose better than expected. Once ‘up top’ and moving from loose firetrail to sandstone slab and rocky outcrops, the steel frame bounced and jittered a little, showcasing an obvious disadvantage over my regular dual suspension rig, but there was a degree of compliance the steel delivered, much more than to be expected from an aluminium counterpart.

It is on pointing the Torrent downhill that the fun begins. There’s no getting around it, the Torrent is a big bike, and I certainly wouldn’t call it nimble, but funnily enough it is a joy to descend and doesn’t feel like a bulldozer either… it seems more a ‘carver’ than a ‘flicker’ but, being a hardtail, it kicked predictably off any rock or jump. The key to the Torrent’s performance is in part due to the short 42mm fork offset that directs the nose where it is supposed to go, and, once again, in the short chainstays that allows the rear wheel to hug a line. Stans Flow S1 29” rims laced to XT hubs offered a smooth roll, and a willingness to hold onto low-pressure tubeless rubber when the going got tough, while the Maxxis rubber found a sweet spot for ‘rollability’ but delivered excess grip on the loose stuff. The bike was grounded through the berms and in the dry we found it excelled more than expected on loose descents and technical rock-slabs where a dually would previously have been the bike of choice. 

The big-hitting reliability of the 150mm Lyric fork meant the Torrent was forgiving over those ever-present waist-high ‘huck-to-flat’ rocks of our Sydney test trail, and the rear-end made it easy to shift weight to pop the front when needed. Shimano’s four-piston BR-MT520-hydraulic disc brakes paired with a large 203mm front rotor and 180mm rear worked adequately for slowing the bike out of the flowy stuff and delivering the rider at slow speed into tech segments where the 170mm dropper delivered rapid response and plenty of travel to get out of the way. What the Torrent lacked in nimbleness and finesse it made up for in flow and confidence. The only foreseeable issue arising from the Torrent sitting in my stable is the return of more confidence than competence that invariably sees me ending up in the trees… but maybe it’s worth it.

The final word on the Norco Torrent HT S1

The Norco Torrent HT S1 doesn’t try to be something it is not – it is unapologetically a ‘bruiser’. What Norco has done, however, is bring the latest in tech and geometry to the party for a grounded and playful all-rounder that can be thrown at just about anything. Whilst the cable routing could be cleaner, and a consideration of how to shave a few grams from the build would be great, all in all the Norco Torrent S1 HT is a solid all-round hardtail with my only gripe being price.

At $4.5k I’d like to see better components, both to shave grams and deliver better value for money, but in the world of post pandemic back-orders I suspect a price drop won’t be on the cards anytime soon.

RRP: $4499 See Norco for more info.

The post Norco Torrent S1 HT : Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

Backpacks designed for multi-day climbs are the pinnacle of compromise. They have to be lightweight but have to be ‘heavy’ enough to carry some big loads – and they also have to be robust; dragging, dropping and scraping through sharp, unforgiving, mostly rocky or icy terrain means the multi-day climbing pack can exhibit no fragility in its fabrics or design. For this tester, having been on a number of multi-day climbs and treks, it is this outright bombproof-ness (nah, I dunno if that’s a real word, either, but it’ll do) that has led me to, in nearly all circumstances, opt for a climb pack over one that is designed purely for trekking. Hence, that was my main reason for choosing the Alpha AR 55, accompanied by numerous lesser, but still important, others…

The Alpha AR 55 (AR stands for “All Round”) weighs in at a svelte 1.36kg and is of a relatively minimalist design that incorporates some unique key features, reflecting the decades of experience Arc’teryx has in designing gear for extreme environments. The pack includes a removable frame-sheet and lid; primarily designed for that summit push, I found this very handy for a day walk from our campsite in Tombstone, where I could strip the pack down but still lug enough food, water and extra layers. There is a WaterTight™ full-length side-zip which did, indeed, prove itself a reliable barrier to moisture on one rainy day (the pack lid also has the same zip set-up), a unique pull-to-open/pull-to-close drawcord that is quick and allows easy access to the main compartment, six lash-points that combine with a large bungee-cord section at the back of the pack, and padded shoulder straps and hip-belt. There’s also a main strap running vertically to secure ropes under the lid, and a hydration bladder sleeve inside (as well as a side pocket that’ll fit a large water bottle). In short, most things you need and no superfluous accoutrements. 

One of the pack’s unique features is its buckle design. Rather than the usual clip-style buckle, these are a hook-and-loop style. These look to be actually more up to rough treatment than a regular clip setup, but they are smaller than what you’d expect, making them less ‘easy’ to use when wearing gloves. Having said that, during testing, there were no issues with their function. The outer fabric is a very hard-wearing Liquid Crystal Polymer (dubbed “Hadron”) with a ripstop grid through it. For a climb-oriented pack, the Alpha AR 55 is what you could call slightly rotund (for want of a better word) in terms of its shape, compared to the more typical narrow base found on packs for the vertically inclined, but not too wide as to offset your balance when climbing, etc.

In the field with the Arc’teryx Alpha AR 55

For a climbing pack, the Alpha 55 makes a reliable, no-frills trekking pack, too. Impressively – and probably thanks to that ‘rotund’ shape – it swallowed a ton of gear for the trek, including the huge bear barrel I had to take by law in Tombstone Territorial Park, along with all my clothing, my share of the food, trekking poles, a two-person tent, a water bladder (and extra water bottle) and camera gear. 

Weight-wise, I was probably carrying around 16kg. This weight was noticeable but not overly so. Initially, I was concerned about the minimalist shoulder straps and waist-belt not providing enough support and comfort, but this proved not to be the case, generally. The only thing I would’ve liked was for the waist-belt to have a flex-point; both sides of it are stitched to the pack, so there is minimal swivel on offer, which resulted in a slightly inhibited walking style for the first day until my body adapted. For climbers this may or may not be more of an issue; when scrambling up a mountain, the ability of a pack to move with its wearer is an essential. 

Besides the aforementioned small-ish buckles and their hook-and-loop style (again, after a few goes it became second-nature), there was little that didn’t ‘work’ straight away with the pack, reflecting the experience Arc’teryx has in designing functional and tough outdoor gear. The full-length side-zip access is a boon for climbers who carry their ropes looped through the top of their packs. Surprisingly, I also came to appreciate it when trekking; being able to zip it down and reach to the lower pack sections for an extra layer quickly was very handy. 

The final word on the Arc’teryx AR 55

For alpine and rock climbers who spend days in the field, the Arc’teryx Alpha AR 55 offers all they will need (indeed, we intend hanging on to the pack for just this purpose and will post a long-term online review here a later date). It is designed to withstand serious punishment, while offering the essential functionality that a remote climbing expedition requires. This makes it a viable option for anyone who both treks and climbs, as it – again – has all the features you need (and none you don’t) for a week-long trek. 

Arc’teryx gear is never cheap, but it is this versatility, when added to its light weight, tough construction and clever overall design, that alleviate the sting of the Alpha AR 55’s asking price somewhat to what we reckon is decent value for money.

RRP: $400 See Arc’teryx Australia for more.

The post Arc’teryx Alpha AR 55: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design of the OZtrail Fast Frame BlockOut 10P

OZtrail’s Fast Frame series of tents has been around for a while now and earned plenty of kudos. The Fast Frame design is one that makes setting up a large tent a quick and easy process. This model incorporates the hubbed frame of others in the series and it works brilliantly. A series of connected steel poles, hubs and hinges, with sliding lock-out sections, are connected to the tent inner. All the connection points are clips and are large and robust. The design lives up to its name: setting up the tent is definitely fast; working from the centre, you extend and lock out the sections, working from the frame’s inner section to its outer, then lift it up and it all locks in after you slide the last few pole sections into place. They all lock with metal pins and the structure is very stable. 

The two main bedrooms are on opposite ends of the tent, with the communal space in the middle able to double as the third bedroom if you’ve got a full clan gathering going on (there are zipped ‘doors’ on both end bedrooms). The tent measures 6 metres (m) in length and 2.2m in depth, with a tent height of 2m meaning there’s plenty of headroom for all but the tallest adults. The entry door, however, is lower than that, and does require a slight duck of the head if you’re 1.8m and above. Once inside, though, that aforementioned external height ensures plenty of room. The floor is seam-sealed and made from poly-oxford nylon. The tent weighs in at a claimed 33kg, and you feel it when lugging it to the tent site, but it is comparable to other brands’ tents of similar capacity. A nice touch is the oversized tent bag – there’s plenty of extra room in this; as everyone knows, a tent never goes back in its bag as small as when you first get it out!

Aiding that sense of copious space is the inner tent’s ventilation and windows for plenty of light. In short, there are loads of venting points from mesh inserts in the inner’s roof, to the low zipped mesh inserts along the bottom of the inner walls. This is all part of OZtrail’s ClimaTech ventilation tech. The tent’s side doors/windows and front and rear door also have large, zipped mesh areas. Enhancing ventilation is the decent gap between the tent inner and the outer fly, meaning condensation is kept to a minimum. There is plenty of storage space inside, as well as covered access vents for power leads and heater/aircon setup.

The outer fly is ripstop polyester with a 3000mm HH (Hydrostatic Head) waterproof rating and is easily attached to the inner tent thanks to colour coded (and oversized) clips. The fly also features OZtrail’s BlockOut (black) coating on its inner side, to reduce in-tent temperatures; OZtrail claims it blocks up to 95 per cent of the light from outside which helps keep temps down. The final party trick of this tent is its awning(s). You can open an awning over the front entrance or you can open up a full-length awning that shades the whole front of tent. The three separate awnings zip together to do this. There are even side panels with the BlockOut treatment. 

In the field

At a claimed weight of 33kg, lugging this big bopper to your tent site will be your workout for the day. We’d recommend it as a two-person job (the carry bag has robust handles on each end) but once at the site, it gets easier. The Fast Frame system seems complicated but setting it up is a doddle, once you follow the procedure of locking in the inner frame sections first, then moving out to the sides. All of the hubs and hinges – plus the locking pins – are robustly built so there looks to be little worry about long-term durability. As with any big tent, the inner is always quicker to set up, but we were also surprised by how quick the fly was to attach. It is big but, again, with two adults and noting the colour-coded clips, it’s all done in five minutes.  

If you wish to set up the awning in whichever configuration suits, be aware that the poles you use are of different heights. When we set up the full-length awning, we made sure the taller poles were on the inside and shorter ones were on the outside edge. This assists water rolling off when in rainy conditions. We should note that the front awning angles up from where it is attached to the tent, which would mean water rolling back to the seam that attaches the awning to the fly. Having said that, the awning(s) are more for shade than rain protection – and in that, they do an excellent job; there’s a surprising amount of shade area under the awning when it’s fully set up. 

Packing down the 10P Fast Frame takes a little longer, but it is not difficult; once you have the fly off and rolled up, you just need to reverse the fast-frame system’s set-up process. The last bit can be a bit of fun, as you have to gather all the inner tent (and outer poles) around the cluster of shortened centre poles and tie it up with the two supplied straps. Again, two people make it quicker.  

You’re looking at 15 to 20 minutes (max) for packing up, considering pegs, awning poles and guy ropes being collected and packed in bags. It fits easily into that carry bag – something any family camper with a history of undersized, torn carry bags will love. It does take up a fair amount of storage space – my Land Rover’s large cargo area looked distinctly less so once this tent was in there – but its packed size is no different to other tents of this capacity. 

The final word on the OZtrail Fast Frame BlockOut 10P

When we first received the OZtrail Fast Frame BlockOut tent, we wondered who would want – or need – a 10-person version. But, of course, there are plenty of families who will need a tent this big, and thanks to the clever design, it is in no way a daunting prospect. Years ago, a tent of this capacity would be considered only for those who camp in one spot for a week at a minimum, owing to the fact it would have taken an hour or so to set up. 

This tent’s easy set-up process, impressive ventilation, versatile awning, and overall construction, totally changed our thinking on large family tents: it could easily be used for trips where you camp somewhere different each night. Sure, it takes up a chunk of your vehicle’s storage space – and, at 33kg, it ain’t light – but these are more than balanced out by a clever design, very good build quality, and convenience of set-up. For those looking for that ‘big’ family tent, the OZtrail 10P Fast Frame BlockOut tent is a worthy option. Bigger, in this case, is definitely better.

RRP: $600 (currently on special) See OZtrail for more info on its extensive range of tents and outdoor gear.

The post OZtrail Fast Frame BlockOut 10-Person Tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The iconic Canadian outdoor brand is renowned for top-notch gear that combines innovative design with functionality and durability. The Cerium LT Hoody epitomises that ethos, including plenty of innovation into what is, at the core level, a relatively straightforward piece of outdoor apparel. After all, down jackets haven’t changed all that much over the decades; Arc’teryx has, instead, been smart in the creation of the Cerium LT Hoody. 

The jacket features the company’s clever Down Composite Mapping technology. This is where designers have placed Coreloft synthetic insulation in areas of the jacket that are more prone to moisture, whether in the form of sweat and/or rain. So, think the jacket hood, the armpits, the hem and you can see how that would benefit wearer comfort. The 850-fill down offers loads of warmth, and the hood is insulated as well. The outer nylon shell (Arato 10 nylon) utilises a DWR (Durable Water Repellency) treatment for additional moisture resistance (note, it’s not fully waterproof), and the elastic cuffs keep wind out, too. 

The jacket’s trim cut combines with all this warming tech to result in a very light jacket, at just 305 grams. The Cerium LT Hoody also offers articulated construction for easy movement, and plenty of length (ideal for those with longer torsos). When packed in its store-sack it takes up about the equivalent of a 500ml water bottle.

In the field

The three days in Tombstone Territorial Park were a mix of sun, clouds, rain and plenty of chilly wind, with an evening and night of below-zero temperatures. The Cerium LT Hoody was perfect for these conditions when combined with a merino base-layer. For anything short of snow/blizzard conditions in Australia, the Cerium LT Hoody (when worn with base- and mid-layer) should keep you warm. It certainly did for this tester. 

The two pockets are large enough to store a beanie, gloves or other items, while the longer-than-standard length meant no cold wind crept in to chill my lower back when I was bent over or lifting something above my head. The hood can be cinched down tight, too, without inhibiting vision. The only thing I was always careful with was the small front zip. To me, it could be made larger for those with big hands or when wearing gloves. Arc’teryx claims the Cerium LT Hoody is breathable as well – and it is (to a degree), keeping it relatively comfortable in mid-effort activities, such as ascending on a trek. You wouldn’t wear it trail running, of course… 

The final word on the Arc’teryx Cerium LT Hoody

The Arc’teryx Cerium LT Hoody offers great performance in terms of its warmth, light weight and compact packed size. The materials used are high quality and the fit and finish is excellent. There’s little to mention in regards to any negatives in terms of overall performance. However, you will need to get your head around the lofty (excuse the pun) price. It’d be easy to say high performance doesn’t come cheap – and that’s true in this case – but you’d have to be sure that you need apparel of this quality and will be outdoors, regularly, using it for what it is designed. For those who fit that description, the Arc’teryx Cerium LT Hoody offers all the warmth, reliability and assurance of long-term performance you can ask for. It might just be time to start saving…  

RRP: $580 See Arc’teryx for more info.

The post Arc’teryx Cerium LT Hoody: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Yakima StageTwo hits the scales at 30kg, but to accommodate the heft of e-MTBs, it simply has to be stronger, and thus heavier. The StageTwo nails it, with its hitch assembly and backbone area constructed of robust steel, the clamp support arms tubular steel, and the bike trays are aluminium.

Other innovative features include the locking SpeedKnob 2.0 for fitment to a two-inch hitch. The StageTwo tilts forwards, via the remote tilt lever, to allow access to the rear of your vehicle, plus it can be folded up when not in use. The StageTwo can fit 16- to 29-inch wheel sizes and tyres up to 3.25-inch (up to 5-inch with optional Fat Bike Kit). It can fit a wheelbase of up to 1320mm.

The rack is suited to off-road travel (its base angles upward for clearance), with a rating of 16.3kg/bike (two-bike capacity) in this scenario. Another nifty design element is the tiered individual bike trays that allow for more ‘fitting space’, and the fact you can offset the trays, again to ensure you can secure two bikes more effectively. As per all Yakima bike racks, the StageTwo also includes a bottle-opener and integrated locks (for bikes and for rack to vehicle). It is available in two colours: Anthracite (dark) and the cream/sand Vapor. There’s also the StageTwo+2 Add-On accessory, that attaches to the main unit and allows you to carry four bikes.

In the field

At 30kg the StageTwo is no lightweight, and lifting it up to the hitch is the most difficult part of the attachment process. However, once the rack is slid into the hitch, it is straightforward; the safety pin is secured, then you tighten the anti-wobble wedge via the SpeedKnob 2.0 (this is a great improvement on the previous-geo SpeedKnob).

Bikes are easy to load. Simply pull the large lever to lower the rack, lift out the clamp arms, lift the bike on to its tray (you can lower the StageTwo below horizontal for easier loading/lifting), load the front wheel into the nice, large cradle, then secure the clamp arm on the front wheel. Then, secure the rear wheel via the ratchet strap (which slides, to adjust for wheelbase length).

The final word on the Yakima StageTwo

The Yakima StageTwo does an excellent job of transporting all bike types, safely and securely. The weight of the thing is impossible to ignore, and the asking price is definitely up there, too, but you get plenty of (hefty) bang for your bucks, in terms of the robust construction and the simplicity of use. For reliable bike transport, it’s worth checking out.

RRP: $1099 See Yakima Australia for more info.

The post Yakima StageTwo: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

Weighing in at just 346 grams per shoe (women’s size 8) and with a slew of trail-running inspired features, The North Face VECTIV Exploris Mid is inarguably an ultra-modern take on a hiking boot. Slip your foot inside the shoe and the interior is plush with a nicely padded midsole, What makes it so? The hard-working OrthoLite footbed combined with a high-rebound, single-density EVA midsole (a man-made material that is considered foam). Together they make for a comfy and supportive stride and keep my feet safe from rocks, sticks and any spikey vegetation on the track. Also, the criss-cross and cross-ankle lacing system (aka Ghillie), padded tongue and mesh collar with moulded details hold my foot securely (I’m prone to an ankle roll, so this is something I always look for in a boot) without any pressure points. 

For me, the boot’s most distinctive physical feature is its shape – it curves up at the toes. The idea and science behind this is to encourage a rolling, forward motion and in turn maximise and maintain energy transfer. And it works; I was just as fresh-footed at the 10km mark on my day’s hike as I was at the outset. 

While comfort is always paramount on the trail, traction comes a close second and happily, it’s one of the VECTIV Exploris’ strengths. The Surface Control rubber outsoles bite into loose and rocky terrain and the 4mm lugs provided excellent grip or stickiness, even in the rocky and sandy conditions that we encountered in Bouddi NP. So much so that the boots were ideal when negotiating my sandy and sometimes sludgy rambling, from slippery rocks to boggy sand. 

In the field

The North Face VECTIV Exploris Mid offers excellent protection from track hindrances and hurdles. The upper is made of soft nubuck-leather, which has proven time and again throughout testing to be exceptionally hardwearing, while the reinforced heels and toes offer an extra dose of protection on rocky trails. Over the course of our 15km hike, my feet felt snug, and both well supported and protected. While there’s a range of other lightweight hikers that trump the VECTIV in weight, I’d argue the added protection is worth the weight deficit.

I ordered my boots online, which can be a bit hit and miss (but I already owned the VECTIV trail runners) and am happy to report my women’s 8s are true to size. I have a dropping arch in my right foot, which if not supported around the 10km mark sends a shooting pain into my toes, but to date I’ve not had any trouble with this. I also like a bit of breathing space around my ankle (maybe this is why I’m prone to rolling them?) so leave the top hook on the laces undone. That said, the lacing system allows for a secure fit and, for me, there are no pressure points. There’s also been no rubbing with these boots, but to be fair, I do wear a pair of good-quality hiking socks. 

The final word on The North Face VECTIV Exploris Mid

The VECTIV Exploris is exceptionally comfy and made for speedy hiking. I’ve spent just on four months testing out the boots, so I’d say it’s too early to draw any conclusions re long-term durability, but I’ve pushed them through mud and rain and rocks and sands and roads and countless kilometres, and all signs are that they’re holding up well. As mentioned earlier, the upper is made of soft-to-the-touch but hardy as nubuck leather, with beefed-up sections on the toe and heel for added protection, and a breathable-waterproof FUTURELIGHT membrane (and given all the rain we’ve had here in east coast Oz, I can report these boots are definitely watertight!). The lugs, too, are holding their own – there’s no obvious deterioration or uneven wear. 

The overall performance of this boot, along with the expected durability, makes them appealing from both a practical viewpoint and a budgetary one, so if you’re in the market for a new set of hiking boots, the VECTIV Exploris Mid boots are worth a look.

Update: After months of what seems like endless rain, my boots are muddied and bloodied (thanks leeches) but still the best thing since sliced bread when I’m heading out for a hike. Probably time I gave them a bit of a spit and polish!

RRP: $340 See The North Face for more info and loads more gear!

The post The North Face VECTIV Exploris Mid Boots: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

What didn’t make sense was the type of packraft to get as the designs are quite varied. In the end, they sit on a spectrum with super light and packable on one end to robust, heavy and less packable at the other. Each has its merit depending on your intended activity. 

The rivers I was eyeing off have rapids that range up to Grade 4. On an international rapid grading system of 1 to 6, 1 is small, easy waves and 6 is nearly impossible with a definite risk of life. Having built up my river skills and experience over many years of kayaking, Grade 3 is what I call fun. Grade 4 is difficult; it gets the adrenaline going and is a bit scary.  

To run these sorts of rivers and rapids, the boat I needed would have to be at the heavier, robust end. Made from tougher fabrics, the boat can be inflated to a higher pressure allowing better performance in challenging water and can take more of beating from the rough and tumble of more serious rapids. The downside would be a heavier load to hump down and up the typically steep valley sides.

Kokopelli is a highly regarded packraft company based out of Denver, Colorado, and the packraft I eventually selected – and have been using all summer – is the Kokopelli Recon self-bailing. These self-bailing models don’t have spraydecks. They are more like a traditional raft with drainage holes that let water out of the boat.

Through the wet La Nina summer, the Kokopelli Recon and I were put to the test on sections of the Shoalhaven, Wingecarribee, Wollindilly, Colo, Grose and even the Hacking river in my backyard in the Royal National Park. Oh, the places you can go with a packraft! 

Design

First impression out of the box is that the Recon is one tough unit. It’s built from commercial-grade 1000-denier (D) reinforced PVC (basically the same material as full-size rafts). It also has raft grade Leafield D7 valves which allow for high pressure inflation. The self-bailing design works by a combination of the inflatable floor and drain holes that allow water to automatically drain from the boat.

The raft comes standard with inflatable floor, supportive backrest, barrel pump, compression straps and a repair kit. If you intend to run rapids, I strongly recommend adding a set of thigh-straps to the purchase to keep you securely in the boat and allow for more precise paddling. The boat weighs 8.2 kg on its own. Add another 2.5kg for the inflatable floor, backband and thigh-straps.

A TiZip is an optional extra which I went for. This is an airtight zipper that allows you to open the pontoon and store your gear inside instead of lashing your pack on the front of the raft. It makes the boat more stable and balanced if carrying a bit of gear for a multiday trip. There are eight reinforced stainless steel D-rings for lashing your gear.

In the field

The first outing was a two-day trip on the Shoalhaven Rover from Horseshoe Bend to Badgery Spur. Seems obvious, but ensure you have a good pack when you have a decent hike in. I didn’t, but I’ve learned. While not as light and packable as other models, the raft can be rolled and compressed to the size of two large sleeping bags.

When overnighting, you’re going to have a lot of gear. Once you’ve packed paddling gear, it seems like there’s not much room left. Perhaps this is where bikepackers and packrafters intersect. Weight and packability of gear is closely scrutinised and anything vaguely luxurious is piffed. We were super-impressed with the TiZip and the internal packing space of the pontoons. It swallowed everything like the boot of an old Valiant. If you don’t have to hike, there is definitely room for luxuries!

On the water, you immediately notice the manoeuvrability. The boat feels light and turns quickly and you have a nice high vantage point with the inflatable seat. The first few rapids were fun as we effortlessly punched through small waves and holes. On the more serious and technical rapids, I realised I couldn’t always hold my planned lines. When the boat gets swamped, it becomes heavy and less agile. While it drains relatively quickly (approx. 20 seconds), on a long rapid that can be too long. There is definitely a case for the spraydeck option, but there’s also pluses to the open raft style, like having the ability to quickly jump out and scout a rapid. It’s also less intimidating to new paddlers who can feel ‘trapped’ with a spraydeck.

Over the course of the summer, I learnt the capabilities of the boat and of myself. There is no shame in portaging rapids that you just aren’t feeling confident to paddle. Packrafts flip a lot easier than kayaks and often when you least expect it. This keeps you humble!

The final word on the Kokopelli Recon self-bailing packraft

I am super stoked I took the plunge into packrafting. It opened my eyes to the ‘whole’ journey and a bigger outdoor experience – the hike in, time on a remote river, the stunning beauty of river valleys and gorges, an experience with friends who may never have taken up kayaking, and in some instances a solid hike out (if you like that kind of thing!).

The Kokopelli Recon self-bailing packraft has been excellent for the rivers and activities described and I am looking forward to many more water-borne adventures with it. The craft’s manoeuvrability, robust construction and well-thought design have given me confidence to go with its impressive capability. However, be sure to do your research and consider your own requirements as something else on the packraft spectrum may be more appropriate. Most importantly, buddy up with someone who knows river safety.

RRP: $1699 (with TiZip $1999) See Packraft for more info.

The post Kokopelli Recon self-bailing packraft: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

New Zealand-based brand, Aeroe, maintain it has designed a front-mounted cradle and rear rack that gives you multiple options for how you pack your bike. On top of this, the promise this system fits any bike and that it is simple to use to carry any gear. This is a new way to carry gear for me, with the Spider rear rack being attached to the rear stays. The rack then perfectly sits around your rear wheel, offering you multiple positioning options for your cradle and gear to sit. Previously, I’ve used a bikepacking bag that has been attached to the underside of my saddle and seat post. Although this design worked, I always felt the bag was moving side to side, and thinking back – it never truly felt secure. 

On first impressions, the Spider Rear Rack already looks like a big improvement, and has certainly taken away any insecurities with regards to holding and securing my gear. The advantage of this rack becomes clear when I start to pack the bike. Basically, it gives you options on where you want to place the cradles, so on top or on either side of your bike. The Spider Rear Rack comes with one cradle, so you will have to purchase more if you want to add bags to the rack. You also have to purchase the bags – there are two sizes: 8L and 12L). 

I’m already thinking I can carry a lot more with very little extra effort, which in turn equals longer trips and more exploring on the cards. One feature I did appreciate, was the fact I only needed a 5mm Allen key to loosen or tighten any of the racks or cradles. This makes it all so simple and very reassuring in case I needed to make any adjustments out in the wild.

Each cradle is made of a heavy-duty plastic and naturally curved so it starts to wrap around your gear once placed. Two adjustable cradle straps then clip together to firmly hold down any bag or tent. To complement this system, Aeroe has designed a number of waterproof dry bags. I run the smaller 8L bag which has built in eyelets for the cradle straps to feed through, giving extra security and peace of mind knowing I’m not going to lose anything.

The handlebar cradle and bag mimics the rear rack with the same adjustable strap to loosen and tighten once the cradle’s feet are in position. It could not have been simpler to put together and within 30 minutes, the bike is starting to look adventure-ready!

In the field

I tested the Aeroe Spider Rear Rack and Handlebar Cradle on an overnighter in the Blue Mountains. I took my gravel bike, which is my go-to ride when bikepacking. My drop handle bars are slightly flared, but I know the bar should be wider to accommodate not just this bag but any bikepacking bag. That said, the handlebar bag and cradle had a snug fit and gave me no issues on the trip.

Hands down, I cannot fault the Spider Rear Rack – its design is just solid. It naturally feels like an extension of your bike frame. On the trail, I had to look behind me a few times to make sure everything was still there and in place, as I felt no movement or unusual weight distribution from behind. There are little things you notice with this system that may not be so obvious when starting out.  For example, when I reached camp, it just felt so easy to unclip my dry bags, access what I need and walk away from the bike to set up camp. 

The final word on the Aero Spider Rear Rack and Handlebar Cradle

It’s easy to see why these racks are so good. For me they just shouted quality and adventure. There’s a robust strength running through the design, which means you don’t have to tip-toe around your bike checking and adjusting constantly. Personally, I’m now more excited about where this system will take me. My bucket list has a trip on it which covers the historic huts of the NSW and Victorian High Country on and flat-barred hardtail bike. These bags and racks will be the perfect riding partners.

RRP: $190 (Spider Rear Rack); $123 (Handlebar Cradle); $86 (8L HD dry bags)

The post Aeroe Spider Rear Rack and Handlebar Cradle: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The MSR WindBurner® Stove System Combo offers couples and groups a lightweight backcountry stove system suitable for both rapid water-boiling as well as cooking ‘real food’. Expanding on the success of the WindBurner® stoves, MSR has incorporated its highly efficient, wind-resistant radiant burner into a more sizeable cook set including a Fusion® ceramic-coated 2.5L pot and a 200mm Skillet Pan. The WindBurner® stoves use an inbuilt pressure regulator designed to maintain performance and simmer control.

In the field

In the field, the MSR WindBurner® Stove System Combo shines out of the box. The stove is secured within a 2.5L ceramic-coated pot, with a removable folding handle. The aluminium strainer lid locks in place via the folding handle and a standalone locking latch, whilst a 90mm (diameter) x 70mm (height), 227g IsoPro fuel canister fits neatly inside as well as the stove. A 200mm ceramic-coated aluminium skillet pan with removable folding handle fits neatly over the pot base, albeit with a lot of wiggle-room. For the weight-conscious, one handle can be used for both the pot and pan. When it comes to set-up, the unit is quick and easy. Remove the gas canister and stove from the pot, screw the gas to the regulator, extend the legs of the stove, place it on flat ground and ignite the stove. It is important to recognise that MSR WindBurner® stoves do not incorporate built-in igniters, and so you will need to pack a lighter/matches.

The heat exchanger on the 2.5L pot and Skillet Pan work brilliantly in all-weather conditions, with the stove boiling half a litre of water in just over three minutes. At high heat, and without a wind shield, the stove performs well, however a wind shield is necessary for low heat simmering in adverse weather to minimise gas flow interruption. The unit is limited in functionality below zero degrees Celsius, not due to any fault of the stove but limitations of Iso-Butane gas at low temps. For cooking at above zero, the WindBurner®’s ability to simmer is one of our favourite features and means you can opt for ‘real-food’ cooking. 

The final word on the MSR WindBurner® Combo Stove System

At 216mm x 160mm and weighing just over 800g for the full kit, the MSR WindBurner® Stove System Combo packs quite a punch. MSR has delivered an all-in-one system that offers pan, pot and simmering ability, even in adverse weather. The removable folding handles and single-handed straining operation are brilliant, but the locking latch can loosen over time. We’re not 100 per cent sold on inbuilt igniters, but they’re great when they work, and would be a nice addition. Both the pot and pan coating need protection from scratches; a couple of lightweight cloths will stop this. At nearly six hundred bucks, the WindBurner® Stove System Combo 2.5L is at the pricier end of the market but does deliver on a reliable modular stove system for small-group cooking on the trail.

RRP: $589.95 See Spelean for this and all other MSR stoves.

The post MSR WindBurner® Combo Stove System: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The ARB SkyDome II is made from 500gsm heavy-duty water- and rot-proofed canvas, with a 970gsm PVC base that also features a bathtub design (there are no seams on the floor and the PVC folds up 70mm above the ground before joining the canvas walls). Welded corners also aid in keeping water out. The SkyDome II includes large canvas flaps covering insect-mesh openings on the side and smaller ones at the foot and head of the swag. In addition, the SkyDome II adds another large mesh/canvas roof to the foot/leg area. These four ventilation points are brilliant and aid in protecting against condensation build-up inside the swag, as well as keeping insects out. 

The swag offers a claimed 1200 litres of internal volume, and the floor dimensions measure 2150mm long and 900mm wide. This is plenty for a single occupant (I measure 182cm and have oodles of space). Interior height is 800mm in the top half and 450mm down near your feet. The included 75mm high-density mattress (with removable/washable cover) is surprisingly supportive. Initially, I thought I would have needed a 100mm mattress, but the 75mm was more than enough for a good night’s sleep with plenty of cushioning. The 11mm aluminium poles are robust and a big step up from the fibreglass fare you find on other swags. At 10.5kg, the swag isn’t light – and it is relatively bulky when rolled up with a sleeping bag inside – but considering the fact it is so quick to set up (five minutes at the absolute most), it has a robust carry handle/strap, and the internal space and rugged construction, it’s a small price to pay. 

In the field

The SkyDome II was a boon on the Madigan Line traverse. It was easy to pack in the back of the Ranger Raptor 4WD ute we had on the trip, and it was just as easy to set up each evening (note to 4WD wagon owners that they do take up a bit of your vehicle’s interior cargo space, but you can always pack it on the roof-rack if need be). The three hoop poles and the two horizontal brace poles take (as mentioned) around five minutes and, thanks to its freestanding design, you are done and can grab that first campsite beer.

I took advantage of the ventilation at the head and foot and usually rolled up the protective canvas flaps on those, then unzipped the inner zip, to allow plenty of fresh air through the swag. There is plenty of space inside (again, as mentioned earlier) and getting in and out is easy – as is getting changed in the swag (for those who like a bit of privacy). Packing it up was just as straightforward: removing the poles and storing them in the supplied bag takes no time at all, then you just roll it up (with pole bag inside) and cinch it down with its straps. 

The worst feeling when inside a swag is the pitter-patter of rain on the canvas. It is essential to ‘treat’ the swag’s canvas before you use it by wetting it over a few times. This allows the stitching and canvas to expand and ‘close up’, thus providing a waterproof outer. Another impressive design feature is the rain gutter that surrounds each window/opening. This helps divert any water run-off that gets under the canvas flap away from the mesh window itself. We only had a small shower on the first night of the expedition so I didn’t have to fully test the effectiveness of the swag’s waterproof levels, but I also (and always have) had a lightweight tarp I could rig up to protect it if caught in a heavy downpour. It is during this type of weather that the swag’s opening is the only disadvantage; opening the flap to the heavens means that, if it was raining, you’d get some water in the swag interior. The swag’s PVC base keeps moisture away from the mattress and offers assurance in terms of the durability of the swag; I occasionally dragged it around on its base to get a flatter sleeping position and it coped just fine.

The final word on the ARB SkyDome II

The ARB SkyDome II is not cheap but, once you lay down your cash, you will have an outback/camping shelter that should last you decades, thus rewarding that financial outlay. The SkyDome II improves on the original SkyDome in all the right places – namely, in offering more ventilation – and ARB wisely stuck to the original for the rest of this new version’s design. Yes, the swag is bulky when packed, and a bit heavy (although lighter than most others in this market segment), but its excellent design, fast setup, and the fact it can cop plenty of rough treatment makes it a smart long-term purchase for outback adventurers looking for a bombproof shelter.

RRP: $495 (Aus East Coast Metro). See www.arb.com.au for this and all other ARB products.

The post ARB SkyDome II swag: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

On a recent Aus Geo assignment in the Simpson Desert, I needed to source a portable power pack as I was borrowing a vehicle for the trip, and it wasn’t fitted with an auxiliary battery. Aus Geo Adventure has previously tested a Companion Rover Lithium 70Ah Power Station, so I opted to bring its ‘little brother’, the Rover Lithium 40Ah Power Station, on this expedition. In short, by the end of the seven-day traverse of the northern Simpson Desert, I was seriously impressed: this ‘small’ power pack punched well above its weight in terms of overall performance.

Design

As its name suggests, this power pack uses a 40AH Lithium LiFePO4 battery (Lithium Ion Phosphate), producing a claimed 512Wh per charge. This battery type ensures the power pack uses close to 95 per cent of its capacity for 2000 charge/recharge cycles, and then continues to offer 80 per cent of its capacity for cycles after that amount. Charge time is a claimed eight to 10 hours. Yep, impressive. 

The unit is light, at only 6.3kg, and compact, measuring 270mm x 154mm x 242mm. That light weight and small size makes it ideal for pretty much any vehicle in terms of storage and it is easy to move around camp, if need be, as well. 

There are numerous outputs on the unit, including an Anderson-plug output (with a maximum 10Amp output), two USB, one USB-C, three different DC outputs (12V cig, 12V two-pin, and two DC5521 adaptors for LED strip lighting), a single input for charging via a DC, AC, or a solar power source (the unit’s MPPT management system means it can be charged via Companion’s excellent range of portable solar panels), and there’s even a 3W LED light, with three light output options (solid, fast strobe and slow strobe). The outputs can all be used at the same time. The LCD display shows the user how much power/time is left and is intuitive in operation. The Power Station has all the usual battery protection as well, including over- and undervoltage, over- and undertemperature, short-circuit and incorrect polarity.

In the field

The Rover Lithium 40Ah was used each day once we reached camp. During the day, the fridge/freezer was powered by the vehicle’s battery, but once we stopped for the night, we switched over to the Power Station immediately, plugging the fridge 12V cable into the Power Station that we located under the vehicle. 

Initially, I was concerned the ‘small’ (in comparison to its larger 70Ah stablemate) Lithium 40Ah would not have enough grunt for more than a night or two, due to the cold desert nights, and even allowing for my fridge/freezer having a nice low power-draw rate. Lithium batteries do not like cold conditions and lose charge quickly in these conditions. However, to my very pleasant surprise, the Rover Lithium 40Ah did not need a recharge until after night four, and once recharged (this did take a while, via the vehicle’s 12V outlet; we got to 40 per cent power after seven hours of driving) it completed its fridge-powering duties until the end of the traverse. Overall, its performance was excellent, especially considering the cold conditions.

The final word on the Rover Lithium 40Ah Power Station

Companion’s portable power pack offers great value, with straightforward operation, a robust build, and excellent performance, at a reasonable price for this market segment. The Rover Lithium 40Ah Power Station’s diminutive size belies its literal power and for those looking for a portable charging solution for their camping adventures, this unit is well worth a look. For those after more camp-side grunt, Companion’s Rover 70Ah Power Station is another option, albeit with a seriously hefty jump in asking price. 

RRP: $870 See Companion Outdoor for more info on the entire Rover Power Station range.

The post Companion Rover Lithium 40Ah Power Station: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The Vidda Pro Ventilated Trousers are the latest iteration of the Vidda Pro pants by Swedish outdoor manufacturer, Fjallraven. 

Fjallraven has been a staple of the Scandinavian outdoor scene since the 1960s, producing hard wearing, environmentally friendly products, from backpacks and sleeping bags to tents and jackets. The Vidda Pro Ventilated Trousers continue the company’s design tradition of comfortable and practical outdoor apparel made of only the highest quality and most environmentally sustainable material.

The Vidda Pro is a slim-fitting, durable, vented, water-resistant pair of trekking trousers with reinforced knees, a stretch-gusset, multiple pockets, and made from 65 per cent recycled-polyester and 35 per cent organic-cotton G-1000 Eco material. The fabric’s wind- and waterproofness can be further advanced with the application of Fjallraven’s Greenland Wax (a proprietary blend of beeswax and paraffin).

In the field

The Fjallraven Vidda Pro Ventilated Trousers are some of the most practical, comfortable, and durable trekking trousers on the market – and they look great. The extra belt tabs (in the right places) meant for a tailored waistline – and the form-fitting cut – allow the trousers to be worn to the coffee shop without feeling like a trespasser. Not only does the wearer benefit from a fitted style, but the pant comes in both a regular and long leg-length (an extra 50mm). 

The trousers are primarily made of Fjallraven’s super hard-wearing G-1000 Eco material, a recycled polyester and organic cotton blend, all with reinforced stitching where it counts. The new G-1000 Eco replaces Fjallraven’s popular G-1000, with an eco-friendlier fabric that uses more sustainable materials in place of raw materials. The crotch gusset however, benefits from a stretch fabric (63% polyamide, 26% polyester, 11% elastane) to aid elasticity for more adventurous activities than your everyday stroll.

Fjallraven’s philosophy on environmental sustainability has seen the company retain a practice of waxing material for increased weather-proofness and the Vidda Pro Ventilated Trousers follow the same principal. A simple application of Fjallraven’s Greenland Wax, ironed in, increases water resistance to allow water to bead and run off the material. Such treatment does reduce air-permeability of a fabric, so it is recommended primarily for areas of high element-exposure. The Vidda Pro Ventilated Trousers do, however, have increased warm-weather friendliness over the original Vidda Pro. Lateral hip-to-knee ventilation zippers deliver a simple solution to venting; just open the side of the pant to the elements and let the air in. The stretch material in the crotch gussets also aids in breathability.

The trousers feature six pockets, including map pocket, hand warmers, cargo pockets and a knife/multitool pocket with popper tab. The left hip also features an axe loop (I find this more useful for tethering ‘stuff’) and the pre-shaped reinforced knees are compatible with Fjallraven kneepads (which is more useful than you might think). The ankle hem is large enough to fit over a large boot but can be cinched with a popper-adjustable-hem whilst hidden boot lace-hooks stop the hems from rising. There’s not much to dislike about the Fjallraven Vidda Pro Trousers and they have become my favourite pair of everyday trousers for a multitude of outdoor activities.

The final word on the Fjallraven Vidda Pro Ventilated Trousers

If I had a shelf at home for ‘best in class’ apparel from tests and reviews over the past few years, my Vidda Pros would sit right up the top; they have become my go-to pants for everything from busting down to the café in the rain to trekking the high country or photographing action and adventure sports. They are bombproof enough for nearly any activity, comfortable to wear, and stylish enough to not feel like an interloper in the ‘Big Smoke’. Put simply, The Fjallraven Vidda Pro Ventilated Trousers are some of the best all-round outdoor pants that money can buy.

RRP: $309.95 See Fjallraven Australia for more info.

The post Fjallraven Vidda Pro Ventilated Trousers: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

For 50 odd years Osprey founder Mike Pfotenhauer has been developing bags and packs for everything from ski mountaineering and mountain biking to thru-hiking and global travel. Today, Osprey is revered as a leader in technical backpack design and the UNLTD AirScape® 68 Backpack stitches together decades of refinement into a universal high-tech pack that works just as well for ski touring as it does for multi-day hikes.

The UNLTD AirScape® 68 is supplied with either a men’s, or women’s specific harness, and hip belt, to ensure maximum efficiency and comfort for varying body shapes. The men’s design delivers a 3.31 kilogram, 72 litre, 87cm (H) x 40cm (W) x 39cm (D), L/XL pack, whilst the women’s specific design offers a 3.27kg, 68L, 82cm (H) x 40cm (W) x 39cm (D) S/M pack. Materials and design features are common across both styles.

Key to the comfort and usability of the Osprey UNLTD range is a newly developed harness design with three key areas of interest. Primarily, a 3D Printed Fitscape™ Lumbar panel incorporates Carbon DLS™ Technology to produce a latticework of varying density monofilaments. The result of these ‘tech terms’ is basically a bloody comfortable lumbar support on which the pack hinges, with the bonus of not absorbing water and being extremely durable. Secondary to the lumbar panel, a High Carbon Stainless Steel Frame and Polycarbonate Vacuum Formed frame sheet provides pack-rigidity whilst delivering a high degree of torso ventilation, a must for Aussie trekking. And thirdly, Osprey’s AutoLift System adjusts fit and harness length simultaneously, working in conjunction with a Fit-on-the-Fly® Hip belt to provide a super stable and snug fit.

With the high-tech harness ‘in the bag’ (excuse the pun), Osprey has gone to town on materials and features. A PFC-free 210-denier high-tenacity nylon/ultra-high-molecular-weight ripstop polyethylene coupled with 500-denier high-tenacity recycled nylon base and YKK buckles delivers a lightweight, yet solid and durable pack with super-high abrasion resistance. A durable water repellent finish (DWR) on face-fabrics, combined with well-considered storm flaps and water-resistant zippers on exposed closures provides impressive rain protection, but if it gets really wet, an integrated high-tenacity nylon ripstop rain cover is stashed in a zippered base pocket.

For multi-day excursions the UNLTD AirScape® 68 offers tech-features and pockets galore. The main pack offers top-loader and front panel access, internal compression divider, two large zippered front pockets, two elasticated mesh side bottle pockets with two-way access, a hydration reservoir pocket, an oversized hip-belt pocket, gear loops, removable sleeping pad straps and rain cover. For winter-sport enthusiasts variable-woven ski loops and tuck-away axe loops are a nice bonus, and Stow-On-The-Go pole attachment is key for both winter and summer use. The UNLTD AirScape® 68 also features a removable 8L top lid (with two pockets, extra gear loops and key tether) that converts into a fully functional 18L daypack. With the lid removed, a zip-away flap jacket covers the drawstring top-opening of the main-pack, allowing it to be used as a compact lidless pack. The removable daypack not only works well for short hikes, or even mountain bike side trips, but also doubles as a comfortable carry-on bag for airline travel where the UNLTD AirScape® 68 also tucks neatly into an included ‘Airporter travel cover’, with lockable zippers, to ensure even the most reckless baggage handlers can’t find an excuse to cut your straps or ‘loan’ your iPhone.

In the field

It wasn’t the trendy zip tabs, nor the exciting new harness that first grabbed my attention with Osprey’s new UNLTD AirScape® 68… it was the size. At 188cm tall, and only a few hamburgers shy of 90kg, I reckon 70L is right in the sweet spot for an all-round trekking pack. Any smaller and I can’t fit my size 12 down booties in the bottom of the pack cross-ways, and any larger and I am carrying a load of stuff I don’t need. To find a feature-rich, 70L pack is a dream, especially one that is usable for both summer and winter sports. 

Positive first impressions were reinforced when I threw some kit in the pack and went for a teaser-hike. Yes, I know, throwing a mere 15kg of kit inside is cheating, but I just wanted to get a feel for the new kid on the block, and most importantly see if all the trendy tech words like Fitscape™, AutoLift, Carbon DLS™, Fit-On-The-Fly® in fact translated to anything more than marketing hype… I am glad to say they did. Soon I was on a plane to Tassie, and then returning for use and abuse on the mainland.

There is no denying the UNLTD AirScape® 68 sits exceptionally well and is super-comfy, especially in the absence of a pimply teen spending hours adjusting unseen buckles in the local outdoor store, a common pack-fitting exercise with some other manufacturers. What stands out, in fact, is the ability to, “fit-on-the-fly”… Damn! Those marketing boffins are onto something. Although I did find the L/XL pack sat snuggly on the shoulders, even at the loosest setting, and so if you’ve a Thor-like build, you best check fit before purchasing.

With pack on or off, a basic adjustment of three straps customises hip belt and lumbar panel placement, harness length and pack height, shoulder straps and proximity of pack to back. All this and we’ve not even got to the good stuff.

The lid alone is full of fun. Sizable top pockets with weatherproof zips fit not only car keys on a sexy red key-tab, but also fit a Leatherman, a beanie, a First-Aid kit, an entire down jacket, and a pack of sour-squirms to boot, all with room to spare. Convert the lid to an 18L daypack and believe it or not, it is a reasonably comfortable usable pack… even with an adjustable sternum strap.

The zip-away flap jacket, when the lid is removed, means the pack can be reduced to a winter-sport oriented mini-mission pack, without the frustrating pack-whack-to-helmet-over-eyes common to taller-hooded packs.  In fact, reinforced ski loops and injection moulded zipper tabs (usable with gloved hands), prove designers didn’t just add token ice-axe loops for street cred.

The simple stuff wins the day with this pack as well. The enormous zippered front panel access allowing ample access to the body of the pack, oversized front pockets that fit a shell jacket, the rope stowage strap under the lid, hip-belt pocket that more than an iPhone-mini, mesh side pockets with two-way access so water bottles can be grabbed on-the-move… even the whistle on the sternum strap saves having to remember to pack one.

The final word on the Osprey UNLTD AirScape® 68

We well know everybody has a differing fit and need for their packs, and thus there is not “one pack to rule them all”. But Osprey has had a damned good go at delivering on as much as possible in its new UNLTD AirScape® 68, and if I was only allowed one pack ‘for everything’ at this moment, the AirScape® 68 might just be it.

RRP: $799.95 Available exclusively at Paddy Pallin stores

The post Osprey UNLTD AirScape® 68 backpack: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The StageTwo includes a tool-free locking SpeedKnob 2.0 for easy fitment to and removal from your two-inch hitch. The Stage Two also tilts forward, via the forward-facing tilt lever, to allow easy access to the rear of your vehicle. Yakima has also released the StageTwo +2 as an accessory. As the name implies, this attaches to the carrier to allow you to carry four bikes. 

Speaking of carrying bikes, the StageTwo can fit 16- to 29-inch wheel sizes and tyres up to 3.25-inch (and up to 5-inch with the Fat Bike Kit, sold separately). As well – and allowing for how long mountain bike wheelbases are getting these days – the rack can fit a wheelbase of up to 1320mm. The rack is also suited to off-road travel, with a rating of 16.3kg/bike (two-bike capacity).

For bike-mad families, the release of the StageTwo is great news, especially for those who have newer mountain bikes; older bike carrier designs are often too short to carry today’s two-wheeled behemoths, so Yakima has ensured even your longest enduro sled will fit on this rack. Add in the robust build quality, those nifty design features aimed at reducing the chance of bike-to-bike contact, along with the ease of fitment thanks to the SpeedKnob 2.0 and the StageTwo offers what we reckon is, even with its hefty asking price, a convincing bike-lugging package, backed by Yakima’s excellent limited lifetime warranty. Look for our upcoming review of this new bike rack from Yakima to see if our initial thoughts are borne out.

RRP: $1099 (StageTwo); $749 (StageTwo +2)

The post Yakima StageTwo: new bike rack revealed appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The key focus of the design of the Hesper is for lightweight adventures that can range from a few days to a month or more. The pack pares down what is essential in its design, and offers a single compartment that is, cleverly (and with reliability/durability in mind) accessed via a roll-top closure. Did we say clever? Well, the reason we do is that a roll-top closure offers the user an easy way to compress their load. So, if the pack isn’t full, they can roll down to take out ‘excess’ space and then close the compartment. This stops gear moving around in the pack, affecting load balance. The Hesper 52L and 40L, plus Harper 50L and 40L, offer this closure. The 30L has a zip closure. 

The Hesper 52L (along with the rest of the pack range) is made from UTS (ultra tear strength)-coated nylon – again, with long days on the tracks in mind – and adds stretch storage pockets and webbing loops, trek pole/ice axe attachments and hip belts (these are interchangeable, but in-store only, and one has a zipped pocket). The harness is Macpac’s new HeliumAir (the company’s lightest), while the base fabric is 100 per cent recycled 210D nylon. The pack is hydration bladder compatible.

The Hesper 52 is light (total weight is 1170g) but a design feature for those wanting to go lighter is the removable back-panel foam (use it as a seat), hip-belt and internal frame (this Hesper 52L has a removable lid; if you’re going to get rid of the internal frame, ditching the lid is recommended). Remove all this (390g) and you have a 780g load-lugger.

In the field

As an experienced multi-day hiker, I am always looking for that ‘one pack’ that combines light weight with a comfortable harness system and decent load capacity. The Hesper 52L offers a convincing case for that role (load capacity is 13-16kg). The harness system, in particular, is comfortable and supportive in use, while the stretch-
fabric back panel has been great for stowing a gear on a few forays. I have stripped the pack down, removing the ‘removable’ parts, and found it comfortable enough for a fast and light overnight camp, but I am actually happy with the weight of the ‘complete’ pack, anyway. The additional support of the internal frame and back panel make a difference to me, personally, but I can see the attraction in going total lightweight. All the straps and hooks are robust enough to make cinching the pack right down an easy task, too. 

The final word on the Macpac Hesper 52L

Macpac has been around long enough to know how to produce a top-notch backpack and its foray into the ultra-light pack realm looks to be a success. The Hesper 52L is not as light as some truly ‘ultra’ lightweight packs, but it balances an appealing base weight with a robust build quality and clever design touches. If there is a ‘negative’, it is only that there is not a larger-capacity model. A 75L version would make an excellent expedition pack. As it is, the Hesper 52L offers a very good balance of light weight and load carrying performance. 

RRP: $350 See Macpac for more info on this and the other packs in the Hesper range.

The post Macpac Hesper 52L backpack: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The North Face Duffel’s inherent simplicity of design exemplifies the saying that ‘basic is better’. I have owned this Large (90-litre) TNF duffel bag for over 12 years now; it’s my go-to gear-lugger for expeditions. 

I have packed in gear for strictly single-activity-only adventures, but also managed to stow MTB, climbing and hiking gear all in together for one multi-activity trip that ran over 10 days. It was impressive to see a climbing helmet, a MTB helmet, 65L backpack, other bike and climbing gear (including crampons) and the associated clothing jammed in this barrel-shaped bag. It’s also been slung over the back of yaks and horses for supported expeditions, as well as being tied on top of 4WD wagons and in the back of a ute for off-road adventures (and stayed dust-free inside). 

The North Face Duffel has been beaten, covered in dirt and grit, and pummelled in rainstorms, but always performed reliably. That toughness is thanks to the thick outer laminated nylon material, while the double stitching and extra bar tacks for the straps ensure it won’t fall apart when over-loaded.

There really isn’t much that can malfunction on the TNF duffel which is, ultimately, its appeal. The bag is available in a wide range of sizes, from an XS (25 litres) to a monster XXL (155L). There are stories of TNF duffels still in use after more than 30 years, so mine is a relative youngster, but one that I have little doubt will remain my go-to for a few decades yet. – Justin Walker

Leatherman Wave

After returning from an overland trip through China and the ’Stans of Central Asia, I put Leatherman’s 25-year No Questions Asked warranty to the test. I’ve long been a fan of Leatherman products and while I have a few multi-tools (three Leatherman units among them) the all-time favourite that is rarely off my hip is the Leatherman Wave. 

A couple of years ago they released the Leatherman Wave+, which is the same tool with the addition of replaceable wire cutting blades. I’ve had the older version for 12 years, using it for everything from cutting fencing wire, gutting rabbits, tightening loose screws, or filing a damaged locking pin. To say it has got me out of trouble on numerous occasions is understating it a bit.

What I’m always amazed at is the design, engineering and manufacturing involved and how well the tools works, even after 12 years of solid use. With 18 tools which can be opened and, importantly, locked easily, what I find nice about the Wave is how comfortable it fits into your hands when in use.

So, what happened to cause me to test the warranty claims?

Well, it’s a long story, but suffice to say I lost the primary knife blade to a police captain in China, while trying to board a train to Kashgar. Once home, I contacted Zen Imports (Leatherman distributor), and told them of my de-frocked Leatherman. Without any questions asked, they told me to send it to them and it would be repaired, free of charge. It’s as good as new, and I was impressed – as you will be, too, with this incredible multi-tool. – Ron Moon

myCOOLMAN 30L fridge/freezer

I’ve been using the myCOOLMAN 30L Fridge/Freezer a lot this past six months. This unit is great for keeping drinks and food chilled for weekend trips. The 17.5kg fridge has a 610mm x 340mm footprint and stands 424mm tall, so it easily fits in the back of smaller wagons.

With 240V AC and 12V DC inputs, I can cool the fridge using mains power before plugging it into a vehicle’s 12V power socket. There’s an optional slimline 15Ah Power Pack that attaches to the fridge’s steel cabinet via magnets, meaning you can keep the fridge running for a claimed 18 hours when away from other power sources. In practice, I reckon the power pack is good for about 12 hours, depending on the ambient temperature.

Other features I really like include the two 12V inputs, the USB outlet and the inbuilt bottle opener. There’s also a plug at the bottom so it’s easy to drain/clean, and a couple of handy baskets. At $1095, and $399 for the additional Power Pack, it’s great bang for your bucks. – Dean Mellor

2003 Land Rover Discovery 2 TD5

It’s rattly, leaks a little bit of oil, and is – more often than not – covered in spider webs, but my 2003 Land Rover Discovery TD5 has always done what it was designed to do: take me, my family and all our gear into the wild, and back again. 

I was stoked to find this 2.5-litre five-cylinder turbo-diesel (TD5) version down in Melbourne around five years ago. I had owned a Discovery 2 previously and knew it offered decent passenger comfort, oodles of storage space for camping/outdoor gear and still is one of the most capable 4WDs you can get. With solid-beam axles front and rear, combined with long-travel coil spring suspension and a locking centre diff, it will go most places I will ever want it to. Its 95-litre fuel tank, and frugal economy, allows us to go into remote areas without worrying about running empty.

I have added a few aftermarket accessories since I bought it: a set of all-terrain tyres and an auxiliary battery (an absolute must for powering your portable fridge and kids’ gadgets when camping). Amusingly, I have been asked more than once why I haven’t updated the stereo (I still have to use CDs) so I can answer phone calls but, really, why would I want to ruin any expeditionary ambience with idle work chat?

Maintenance has been the main drain, although most repairs have simply been age-related – it’s never left me stranded. The Discovery 2 might be getting old, but it is still one of my favourite outdoor ‘toys’ for not only the above reasons but also those moments when I turn the key and hear the TD5’s distinctive clatter: that’s when I know adventure is on the way. – Justin Walker

The North Face Supernatural down jacket, Ledlenser SE07R, board shorts, Ledlenser MH11

When packing for any adventure, there are three items that always go in my pack; The North Face Supernatural Down jacket, a Ledlenser rechargeable headlamp, and plain black board shorts. My Supernatural jacket offers 950-fill of water-repellent down in a Pertex Qantam rip stop nylon jacket. It stuffs into its own pocket and is about as good as it gets in ‘downies’, when considering weight for warmth. It’s also a great pillow when stuffed into a Buff.

My Ledlenser SEO7R is a compact, powerful sub -100 gram head torch offering up to 130 metres of visibility at 220 lumens and a burn time of five to 20 hours dependent on settings. The bonus of the SEO7R is it also accepts three AAA batteries for when recharging is not an option. If I need stupid-power for better visibility, photos or navigation, then I replace my SEO with my longer-lasting, 179g, 1000-lumen Ledlenser MH11 head torch instead. And finally, a comfortable, four-way stretch, non chafing board short is a luxury worth finding space for. Neutral black means they double as casual or trekking shorts without offending any fashion conscious folks, and avoids my pale buttocks making an appearance when going for a dip. – Mark Watson

The post In the gear shed: The Aus Geo ADVENTURE team’s favourite outdoor kit appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The pack’s limited production status means the wearer gains the benefits of all of this high-end tech, as well as the state-of-the-art (210D high-tenacity nylon ultra-high-molecular-weight polyethylene ripstop, along with a 500D high-tenacity base) fabrics used in its construction. This high-tenacity nylon’s advantage is from its polymer structure and resultant higher melting temperature, to improve abrasion and tear resistance. 

Add in the Fit-on-the-Fly hipbelt that makes in the field adjustment fast and easy, plus a removable 8L top lid that converts into a fully-functional 18L daypack (plus rain- and transit-covers), a secondary large (zipped) panel access point, compression divider, twin front pockets, removable sleep-pad straps, external-access reservoir sleeve and loads more and you’ve got a seriously capable load-lugger (load range is 14-29kg). 

The tech behind the Osprey UNLTD AirScape® 68 is something we’re busting to check out, so look for our online review of the pack soon. The pack is available exclusively through Paddy Pallin.

The post Exclusive: Osprey UNLTD AirScape® 68 shows the future of backpack design appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Aus Geo ADVENTURE’s Senior Gear Tester, Mark Watson, has been testing (and cooking with) a Campfire camp oven for the past few months while he’s been on some long-term remote assignments and, unsurprisingly, has been very impressed with this campsite staple’s cooking performance. So much so, in fact, that us here in the office can’t track him down to get it back. Instead, we receive the occasional text message about how the Campfire camp oven has been reliably cooking up a storm whenever possible. Watson notes that the oven “retains heat, keeps ashes out and the food we’ve cooked in it has tasted amazing, and it should be able to continue to produce top nosh for years. We love it.” 

There will be a full gear test on this excellent Campfire product online soon but, in the meantime, we are sending Watson some of Campfire’s cleaning and servicing products for the oven. The Campfire Cast Iron Scrub combines salt and natural oils to help remove any burnt food from the oven prior to it being seasoned/protected with the Seasoning Oil (which also helps minimise the chance of food being stuck to the oven wall and reduces any smells) also sent to the AG Adventure office by Campfire. 

With the amount of use the camp oven has had the past couple of months, it is due for some TLC, so look for the online review of the stove and these products here soon. See www.campfirecook.com for more information on Campfire’s wide range of camp cooking products.

Stay sheltered with OZtrail’s new Shade Dome range

OZtrail’s Shade Dome series of gazebos is all-new and, as expected, features the brand’s high quality and innovative design ethos. 

The Deluxe Shade Dome 4.2 and BlockOut Shade Dome 4.2 provide maximum shade cover (4.2m x 4.2m x 2.35m) for the footprint and pack down to a compact size. The Deluxe Shade Dome 4.2 is made using seam-sealed 150-denier heavy-duty fabric, a steel frame and zipped roof vents. The silver PU-coated canopy is claimed to cut out up to 98 per cent of UV rays from the sun. The steel shock-cords mean the whole thing is very easy to set up. It weighs only 17.3kg and packs down to 240mm x 230mm x 980mm.  

The BlockOut Shade Dome offers similar construction but utilises OZtrail’s BlockOut technology to reduce heat under the shade by up to a claimed 11 degrees Celsius. It weighs in at 16.5kg and packs down to the same dimensions as the Deluxe Shade Dome.

See www.oztrail.com.au for more info.

The post Gear News: Campfire camp oven long-term update and OZtrail’s new Shade Dome appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

When considering battery banks, battery boxes, or power stations there are several factors. Primarily “what do I need to power?” If only a smartphone and GoPro then we will likely manage a few days with a pocket sized power-bank. If we extend our trip to a week, add a camera and headtorch, then a lightweight solar unit might better suit. However, if we want to keep the phone topped up, the fridge cool, LED lights on, and tunes rolling, a large capacity power station should be on the cards, and the Companion Rover Lithium 70Ah Power Station might be just the ticket.

What is immediately evident when picking up the 70Ah Power Station is its portability. At 128mm x 190mm x 310mm it can squeeze between the fridge and duffle in the car and its 6.8-kilogram weight means the station delivers a massive punch for a unit that barely turns the scales. Companion has done a brilliant job of producing this powerhouse in such a compact package. 

To understand why we must get geeky for a second. The Rover uses a sub-7kg Lithium-Nickel-Manganese-Cobalt-Oxide (NMC). This type of battery allows the station to use nearly 95% of the battery’s capacity and deliver thousands of discharge/recharge cycles (although the battery capacity may drop to 80% beyond 800 cycles). Compare that to a battery-box with an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) battery and you’ll find the battery box needs to use a 30kg, 140Ah AGM battery (only able to access 50% of its available capacity to 500 cycles) to deliver the same amount of usable energy. Thus, the Companion Rover Lithium 70Ah offers the equivalent accessible capacity at one quarter of the weight, with up to double the lifespan, or more. Importantly, the battery is kept optimised by built-in battery protection, including over temperature, under temperature, over voltage, under voltage, over current, short circuit, and incorrect polarity, proving there’s no shortcuts on safety. Enough tech talk, let’s talk usability: this is where the Rover Power Station really stands out.

In the field

Once turned on, three LED lights offer a glance at what’s going on. The power LED informs you the unit is turned on, the input LED illuminates when the unit is charging, and the alarm LED illuminates when the USB or 12V sockets are active. An LCD then offers battery capacity, input wattage (if charging) and output wattage (if discharging), and the LCD turns off after 30 seconds to save power. 

The Rover has three-way charging capability via AC, DC or Solar, all charging through an inbuilt battery management system via an Anderson PowerPole connector. This means you can plug it into the wall, the car or solar, walk away and forget about it. It takes around 14 hours to charge from empty plugging into a house socket and about the same if charging via a vehicle’s 12V DC connection. Mother nature does better: coupled with Companion’s 200W Solar panels the unit goes from zero to full charge in under 12 hours. 

Companion’s 200W Solar Charger is the perfect partner to the Rover Lithium 70Ah Power Station. The unit is very compact at 52.5L x 52.5W x 9.5H cm and weighs around 10 kilograms for the panel, PWM Controller, five-metre Anderson cable and Anderson to battery clamp cable, all contained neatly within its inbuilt 900D polyester case.

Open, the 200W system expands to a 2.61m long and 52.5cm high ETFE laminated five-segment solar-panel with 19.5% efficient, A-grade monocrystalline silicon cells delivering 11.1 amps per hour and 18V max power via a 50A Anderson plug. The unfolded cells feature inbuilt adjustable stands, peg and tie-down points as well as hanging eyelets at each end. For charging batteries without inbuilt MPPT controllers, the panel includes a 3-stage Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) 20A controller with digital display and USB outlet.

Impressively, the Rover Lithium 70Ah Power Station contains an  inbuilt MPPT controller, allowing solar panels to plug directly into it for single-lead plug-and-charge capability. We plugged our 59% station into the 200W solar panels on a sunny afternoon (delivering around 85 Watts) and returned three hours later to an 80% charged battery.  

The Rover Lithium 70Ah Power Station has a mass of the most common power outlets including four USB-A outlets (2.4 Amp) and one USB-C outlet (3Amp) on the front. On the rear a 12V (10Amp cigarette) socket, and a 12V 2-pin (10Amp Engel-style) socket offer a combined maximum 16Amp output for powering larger devices like the fridge. Oh, and there’s an inbuilt LED torch we initially dismissed with a chuckle but later found useful for moving the station around at night or having in the back of the car.

A big win for the Rover is its simultaneous charge and discharge capability, allowing the station to accept charge from solar panels and power the fridge at the same time. I plugged the unit into the solar panels on a sunny day and not only charged the power station, but my Bluetooth speaker lantern and headtorch simultaneously, the devices drawing 23W from the power station whilst it charged from solar. If I really wanted to boost solar input capabilities, I could have chained my 120W panel into the system.

If we wanted to be picky – and we always do – then there are a few niggles we would like to see addressed. Whilst the LCD is easy to read dusk-to-dawn, it is darned near impossible to read in bright daylight due to the brightness level and the glossy finish of the screen. For after dusk, we ask Companion’s design team to rethink the integrated 12V and USB buttons so they can be seen or felt in the dark as the smooth finish makes them difficult to find. 

And while we’re asking for the world, we may as well request pure sine wave inverter technology to deliver 240V AC to a three-pin plug. We understand many new devices power via 12V or USB-C, but plenty still do not. 

The final word on the Companion Rover Lithium 70Ah Power Station

We rate the Companion Rover Lithium 70Ah Power Station and the 200W Solar Charger, combined, as an exceptional solution for off-grid power. The combined system’s size, weight and ease of use delivers bonus points aplenty. We’d love to see a brighter screen and some AC output on the Power Station, but we’re not turning away for a few ‘wants’. We will continue to listen to Angus Young’s riffs from a recharged lithium-ion Bluetooth lantern-speaker as we grab a coldie one from our 12V fridge freezer. We might not have AC, but we have DC aplenty.

RRP: $1400 See Companion Outdoor for this and its other excellent portable power products.

The post Companion Rover Lithium 70Ah Power Station: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The new OZtrail Cape Series Bamboo Table offers campers a compact, easy to use, stylish camp table, suitable for cooking, food prep and dining. The two-panel foldaway design is simple to use and quick to setup and dismantle whilst the adjustable height of the hard-wearing tabletop means for a very versatile camp table. All the legs, locks and hinges are out of the way when you fold it up after use. 

In the field

Folded flat the Cape Series Bamboo Table delivers a neat and tidy 101 x 38.5 x 9.5cm (L x W x H) 8.6kg package with legs, hinges and brackets tucked neatly within the bamboo tabletop to eliminate any annoying ‘rattling bits’ on long-corrugated roads to your campsite. The included 600D Poly Oxford carry bag offers easy haulage and minor protection from scrapes and scratches, but we found our table when ‘bag-free’ was hard wearing, easy to transport (using its inbuilt carry handle) and slid neater beside our fridge.

Setup is a breeze. Two tabletop panels of weather resistant sustainably sourced bamboo hinge out to lock in place and form a 100cm x 75cm tabletop capable of handling up to 50kg in weight. Each leg unfolds to lock in place with easy locking thumb tabs allowing for extension to 50cm, 60cm or 70cm in height. Additionally, adjustable feet offer a more tailored levelling option for uneven surfaces

The quality steel hardware (hinges and locks) is well designed and easy to use, but as with most folding equipment, cause a potential weak point and we managed to bend one of our brackets, albeit through our slightly careless setup.

The final word on the OZtrail Cape Series Folding Bamboo Table

The OZtrail Cape Series Folding Bamboo Table [100cm] adds a bit of luxury to your camp setup whilst giving a little back to the environment. The simple and well-thought-out design offers a hardwearing weatherproof platform that takes extremely little boot-space. The table’s portability, small size, light weight, and ease of use make it an ideal everyday portable table for a any occasion, from a picnic down the park to a Trans-Oz adventure. 

RRP: $170 See www.oztrail.com.au for this and more camping gear.

The post OZtrail Cape Series Folding Bamboo Camp Table: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Companion ProHeat Low Pressure Two Burner Stove

This two-burner stove from Companion Outdoor carries a brilliant party trick: its low-pressure burners mean you can expand your camp cooking repertoire thanks to the ability to control the simmer level of the stove exceptionally well. Plus, it can fit two large pots – always a welcome bonus for family camp cooking. See the full review here.

OZtrail Fast Frame Lumos 6P Tent

You wanna get to camp and get set up fast when you’re on an outdoor weekend away with the family, and this technological marvel from OZtrail fits the bill for being under shelter in no time at all. Besides the fantastically fast set-up time, this nifty outdoor home away from home also includes interior lighting, a cool interior and plenty of ventilation See the full review here.

Bialetti Moka Express

If something has been manufactured with minimal design changes – and has sold truckloads – over more than 80 years, it must be good. And this mobile coffee maker, from the famous Italian brand, does just that, brewing a brilliant coffee every time. Being practically bombproof in its construction also means you’ll be whipping up a magical caffeine infusion outdoors for decades. See the full review here.

Macpac Deluxe Double Sleeping Mat

Just when you thought you had resigned yourself to a double sleeping mat being sadly ‘too big’ to bring on your camping adventure, Kiwi brand Macpac releases this absolute belter. Offering excellent comfort for a reasonable weight, this big-bopper mat will have you finding any excuse to make sure there’s room in your car to pack it for that camping weekend. See the full review here.

Sea to Summit Sleep System

The Aussie outdoor brand knocked it out of the park with this sleep system. Comprising an ultra-light (and ultra-warm) four-season sleeping bag, a bag liner, insulated sleeping mat and even an ultralight pillow, this complete package from Sea to Summit kept our testers warm across Australia and the New Zealand Alps during the 12 months of testing. See the full review here.

The North Face Women’s Flight VECTIV

We’ve had these all-singing, all-running trail shoes on test for around nine months now and they continue to amaze our test team. The combo of loads of comfort and support, along with the fancy new VECTIV technology that The North Face developed, ensured these were a must-include for our fave gear this year. See the full review here.

Osprey Aether Plus 85

Backpack icon Osprey continued its near 50-year tradition of being top of the field when it comes to designing smart, innovative and reliable hiking packs with the release of this large load-lugger. Its light weight and comfortable fit makes that huge capacity seem far less when the pack is full, ensuring easy days on the tracks. See the full review here. 

Macpac Microlight

Macpac has been producing the Microlight for what seems like forever and the reason is simple: this solo four-season tent is practically indestructible, offering seriously robust construction and all the essential features, combining to offer the assurance that you’ll be getting reliable and safe shelter from this tent for many years. See the full review here.

Ford Ranger FX4 MAX

The dual-cab 4WD ute is now pretty much first choice for any adventurous families looking to get out and explore the outdoors. Whether you need a vehicle to lug all your outdoor ‘toys’ (think: bikes, kayaks, tents, canoes, etc.) or you need that plus the capability to get you into that pristine remote campsite, these are the vehicles that’ll get it done. The Ford Ranger FX4 MAX offers all of this plus five-star safety and plenty of room for all your gear (and family!). See the full review here.

MSR Pocket Rocket Deluxe Stove Kit

Another iconic outdoor equipment brand kept the good stuff coming in 2021, with MSR’s diminutive cooking powerhouse proving that old adage that size really doesn’t matter – especially when it comes to cooking up a storm in the outdoors. With the complete system – stove, pot, bowl, fuel and lifter – being all stored together, it is a bikepacker and hiker’s dream. See the full review here.

Yakima OnRamp e-Bike Carrier

With e-bikes taking off in popularity, their additional weight over a traditional bicycle means transporting them is a bit more of a challenge. Yakima has sorted this, though, with its clever OnRamp bike carrier able to carry two bikes of up to 30kg in weight each. Plus, there’s a nifty slot-in ramp for super-easy loading. No wonder we can’t get it back from our tester… See the full review here.

The post Our favourite outdoor gear of 2021 appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

Yakima has been strapping toys to vehicles for more than 50 years and know how to deliver user-friendly options for getting your buddies, yourself, and your kit to wherever the fun might be. The Yakima OnRamp is no exception. At 20kg the rack is no lightweight but comparable to most other dual e-bike set-ups on the market. However, its ability to accept two hefty 30kg bikes nudges it ahead of some of the competition in this area. The off-road load rating reduces individual bike capacity to 18kg each, but this is to be expected, and only relevant for those venturing beyond-the-gravel to secret trails. When not in use the OnRamp tilts up neatly, protruding a comfortable 400mm from your tailgate. With the pull of a spring-loaded pin the tray folds into horizontal position extending 800mm from the tailgate.

The real win with the OnRamp is it comes with an integrated 1300mm long slot-in ramp that allows for easy loading and unloading of heavy e-bikes. When not in use, it attaches to the OnRamp via a simple threaded knob (we’d love to see a quick release mechanism for speedy stowage, but we’re being picky). If you are a shorter rider then the loading/unloading process can still be a struggle, especially if you own an SUV or 4WD.

The OnRamp accepts bikes up to 1270mm in length with tyres up to 3.25”, however you can purchase a fat-tyre bracket for tyres up to 4.5”. Our e-bikes had 2.6” rubber and once loaded were fine, but we struggled to stay in the channels when loading/unloading. If you have wider tyres it will take some getting used to. A slightly wider ramp and bike tray profile might ease loading and unloading. 

In the field

One of our favourite features of the Yakima OnRamp is the tool-free adjustability of where each bike sits in relation to one another with a twist of a couple of threaded bike-tray knobs.Once loaded, bikes attach to a sturdy hinged upright arm via a cradle and ratchet straps. The central arm locks ‘down’ for stowage and ‘up’ when in use, and the cradles slide on the central arm to allow for different bike sizes and shapes.

Once loaded, the bikes sit secure, however the cradle and strap system can be finicky whilst balancing a heavy bike with your free hand. The straps are adequate for most bikes but weren’t long enough to fit the downtube of our e-bikes with integrated batteries, and so we had to reposition to fit to the top tube. Fortunately, repositioning is just a twist of a knob.

Fully loaded, the rack can be tilted away from the car to open the tailgate. This is activated by the simple pull of a locking pin, but if loaded with 60kg of bikes you best ask your riding buddy to help. 

The final word on the Yakima OnRamp

We found the Yakima OnRamp well designed to load, unload and secure heavy bikes of any sort. Annoying nuances were predominantly associated with handling a heavy bike, but in saying that there are a few tweaks that might help make this rack even more user-friendly. Importantly, the OnRamp is half the price of some competitive e-bike carriers whilst offering many of the same bells and whistles, so we reckon it’s well worth a look if you’re in the market.

RRP: $799 See Yakima Australia for more info on this and its other bike carrying solutions.

The post Yakima OnRamp e-bike carrier: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

In Early 2017 Yakima entered the rooftop tent (RTT) market with a SkyRise rooftop tent. The tent immediately won over users looking for an easy to install, easy to set up, lightweight alternative to many of the existing (often heavier) RTT’s on the market. The SkyRise was a hit with the only real downside being the super-light 210 denier ‘back-country style’ fabric was not as durable as heavier denier tents.

Rather than rest on its laurels and pat itself on the back for producing a popular lightweight RTT offering, Yakima instead listened to its wilderness-wandering clientele and delivered up all the features of the original SkyRise tent, but in a more durable offering. The Yakima team didn’t beat around the bush on the name, either: it is called the SkyRise HD (Heavy Duty) and it steals all the best features from its popular SkyRise tent but delivers them in a burlier more durable four-season package, with even more accessories to boot. 

In the field

What is immediately evident on installation of the SkyRise HD is that it is extremely lightweight for a three-person, four-season rooftop tent. In fact, most four-season rooftop tents weigh somewhere between 55 to 85 kilograms while the Skyrise HD weighs in at a mere 52kg. Unlike the original SkyRise, the new HD has not sacrificed fabric durability for weight-saving but rather has replaced the Ripstop Nylon face fabric of the original design with a burlier 3000mm waterproof coated, 600 Denier Ripstop polyester.  In doing so, Yakima delivers a tough four-season tent, but shaves grams elsewhere to retain its 52kg overall weight. This frees roof-load for alternate gear and eliminates concerns of exceeding maximum rooftop load limits.

Yakima’s universal tool-less SKS locking mounts also hit our ‘favourite feature podium’. The tool-less mounts clamp to a vehicles roof-bars, or crossbars, via an easy-to-use threaded clamp-mount, and simply lock with a key. This system allows for stress-free attachment or removal of the SkyRise HD in matter of minutes. The only downside to the tool-less mounts is a lack of compatibility with many roof platforms. We were able to mount the tent to Yakima’s LockNLoad E-platform, but it was not an easy job and once fitted the tent sat rather high on the platform, negating both the benefits of the low-profile roof-tray and the tent’s rapid-mount system. Once affixed to our trusty Prado 120 however, the SkyRise predominantly sat secure for the duration of our test period. After a month we found two mounts had loosened a little, but a dab of Loctite alleviated any concerns we had on long corrugated roads. 

When on the move the 680g PVC cover kept the entire tent and ladder tidy and secure in a 122cm long x 142cm wide x 41cm high package. The 41cm height does mean the tent catches plenty of wind, reducing our Prado’s fuel efficiency by close to 15 per cent. Such a reduction in fuel economy sat right on what we’d expect for such a roof load however. We were pleasantly surprised by how little wind noise we copped inside the vehicle and the bonus of a rather hefty 41cm is plenty of space to allow for bedding to be folded inside the tent when on the move.

One annoyance with the compacted tent is the quick release buckles on the cover that simply slide straight off their webbing compression straps. Fortunately, the fix is only a few 50-cent plastic tri-glide buckles away, or by stitching strap ends back on themselves. It’s a small annoyance, but one that baffles us how it ever got through testing. Where the Yakima excels, however, is on arrival at camp. The removable cover unbuckles with six quick-release buckles, then the unzipping of two small corner zips before releasing the Velcro seal all the way around. The cover then rolls away to be secured by two tabs while the tent is in use.

The multi-height concertina style extendable ladder acts as a lever for opening the tent and a single person can have the tent ready for use in a couple of minutes. There is no fiddly extending of poles and the 600D Ripstop polyester fabric has taped seams and a 3000mm waterproof coating. The extended floor acts as a shelter from rain or sun and the extendable ladder doubles as support for the overhanging tent. Our only gripe with this extendable ladder is its lack of barefoot friendliness. Exterior side tracks allow the fitment of optional accessories such as the SkyRise Annex. For our setup we added a SkyLoft hanging storage net, SkyHook hanging carabiners (great for hanging a lantern) and SideKick storage bags for shoes and drink bottles etc. If the heavens properly open a 210D Ripstop polyester 3000mm PU waterproof rainfly can be easily attached but importantly folds away on breaking camp, without a need to remove it from the tent. Two guy ropes attach to external D-rings on the overhanging tent floor to secure it to the ground if the weather turns properly nasty.

Internally, the SkyRise HD offers a solid 272kg weight allowance and a roomy 243cm x 142cm x 122cm of volume. There’s plenty of space for two people, or you can even throw a munchkin in the mix, but it would certainly be a squeeze if you were to attempt sleeping the advertised three-person capacity. The 64mm foam mattress is a blessing and far more comfortable than many competitive folding rooftop tents, and comes with a removable cover for easy cleaning. Stash pockets exist in each corner of the tent, offering stowage for keys and phone while the optional Sunbelt 32-inch USB-powered light strip we installed delivered an easy and efficient lighting solution powered that folds away with the tent. 

With large doors at both ends, two full length windows on the sides, and two roof windows, all with insect-screens, airflow is a non-issue and campers can gaze at the stars all night long. Importantly the side windows can open and close without a need to unzip the insect mesh and so venting and water protection can be adjusted without concerns of mozzie infestations. Additionally, the front door panels double as awnings when the flysheet is not in use, great for sun/rain protection whilst retaining airflow and without installing the rain fly.

If the fly needs to be fitted then it importantly offers two see-through windows to allow campers to peer even at a rainy sky whilst keeping internal roof windows open, even in a downpour. The flexible tensioning poles of the flysheet, like all similar systems, threaten to either take an eye out or tear the flysheet until you nail your technique. We’re now well versed in the nuances of the flexi-pole-flick, but we hope for a better system in the future.

The final word on the Yakima SkyRise HD

Like most rooftop tents the SkyRise HD excels in some areas and slips in others. Its ease of attachment and setup is a win alongside its simple tri-pole design offering enough space without the downside of an elaborate setup. The comfort of the mattress is a huge win and so is the bundle of accessories that adds to the usability. Whilst the bulk of the tent when packed away leaves a little to be desired, the weight saving and extra space for bedding helps negate this frustration. Yes, there are some stupid annoyances, such as the buckles that slide off the straps, or its inability to easily fit to a roof platform, but all in all the Yakima SkyRise HD will be a great camping companion for the majority of users.

RRP: $1999 See Yakima Australia for stockists.

The post Yakima SkyRise HD rooftop tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Everyone has heard of a spork, but less common is the ‘spantern’… otherwise known as a ‘speaker lantern’. Combining not only light and sound, it also offers the ability to use it as a power bank to charge your phone. If only it could make cocktails as well…

Design

As OZtrail says, “Never be left in the dark or without your favourite campsite tunes with this rechargeable Bluetooth speaker lantern”. Enter the OZtrail Ignite 1000 Lumen (L) Rechargeable Speaker Lantern.
It goes without saying that unless you eat a lot of carrots, some form of artificial light is an essential item on a camping trip. A Bluetooth speaker is more of an added luxury than an ‘essential’ item, but it is certainly a more compact option than an acoustic guitar for some tunes around the fire. Combining the two together makes a lot of sense.

We charged ours up before we left home using the USB lead that comes neatly tucked away in a hidden compartment in the base. This is a nice little feature that keeps everything together in one place and stops the endless dangling leads.
Once we’d set up camp, we connected a phone to the Bluetooth speaker and were pleasantly surprised to find it just worked straight away, none of the usual Bluetooth pairing faff of ‘device not found’. Hanging above the stove (there’s both a top and bottom hanger) it meant we had music while we cooked, and the multiple ultra-bright Samsung LEDs provided more than enough super bright white light (up to 1000 lumens in fact) to make sure we didn’t burn the dinner.

In the field

After our feast, we sat by the fire with a glass of wine and some tunes. The lantern comes with 5 adjustable brightness settings and we were pretty surprised to find that when we tried to turn the brightness down a bit, it was actually already on the lowest setting! It would be nice to be able to dim the lantern further to create a bit of mood lighting. OZtrail claims 32 hours of run-time out of the lantern when it’s on low, compared to only five when it’s on high. We didn’t stay up for 32 hours to test that theory, but we did use the lantern and the speaker solidly all evening for a good six hours without any issues. When sat by the fire, the speaker was plenty loud enough with a good clear sound that was warm rather than tinny, as is often the case with small speakers. Because the speaker output is on the top, whilst it is perfectly audible when you are sat near it, it also doesn’t project sound out too far around you which is great to avoid disturbing your camp neighbours.
The unit is splashproof with an IPX4 rating. For those who aren’t in the know about the IP waterproof rating system, this means that it is protected from splashing water, no matter the direction. (Yes, I did have to Google that). Happily for us, we camped on a beautiful clear night; unfortunately that meant no multi-directional rain available for testing purposes.
One of the niftiest features is the ability to use the inbuilt 4000mAh rechargeable Lithium-Ion battery as a power bank for charging your phone, which makes the whole unit even more multi-purpose.

The final word on the OZtrail Ignite 1000L Rechargeable Speaker Lantern

The OZtrail Ignite 1000L is lightweight and portable, super easy to connect phone via Bluetooth, and the speaker gives a decent sound for a small unit. The ability to charge your phone from it is a definite bonus. It does feel a little plastic-y and, even on the lowest setting, the light is still pretty bright so those looking for a muted illuminator experience may want to look elsewhere However, overall, it’s hard to fault this ‘spantern’. It does exactly what it says on the tin and then some – a lantern, a speaker AND a phone charger… Hmmm, now how about those cocktails?

RRP: $120 www.oztrail.com.au

The post OZtrail Ignite 1000L Rechargeable Speaker Lantern: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

We believe a two-burner should become a trusted companion for that arvo cuppa or bacon and egg breaky. It should deliver a perfect steak, slow simmer a curry, and quickly heat water for washing the dishes.
Assuming you want to do more than boil water, the Companion ProHeat Low Pressure Two Burner Stove might be the go. This stove delivers on the above and can hook directly into a regulated camper/RV LPG system.

Design

Companion’s ProHeat Low Pressure Two Burner Stove is an everyday gas cooker when attached to a LPG bottle, but is also designed to suit built-in RV/Camper kitchens and plumb directly into a bayonet fitting of a regulated system. We headed bush to see how the 18,000 BTU stove (9000 BTU per burner; 188g/h consumption) performed.
Immediately evident was its compactness. At 620Lx350Wx105H (mm) when closed, those dimensions and its low profile meant it was easy to fit inside the Prado’s rear drawers. At 6.5kg it is on the heavier side of two-burner gas stoves, but manageable. Impressively, considering its overall compact size, the stove has a large cooking area, with space for two large pots (it includes a heavy-duty pot trivet) to be used at the same time.

Each of the 9000 BTU burners ignites using an inbuilt electric/piezo ignition system. This is one of the ‘hero’ features of this stove as the dual electric/piezo system means it starts every time and each hob can be fired up independently. Theoretically, the only maintenance will be replacing the AA battery, and if this runs down the piezo will still kick in (piezo can last over 10 years), but damp or ageing ignition systems are a notorious weak point, and spare batteries can disappear, so best retain your lighter or flint.

In the field

On set-up the stove sat neatly on our camp-kitchen benchtop, however the hooks for holding the windshield are a bit of a pain to affix and dismantle due to the need to work around the trivet. This means the windshield cannot fold down when nudged by a pot and should ensure you don’t pack the unit away when hot. Thankfully, the supplied hose (and regulator) was long enough to reach a gas bottle placed on the ground (not all manufacturers think of such nuances) but we’d love to see a tool-free option for secure attachment of the hose to the cookers inlet connection just like the regulator to bottle connection. Once lit the hobs were more than adequate for quickly browning onion in a cast iron pot and whilst a higher output hob would have delivered boiling water quicker for our cous-cous, it wasn’t a deal-breaker. What impressed us was the ability to dial down the hob to slow cook our Moroccan lamb, proving my conversation with ‘Developer Dan’ at Companion where he advocated a “simmer to seer” approach and ability to regulate the burners in less than 500 BTU increments was not just marketing gobbledygook.

A favourite feature was the magnetic light-sensitive, motion-controlled LED light that attaches to the rear windshield. Sitting behind the cookers, it meant no-shadow cooking and turned on and off as we came and went.
We found the windshields adequate but the combo of low pressure and small gap at the rear windshield’s base highlights a potential weakness when windy. In saying that, our stove fluttered occasionally but never went out.

The final word on the Companion ProHeat Low Pressure Two Burner Stove

The Companion ProHeat Low Pressure Two Burner Stove worked as it should have, didn’t skip a beat and is a good option for those wanting an all-round gas stove for controlled cooking, with the additional bonus of fitting directly to a bayonet mount of a camper or RV. All of this, plus its compact dimensions, twin-ignition and that nifty LED light (it really does aid night-cooking) make it a worthwhile consideration for your vehicle-camping kit.

RRP: $240 www.companionoutdoor.com

The post Companion ProHeat Low Pressure Two Burner Stove: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Thing we love about it

The long run time on a single charge; the ability to charge in the car on the move; it’s easy to remove the baskets to load up stuff; the compartments cool quickly once you fire it up having not used it for a while; and it’s far handier than you might think having a charging point available on a fridge. The fridge’s overall volume – and the versatility of being able to use one compartment as a fridge, the other as a freezer – is a huge (excuse the size-related pun) advantage for those contemplating long, remote journeys with long distances between resupply points.

Things we don’t love as much

It’s just a bit too big and bulky. Annoyingly so. It’s a definite two-person job to carry it; it takes up too much space in the back of the Prado. If you put it in one way, there’s virtually no space at all for anything else, and if you put it in the other way you need to put a rear seat down to be able to shut the boot. Yes, we know it will fit in a 4WD ute tray – and in a large 4WD, such as a Toyota LandCruiser, a Troopy, Land Rover Discovery and Defender, plus a Nissan Patrol, at a pinch – and yes, we know we could get the smaller 60L single compartment model, but we REALLY want a dual compartment option that’s just a wee bit smaller…

The final word on the Companion Lithium 75L Dual Zone Fridge/Freezer

In the meantime, and allowing for how we sort-of dread packing it in the Prado for each camping trip, we will continue to utilise this big bopper and enjoy the size-associated benefits for storage, as well as that excellent versatility in terms of the inbuilt Lithium battery.

Price:$1780 Website: www.companionoutdoor.com 

The post Companion Lithium 75L Dual Zone Rechargeable Fridge / Freezer: Long Term Update appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Primarily the Cobra packs are designed as technical ski, climbing and mountaineering packs. Prerequisites are lightweight but burly, haul survival equipment as well as technical winter kit and deliver compulsory features like crampon stowage, rope carrying, ski attachment etc. 

The Cobra 60 did all the above with flying colours… The North Face Cobra 65 does it better.

Design

The new 210D Recycled Nylon with Spectra® Ripstop material is claimed as “stronger than steel by weight” but has an added advantage of being partially translucent to ‘kinda’ see what you’re reaching for in your pack (differing coloured dry sacks aid this). The redesigned crampon pocket is slightly smaller and so not great for those toting an oversized snow shovel but more streamlined for simple crampon stowage or to stuff your shell layer. The ice axe attachment retains the protective sheathing of its predecessor but ads a hook-release buckle to allow for easy access whilst gear tabs offer reflectivity for pre-dawn ascents. Dual side compression straps double as ski straps for when terrain becomes crampon-worthy whilst dual side-wand-pockets allow for easy stowage of poles or probe. The newly designed floating-lid sneaks in a hidden zippered pocket but does away with front straps of the older model, replacing them with a more streamlined single hook-release buckle. The new model does however retain the essential rope-carry strap of the older Cobra 60.

In the field

A Teksever foam backpanel offers comfort, but minimises water / snow absorption, and partners well with a pre-formed internal frame sheet and two aluminium stays for rigidity. Padded shoulder straps, sternum strap (with whistle-buckle) and hip belt offer all round comfort with the hip belt gear loops and easy-access pocket of the Cobra’s predecessor retained. 

Internally, things get a whole load simpler. A single 65-litre main compartment delivers enough room for multi day adventures but compresses to usable day pack size when required, while an internal water reservoir pocket allows for hydration on the move. And finally, if you’re a weight-saver then you can shave grams from the already super-light 1650-gram pack by removing the lid, hip belt and internal frame sheet for that epic steep skiing day or final push to the summit.

The final word on The North Face Cobra 65

The North Face Cobra pack has been a favourite of ours for winter sojourns over past years and so now is even more appealing. Look for our long-term review of this impressive load-lugger in 2022.

RRP: $550 See The North Face for more info.

The post The North Face Cobra 65 backpack: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Yakima HoldUp EVO is a hitch-mount carrier that fits a two-inch (50mm) hitch receiver. It includes Yakima’s highly-regarded StrongArm hooks, which tighten down (via a ratchet system) on the front wheel, and a strap at the rear wheel. Securing the bike this way means there are no touch-points on the frame itself. The HoldUp EVO tilts down and away from the car, ensuring access to the rear of your vehicle (if it has a lift-up rear door). 

The HoldUp EVO can accommodate wheel sizes from 20-inch to 29-inch, and a tyre width of up to 4.8-inches wide, with a maximum wheelbase of 1200mm. This has been great for transporting my own, plus my kids’ bikes on different occasions; my son’s 20-inch goes on along with my 26-inch, saving having to put his small-wheeled rig in the car’s cargo area. The HoldUp EVO can hold two bikes weighing up to 23kg each (you can also add the accessory HoldUp EVO +2, which adds space for two more bikes, as long as the total weight does not exceed 72kg). There’s the ubiquitous integrated same key system lock set-up (the cable lock is 810mm long), plus you get the standard-feature Yakima bottle-opener – of course!

In the field

This HoldUp EVO has been tested on the back of my Land Rover Discovery, which has meant, due to that vehicle’s side-opening door, it had to be attached to Yakima’s clever BackSwing (look for our review of this soon), which transforms the HoldUp EVO into a swingaway carrier, ensuring I can still access the Disco’s cargo area.

Note that when fitted to the BackSwing (as on the Land Rover), the HoldUp EVO sits a bit further out from the rear of the vehicle compared to if fitted straight to a hitch on a vehicle with a lift-up rear door. Fitting the carrier to a hitch is straightforward: slide it in to the hitch, use the SpeedKnob to tighten the expansion nut inside, then add the safety pin through your hitch and tighten the safety bolt and you’re done. 

The HoldUp EVO is quick to load up two bikes. My hardtail MTB and my son’s 20-inch MTB can be on, and secured, within a couple of minutes at most; you simply fold out the StrongArm and wheel cradle, lift the bike on to the tray, then bring the StrongArm over the front wheel, lock it down, secure the rear wheel strap and you’re done.

Using the tilt function is slightly tricky in terms of accessing the lever with your arm while holding the carrier/bikes so they don’t tilt on to you. However, you do soon get the hang of it. Handily, the tilt function also works the other way, so you can fold up the carrier vertically when not in use (and use the KickStart foot pedal to lower it back down). As with all of these carrier-types, though, you will need to run a car number-plate plus a light-bar if the bikes/carrier combo obscure your tail lights. Yakima’s LightMate, at $119, incorporates lights plus space for a number plate and yeah, it’s additional dosh, but we reckon it’s money well-spent. 

The final word on the Yakima HoldUp EVO

The Yakima HoldUp EVO asking price is not shy, but for that money you do get a bike carrier that is a robust and well-built. It is easy to operate, offers frame-free contact points to secure bikes, the ability to add two more bikes if you need to – thanks to the optional ($499) HoldUp EVO+2 accessory – and comes with the promise of years of reliable service.  

RRP: $699 See Yakima for more info and to view the rest of its bike carrier range.

The post Yakima HoldUp EVO: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

Billed as the lightest and most responsive shoe in The North Face’s elite trail-running range, the Flight VECTIV is made for ultra-distances. And while I can’t speak to that (I’m more of a 14km max trail runner), I can vouch for their durability – I’ve run through bush, over sandstone boulders, into fast-flowing rivers and even fallen into the sea after a punishing up-mountain-down-shale coastal track romp. This is attributed to a combination of lightweight Kevlar®, polyamide and Matryx® fabrics. But what I particularly love about these runners is their knit uppers, which are both breathable and supportive, and dry out super-fast after a dive into a puddle or creek crossing. 

Running was something that didn’t really come naturally to me – I’d always been more of a swimmer. But during a particularly harrowing period in my life, I took up trail running as a way of managing my emotions, or perhaps, more accurately, to set them aside. You see, when you’re navigating through the bush, you’re not thinking about the emotional quicksand that threatens to swallow you. Instead, your mind is fully engaged in where you’re putting your feet – if you don’t, you’re likely to trip over an exposed tree root and find yourself careening face first into the Earth (believe me, it happens). 

Now, I bet you’re wondering, what does any of this have to do with shoes? Well, it’s simple really, you want a pair that will carry you safely over the dirt and rocks and sticks and roots. And more than that, propel you forward – as you run towards a happier future, or just back to the start of the trail (lols). 

The shoe’s VECTIV™ technology is designed to do this. Its carbon-fibre plate enhances stability, its midsole rocker delivers forward propulsion, its high-rebound foam reduces impact (by 10 per cent, they say, although I don’t reckon I can quantify it with a percentage rating) and its 3.5mm lugs ensure a rugged grip across all types of terrain. 

In the field with The North Face Women’s Flight VECTIV

So how does it all stack up out on the trail? Well, having put these shoes through their paces for six or so months – across banksia-strewn moors and down river-carved ravines, through hidden sandstone steam-train tunnels and while scaling the sides of waterfalls – I can confidently say that they deliver. 

Perhaps the one fleeting downside is the 3D-moulded heel. Designed for a precise fit, it gave me blisters on the pesky soft skin of my Achilles the first few wears – nothing a couple of blister patches couldn’t sort. After wearing them in, though, it’s been one happy marriage. So much so that I’m no longer running to escape the quicksand of life but running towards it’s many and splendid possibilities. They have, indeed, given me flight.

RRP: $330 See The North Face for more info and other trail runners in its range.

The post The North Face Women’s Flight VECTIV trail runners: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Obviously, the main aim of the game with a camp mattress is to be comfy, so this is definitely a good start, but there’s also no point in having a super-comfy mattress if it’s so big you can’t actually take it with you anywhere… Although this one may well be so comfortable it’s worth leaving everything else at home, just to ensure you have room for it.

Design

There’s no getting around the size of the FATMAT 1500 – it’s immediately apparent the second you lay eyes on it. And when we say it’s big, we don’t mean it’s big in the sense that you’d only take it car-camping rather than hike-camping, we mean you’d really need to seriously consider the size of it into your packing to ensure you would be able to fit it in the car in addition to the other camping necessities. For those that like hard figures, that means that packed down, it comes in at 750mm x 480mm x 330mm. 

Weighing in at 8.5kg, it’s not overly heavy despite its bulk, and fits easily into the supplied carry bag. The carry bag itself comes with compression straps to assist with compacting the mat down as much as possible, as well as straps that allow it to be carried as a backpack which makes it a bit easier to maneuver around (although if you’re sub-6ft like my trusty mattress testing assistant is, it’s pretty big on the back!).

In the field

Once the FATMAT 1500 is removed from the carry bag, inflating is a breeze thanks to the 360º wide open twist valve that is simple and easy to use; you simply twist to inflate. This then gets straight to work inflating the 150mm thick, high density, open cell memory foam mattress. And that’s where the comfort factor really kicks in. 

As soon as you lie down on the mat, it’s immediately comfortable. And not just inflatable camping mattress comfortable; this thing could probably rival the comfort of some folks’ beds at home. The soft-touch, non-slip, low noise sleep surface is exactly what it says it is. It feels supremely soft to the touch, you don’t slide off it and it’s totally quiet, it doesn’t rustle or squeak at all. 

The surface and sides of the mat are made of TPU coated 30D stretch pongee fabric, and the base is a heftier 75D of the same fabric, to ensure maximum waterproofing and insulation all round. The base is also anti-slip which helps to reduce any movement and sliding around on the tent floor. 

You also can’t feel another person move at all, even if they are doing a fair bit of tossing and turning, which is a definite plus. At 2010mm x 1500mm it’s a decent Queen-sized mattress that is more than ample for two people. If you can drag yourself off the mat and away from the comfort, it’s also surprisingly quick and easy to deflate and pack away. You simply twist the 360º valves again and fold and roll, squeezing the air out as you go before securing with the compression straps and then putting it back into the carry bag. There’s no cramming it in, either; if you’ve deflated it properly, there’s plenty of space to get it back in the bag without doing any wrestling. 

The final word on the OZtrail 3D FATMAT 1500

Overall, we can see why OZtrail says the 3D FATMAT 1500 boasts ’market-leading comfort’: it really is impossible to fault the comfort factor, despite the fact the comfort comes at a cost in terms of size. If you can fit it in your camping vehicle – in any way – we reckon it’s a keeper; the total comfort it affords will ensure a magic night out, every single time, when you’re camping.

RRP $500 See OZtrail for more info on this and other OZtrail FATMAT sleeping mats.

The post OZtrail 3D FATMAT 1500: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

Weighing in at just over 6kg and measuring 71cm x 31cm, when packed, the Macpac Deluxe Double Sleeping Mat is clearly not for stuffing in a lightweight pack for multi-day trekking excursions. This mattress is aimed fair and square at car-campers, and in doing so, it excels. Most importantly, it is entirely manageable without needing to leave a child behind to fit in the car or employ a yak to carry it from car to camp.

The mattress comes rolled in a drawstring bag, and secured by two straps with quick release buckles. Set-up is simple: unclip the straps, unscrew the inflation valves and let the self-inflation magic get to work.
Gone are the days of huffing and puffing or packing the foot pump. Self-inflating mattresses are essentially a layer of compressible open cell foam, sandwiched inside an airtight envelope of fabric with a sealable valve. (This Macpac version uses horizontally cored foam to save on weight). Opening the valve allows the foam to expand, sucking air into the mat.

Left to its own devices the Macpac Deluxe Double Sleeping Mat self-inflates in under seven minutes (yes, we did time it). Your best bet is to unroll it and let it do its thing while you make a cup of tea. On returning to fully inflated mattress, you just close the valve screw caps and you’re ready for snooze time.

In the field with the Macpac Deluxe Double Sleeping Mat

On first impressions the mattress feels neither super-soft nor agonisingly hard. After a short period of time however, the absence of any ground contact, nor airbed-wobble, or scratchy-fabric-noise becomes noticeable and the fact the mattress does not stand out in any way is a good thing – you almost forget you’re lying on it.

The stretch fabric on the top surface feels soft and cosy, while the underside offers a hard-wearing Peach Polyester. All surfaces having been treated with a TPU (Thermoplastic Polyurethane) coating to ensure the mattress is both waterproof and breathable.

One of our favourite features of this mattress is how quiet it is when you move around on it; you barely feel a second person tossing and turning. The days of bouncing off a squeaky airbed are long gone. If you must share nicely, the mattress is 130cm wide, so a reasonable width for two adults, but the bonus is, at 200cm long, it can accommodate those over 6ft, like myself.

On striking camp, the mattress deflates as easily as it is inflated… OK, well not quite as easily. The open cell foam takes a little coaxing to compress so is considerably easier to deflate with two people rather than one. The trick is to roll loosely once to remove excess air, close valves, unroll, then roll again. Once rolled, two compression straps clip together to hold it secure for placing back in the bag.

The final word

At $350, the Macpac Deluxe Double Sleeping Mat is not cheap, but is comparable to other high-end double self-inflating mattresses. Even at that price, its well-thought-out feature and its quietness, escalate it to the front of the line for those wanting a great piece of comfortable camping kit.

RRP: $350 ($245 Macpac Club Price). See Macpac for more info.

The post Macpac Deluxe Double Sleeping Mat: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

It all sounds pretty amazing, hey? Well, we sent Senior Gear Tester, Mark Watson, out on the hiking trails to gauge how all this technology works in the real world of hiking. Watch the video above for our extensive review!

For more info on both the hiking and trail running VECTIV™ shoe range, see The North Face

The post Video: The North Face VECTIV Exploris hiking shoe tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Featuring an integrated rechargeable Lithium battery, a built-in gas regulator (with BOM connection), a nifty one-touch shower head control (with auto ignition) and weighing only 6.5kg, this hot water powerhouse has become a favourite of the Australian Geographic ADVENTURE test team. Check the video to see how it performed during our long-term testing.

Head to Companion Outdoor for more info.

The post Video: Companion AquaHeat Hot Water System tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The first thing you may notice with the RockShox Reverb AXS dropper is this seatpost has no cables. Let me just say that again: this seat-post has no cables! No hoses, no hydraulic lines; in fact, nothing you need to route through the frame. You can install the post on any bike and 60 seconds later have a functioning dropper post. Believe it or not, this might just be the one-post-to-rule-them-all, because we can now swap and change between bikes whenever we feel the whim. I already hear the sceptics, “If it appears too good to be true, then most likely it is”. Except this time, it’s not. It’s a hose-less heaven. 

Without a physically connected actuator, the Reverb AXS uses SRAM’s encrypted wireless network instead (as featured in SRAM’s eTap/AXS wireless tech for road and mountain bikes). The pairing and set-up of the seatpost & RockShox AXS™ handlebar controller is as easy as pushing a button on the seatpost, then one on the controller, and it’s done. It’s that easy. Of course, if you want to get nerdy, feel free to connect to SRAM’s app via Bluetooth and start customising, check battery levels, or even receive service notifications. The Reverb AXS is available in diameters of 30.9mm, 31.6mm and 34.9mm, with drop-heights of 100mm, 125mm, 150mm and 170mm.

With the seatpost installed it’s time to ride right? Wrong. There is a caveat to accessing all this technology: it requires power. The Reverb remote uses a tiny long-lasting CR2032 watch battery, while the seatpost itself is powered by a removable 24g, 300mAh eTap/AXS rechargeable lithium-ion battery.

SRAM promotes the battery as lasting 40 hours and during our evaluation it lasted weeks without a charge. I accidentally let it run dry once, but on plugging the charger into my car’s USB outlet on the 10-minute drive to the trailhead, I ended with enough juice to ride for a good few hours. The seatpost and remote include a small LED that glows red, orange or green to display remaining battery life and only take an hour to charge, but in a perfect world you will have a fully charged second battery (RRP $80.00) to roll out the door with, for that ‘just in case’ moment.

The head of the seatpost has all the electronics and fandangled tech stuff bundled into an IPX7 rated housing (it can survive immersion in one metre of water for up to 30 minutes) and uses a side clamp mechanism to accept 7mm rails, and a T25 bolt to adjust saddle angle. We found no creaking or slippage on the rail clamps and rode in some solid monsoonal storms with no water ingress issues. 

At 700g (including battery), the AXS model is certainly no lightweight, but nor is it a heavyweight: if you’re a gram-counter it comes in at least 100g heavier than the Reverb Stealth.

In the field

Aside from the ease of installation, the ‘hero factor’ in the AXS system is the lightning-fast responsiveness. There is little to no lag between the trigger and the actuation of the seatpost. The AXS handlebar lever has no throw but is rather an oversized on/off paddle. We wondered whether a lack of feel might become an issue but found the opposite; the responsiveness of the unit made minor height adjustments easy and I personally loved the size of the paddle which can be used even over the rockiest of terrain.

In the past we’ve had enough issues with hydraulic Reverbs to be wary, but the AXS gets Reverb’s new internal floating piston, slicker grease, and reduced friction hydraulic fluid along with Vent Valve Technology to reduce ‘squish’ (due to air and oil mixing). Reverb’s new tech means the post compresses and raises smooth and fast and tops out with a reassuring solid ‘clunk’. The bonus is service intervals are also increased to 600 hours (previously 200 hours).

A long term update and the final on the Reverb AXS

We first published our review of the RockShox Reverb AXS in Issue 5 of Aus Geo ADVENTURE. Since then – and for a total of 10 months of testing since fitted – the Reverb AXS has been used and abused thoroughly, and has continued to function perfectly. Occasionally, this tester forgets to charge the battery but that can be also attributed to the fact it lasts so long on one charge (we’ve decided to grab a spare and keep a battery and the charger in the vehicle, to charge via USB). I have also used the app quite often to check battery levels and when the next service is as well, which sounds a bit over-the-top, but actually comes in handy. As mentioned earlier in this updated review, the Reverb AXS has not been treated with kid gloves, and it continues to work perfectly, showcasing just how tough this unit is. This has, along with the overall operation of the seat post, been an eye-opener and dismisses any concerns about the robustness of the unit and its tech. Weight-weenies may also baulk at the additional 100g of weight, but for us ‘regular’ trail-riders, that is not an issue at all.

The Reverb AXS is by far the best dropper post presently on the market, so if you can afford to fork out the small fortune to secure one, then do so. That high cost does mean that, to fully justify your big spend, you need to be riding the trails regularly  – or need desperately to upstage your mate who ‘has it all’. Then, it is well worth it.

RRP: $1299.95 www.sram.com

The post RockShox Reverb AXS Dropper Post: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Bialetti Moka Express (also known as a stovetop espresso maker) originated in Italy, with its inventor, Alfonso Bialetti, observing how pressure worked with his wife’s washing machine to clean clothes. Yep, a true story, with the original 1933 design the same as the one used in the Moka Express today. The original versions were made from aluminium, due to that metal being prevalent in Italy (there are now stainless-steel variants).

The Moka Express comprises three separate parts – or chambers: the base (which you fill halfway with water), the middle (where you put the coffee grounds) and the top, which is where, under pressure, the coffee ends up. With these three separate parts, the Moka Express is very simple in construction, and very robust – two of the main reasons it has become a favourite with vehicle-based camping coffee connoisseurs. The aluminium also ‘ages’, with a corresponding change in the flavour of the coffee that is produced.

The coffee is produced by heating the water in the base over a stove/burner, with the resultant boiled water producing steam that pushes water through the funnel to the coffee ground chamber above it. From here, more pressure – and the boiling water being absorbed by the coffee (which then expands) – results in the fully saturated coffee/water mix boiling up into the top ‘pot’ (chamber) where the resultant espresso coffee is then poured. 

Yep, as mentioned earlier, it is a very simple process and it is this, plus the robustness of the unit and its relatively compact size that has seen these become near-essentials in a lot of camping kits.

In the field

A 4WD camping trip to Deua National Park, NSW, saw my co-traveller Dean Mellor’s 27-year-old Bialetti Moka Express (6-Cup model) put to good use in the mornings. The age of this particular unit had no bearing on how effective it was to use – and how beautiful the resultant espresso coffee was. 

Filling the bottom chamber with water, adding the coffee grounds to the mid-chamber and then waiting for the tell-tale sounds of spluttering brew from the top chamber takes around five to seven minutes, before grabbing the heat-resistant handle and pouring. This 6-Cup model produces the equivalent of two big mugs’ worth of coffee; the ‘cup’ sizing Bialetti uses refers to an espresso cup-size, so if you have a crew of four regularly on your camping trips, we’d recommend either the 9- or 12-Cup Moka Express. 

After use, it is important to ensure the three chambers of the Moka Express are washed and dried properly, but other than that, there is no maintenance needed. Indeed, another fellow journalist friend of mine has a Bialetti that is ticking over close to 40 years of reliable service!

The final word on the Bialetti Moka Express

It may seem slightly fiddly – or even extravagant – to use a coffee maker, rather than just go the instant-coffee route for your camp coffees but, really, for that extra 10 or so minutes it takes to brew up a cup of Joe in the Bialetti, we reckon it is well worth the time spent.

It had been around 10 years of scrounging a Bialetti-brewed coffee off my co-workers before I decided to get my own (a 6-Cup) and dedicate a permanent storage nook for it in my main camping box (the 6-Cup measures 165mm x 115mm x 220mm). Now, it’s just a matter of experimenting with brewing times, and the different flavours of available coffee, before I hit on the ultimate start to the day. Hell, I might even source the Mini Express model (1-Cup) as well, for my hiking and paddling adventures, to ensure I don’t suffer sub-standard coffee no matter where my morning begins!

With its robust construction, effective operation, and the fact that, more than likely, you’ll be using it to make coffee for decades to come, the Bialetti is a brilliant bang for your caffeine-addicted bucks addition to your camping kit. 

RRP: from $40 to $140 (available in cup sizes: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12 and 18)
www.bialetti.com

The post Bialetti Moka Express: We test the camp coffee-brewing icon appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The core components of a successful sleep system are a quality sleeping bag and sleeping mat. However, finding the right components for the job can be confusing, even before considering additions of liners or pillows. Fortunately, Sea to Summit has simplified the selection process with a fancy online assistant, on its website. As Aus Geo ADVENTURE’s resident ‘cold sleeper’, I was asked to test the system, starting with me, firstly, rummaging through empty energy-bar wrappers and bike tools to find a smartphone and type “Sleep System Finder”. I was intrigued to see if the code-typing tech boffins at Sea to Summit could magically create a comfy night’s sleep in even the harshest of environments.

I asked our virtual assistant for a packable system targeted at snow camping in both the Australian and New Zealand Alps. The system needed to offer the ultimate balance of super warm, super light and super packable. What we ended up with was:
1.Ether Light XT Insulated Air Sleeping Mat
2.Spark SPIV Ultralight Down Sleeping Bag (-8°C comfort rating; -15°C lower)
3.Reactor™ – THERMOLITE® Liner
4.Aeros Ultralight Pillow

Design

Balancing warmth, packability and weight is the ultimate challenge for any outdoor manufacture and while warmer sleeping bags and more packable sleeping mats exist, on the surface our “Sleep System Finder” seemed to hit the nail on the head for finding a warmth for weight compromise.

The Spark SPIV is a super lightweight sub-1kg, four-Season, 850+ Loft ULTRA-DRY Down™ sleeping bag. In layman’s terms, this is as good as it gets for sleeping bag down quality – and as minimalist as it gets for material weight. The key to the Spark IV’s usability and warmth for weight ratio lies in its materials. The Spark IV delivers 700 grams of extremely high-loft water-resistant down and uses a super lightweight 10-denier (D) 100% Nylon shell plus a mere 7D liner fabric with a super light-gauge 1/2 length YKK® zip to achieve its 985 gram weight. The ULTRA-DRY Down™ is treated with a nano-level water repellent polymer to limit any loss of insulating qualities in damp conditions where traditional down sleeping bags loose warmth. 

The addition of a Reactor™ THERMOLITE® Liner boosts warmth even further. The Reactor™ 100% recycled synthetic lofting hollow-core fibre adds up to a claimed 8-degrees of warmth to our sleep system with only a 248g weight penalty. The comfortable, stretchy THERMOLITE® liner comes with a drawcord to cinch tight and compresses neatly into it’s own Ultra-Sil stuff sack. Theoretically the Spark SPIV combined with the Reactor™ THERMOLITE® liner delivers a four-season -15/-22°C (lower comfort) sleeping bag for under 1.25kg. 

Sitting between sleeping bag and ground is an Ether Light XT Insulated Air Sleeping Mat. The tapered mid-weight full length three-season sleeping mat is ideal for cool climates. It is primarily an air sprung mat with 10cm-deep interconnected chambers to enable plenty of cushioning while retaining freedom of air movement. Lofting hollowcore THERMOLITE® insulation is combined with Exkin Platinum to reflect heat back to the body which in turn boost the R-value to 3.2. At 198cm x 65cm the long size mat is perfect for the taller frames. The 30/40D face fabric offers a reasonably quiet night’s sleep, especially when compared to sleeping mats of only a few years back. An inbuilt multi-valve offers super rapid inflation, or air-dumping when packing into the ultra compact 13x28cm Aerstream pump sack, which doubles as a stuff sack and inflation device.

Bonus features include pillow lock (small velcro-like tabs) to hold your pillow in place and importantly the entire unit is field repairable with self-adhesive patches or glue / patch combo. For a little luxury the 20D laminated polyester Aeros Ultralight Pillow inflates to 36cm x 26cm and 12cm of pillowy goodness. Whilst we’re quite au-fait with the ‘downie in a buff’ pillow, the Aeros inflates with a couple of breaths and sticks like glue to the Pillow Lock System and is a nice addition for a minimal weight gain of 60g in a 7.5cm x 5.5cm stuff sack.

In the field

What first hit us in the face with our sleep system was its extreme compactness and minimal weight. Our ‘long’ sized Spark IV weighed in at 911g and compressed to a tiny 18x25cm, which is exceptionally small and light for a -8 /-18°C, four-season sleeping bag. The translucent appearance of the super lightweight outer fabric was slightly disconcerting on its first foray into the Australian Alpine, but the bag performed rather well, proving the box baffle construction accompanied by zipper, hood and neck collars all perform as they should. The vertical chest baffles helped keep the down where it was supposed to be, and the The ULTRA-DRY Down™ retained its loft when condensation made everything a little damp. When we used the system in the high alpine around Mt Cook in New Zealand, we discovered a small loss of insulating abilities over a number of days when the Spark was unable to be dried, but such is the case for all down sleeping bags. The mummy deign is tried and proven to be effective at minimising heat loss by eliminating dead-air and performed well, as expected. The Spark IV’s extra volume in the chest area is meant to allow for the fitting of extra layers in extreme conditions, and once again, our New Zealand sojourn proved the design is based on real life, not just theory. The three-quarter zip eliminates the ability to ventilate from the base and can be a little awkward at first, but we quickly got used to it and loved the oversized zip-tabs. Personally, I rarely unzip a cold-climate sleeping bag beyond halfway anyway.

For those further, higher, colder expeditions, the addition of the Reactor™ – THERMOLITE® Liner is designed to boost the bags performance by up to a claimed 8°C. We’re sure it’s measurable in a lab but whilst the addition of the Reactor™ certainly made for a warmer night’s rest it didn’t feel like a -20°C alpine bag. The Reactor™, however, did its job well, boosting the bags performance for those cold nights, and cold sleepers, like me. At 198cm long, 65cm wide and weighing 625g, our Ether Light XT Insulated Air Sleeping Mat’s 10cm deep lofty baffles did their job well. The sleeping mat delivers an R-value of 3.2, thus offering a good compromise of weight to warmth. The valve technology, Airstream pump sack and Pillow Lock System are nice bonus features and work as they should, and when combined with the Aeros Ultralight Pillow it was hard to fault the entire system for general warmth and comfort.

The final word on the Sea to Summit sleep system

The tech boffins at Sea to Summit appear to have crunched their numbers correctly. We’ve used and abused their suggested sleep system for more than a year now and it performs spectacularly in cool conditions and quite well in subzero temps. Our favourite component is most definitely the super compact and quite toasty Spark IV SP Sleeping Bag. When combined with the Reactor™ liner this combo is hard to beat for such a lightweight four-season setup but I suggest the system sleeps a little colder than its claimed comfort rating. We enjoyed the luxury of the super-light Aeros and pillow lock when grams weren’t being counted and it’s an easy addition or deduction based on your activity. The Ether Light XT sleeping mat is a great all-rounder but probably the weakest link in our set-up. Whilst the mat is no slouch in the warmth for weight category, it’s hard up against competing brands like the Exped Downmat HL Winter that achieves a far superior R-Value for a similar size, and only a few grams more. In all, we are a huge fan of the Sea To Summit sleep system, however if we were asked to perfect the system for subzero alpine use we might ask for a ‘smidge’ more down in the Spark IV, and an offering of ULTRA-DRY Down™ in an Ether Light to create a super light mat of equal brilliance to the Spark technology.  

Pricing
Ether Light XT Insulated Air Sleeping Mat: $300 (Tapered); $350 (Long)
Spark SPIV Ultralight Down Sleeping Bag: $849.00 (Regular); $899 (Long)
Reactor™ – THERMOLITE®: $90
Aeros Ultralight Pillow: $50-55

The post Sea to Summit Sleep System: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Well, at least it was until the past couple of years. The resurgence of hardtail MTBs – most notably those built out of ‘old-school’ steel, and skewed more toward trail and all-mountain riding, rather than XC – has come on fast. Norco’s Torrent HT and Kona’s monster Honzo ESD are just two of the latest, joining brands such as UK-based Cotic and Stanton, along with Canada’s highly regarded Chromag, in offering bikes that are tough, fast, forgiving, up for anything and thanks to steel’s inherent robustness, will be still providing plenty of fun on the trails decades later, proving that old adage that “steel is real” well and truly. 

The combo of a bike frame made from a material regarded as ancient by the ignorant, with a modern drivetrain, forgiving wheels (again, notably in 29-inch size), dropper posts, long-travel forks and the modern MTB geometry trend of long, low and slack, and suddenly you have a bang-for-your-bucks rig that is super-tough, super-simple to work on (no pivots, rear shock, etc.) and just simply awesome fun. 

It was this that led me to head down the MTB hardtail path a couple of years ago, although I approached this ‘hardtail resurgence’ in a slightly different way…

Retro rarity

I have always been a fan of steel hardtails, partly due to my – ahem – not insignificant age, meaning I was around for the dawn of mountain biking, exploring numerous trails on my fully-rigid stone-grey Diamondback Topanga back in the mid/late 1980s. That bike, fully rigid, with no suspension, taught me plenty about line selection on trails. Even though it had since disappeared from my garage (it’s still being used as a commuter by its third owner), I had never forgotten the fun of a hardtail; how it engages the rider more with the trail.

When it came time to look for a steel hardtail again, I was after something a little different to the norm; I had dabbled with a couple of Niners (a SIR 9, built with smooth Reynolds 853 steel and the ROS 9 – a 4130 chromoly all-mountain rig) but wanted something that really brought me back to those earlier days of shorter wheelbases, flickable frames and – dare I say it – 26-inch wheels. I wanted to (I guess) prove that such a bike, with all those ‘old-school’ aspects, could still razz trails with the latest and greatest. 

So it was that, after first sourcing a New Old Stock (NOS) 2010 Rocky Mountain Blizzard frame (the famous Canadian brand’s last XC steel hardtail in beautiful, springy Columbus Zone steel tubing, no less) for my wife to ride, that I scored big-time with what I thought could be the ideal hardtail all-rounder : another Rocky Mountain Blizzard – but this time, the ultra-rare 2011 Long Travel (LT) version, built with beefier (albeit slightly stiffer) 4130 chromoly steel, and which could take a fork of up to 150mm travel. This all-mountain variant of the Blizzard was only produced as a frame-only by Rocky Mountain for one year, in very limited numbers, so when I spotted a very tidy Large-sized example over in (where else) British Columbia, Canada, it only took a few emails and a tiny amount of haggle, before a friend of mine was winging from BC with some additional flight luggage.

At this point, I will understand the question you ask of why, in 2018 (when I started this project), I would want to return to the seemingly redundant 26-inch wheel-size, and also why I would want to build up a trail/all-mountain hardtail frame that also featured another couple of ‘redundancies’: a straight-steerer head-tube, and a QR 135mm rear axle? I wondered about that myself but have always been one to travel the slightly different road – while fully realising, in this case, that tracking down new/second-hand components to fit those out-of-date standards was probably going to be either half the fun or complete my transformation into a fully-fledged madman as I lost the battle to stay sane during what could have been a truly fruitless search.  

Beginnings of a dream

The idea behind this Blizzard LT build was, initially, to scour second-hand markets for the required components; I had thought (as did a lot of others) that there was minimal – if any – possibility of finding a new straight-steerer fork for the bike and was prepared to do the hard yards of being patient. After a couple of months, patience went out the window and, in what was a mild fit of madness and desperation, I jumped on FOX’s fork selection page. It was here I copped my first welcome surprise: the US suspension giant still actually made a couple of forks for a 26-inch MTB with a straight-steerer headtube, one of which was the mighty FOX Float 36 Factory, albeit in 160mm-travel form, which was a bit longer than I wished as the Blizzard’s recommended fork length maxed out at 150mm. However, it only took a quick chat with FOX’s Aussie distributor Sola Sport to confirm they could drop it to my preferred 140mm (note: this may change at some point), and I was super-stoked. What I had envisaged being the most difficult part of the build had been sorted, albeit not cheaply. That resolved, it was time to turn my attention to my next potentially painful – and expensive – search: a 26-inch all-mountain wheelset. 

Industry rules

An all-mountain hardtail relies on a number of factors to provide a good ride and handling experience: the frame material is one, with steel regarded as more ‘forgiving’ than alloy or even carbon, and within that are different types of steel as well), an efficient fork (it’s the only form of ‘suspension’ on a hardtail – besides your arms and legs, of course), and a wheelset that offers both compliance and strength. The 4130 steel tubing is not the most forgiving of the steel variants out there (Columbus Zone and Reynolds 853 are probably viewed as the most comfortable), but it is still notably mutes trail impact.

Wheels were tricky. The choice of 26-inch wheels that offer decent width these days is very thin; I was after as much wheel width/tyre width as I could fit in the relatively narrow chainstays of the Blizzard to help dampen the rear end. Most 26-inch wheelsets I found on the second-hand market were only 19-21mm in width, and probably not up to coping with me hucking the bike off bigger drops. 

It was at this point that I realised my budget was about to explode – and in a big way – and I could have quite easily pulled the pin. But, no, instead of doing the sensible thing, I thought if I was going to blow a large portion of it, I might as well go the Full Monty…

I am guessing it had been a little while since Industry Nine’s Australian distributor, Dawson Sports, had received an enquiry about a custom-build set of 26-inch wheels; the Industry Nine Torch Enduro 32 Hole hoops, to be exact. Indeed, Brent Dawson seemed both surprised and a tad impressed by the dream build idea he was hearing from the madman on the other end of the phone when I rang. 

Industry Nine has a well-deserved reputation for its high-engagement wheel hubs and wheelsets. These Torch Enduros were ideal, with a 26mm internal diameter (30.5mm outer) a three-degree engagement and six-pawl mechanism. Uniquely, Industry Nine offers wheel buyers the option of anodising, whether that is just the hubs (such as I did) or even the butted aluminium spokes as well. Pretty colours aside, these wheels are built tough, but still light (weighing in at 1610g) and have a welcome 113kg rider weight limit. Plus, they were available in 135mm QR rear hub format. Yes, these were pretty damn expensive but as this bike was built as a true ‘keeper’, I was sort-of okay with the pricing. Wrapped around the wheels are some Schwalbe Hans Dampf 26×2.35 tyres up front, and Nobby Nic 26×2.35 rubber out back. 

Adding up essentials

After the big expense of forks and the Industry Nine wheelset, the Blizzard project was starting to resemble a bad day at the stock market. This meant refocusing on the fact that the rest of the components needed must offer plenty of bang for my ever-decreasing bucks – yes, I was still delusional in terms of wanting this build to not go overboard…

The drivetrain and brakes were a no-brainer: I am a huge Shimano fan and, back in 2018, Shimano had just released its SLX 1×11 drivetrain with that big 46-tooth ring on the rear cassette.  Add in a set of SLX brakes (180mm rotors front/rear) and I was nearly there. 

For the cockpit, I went for Chromag’s OSX bars and a 50mm Ranger stem (in red to match the hubs), along with a schmick Chris King headset and – ideal for my big size 12s – a sweet set of Chromag Scarab flat pedals (also in red). Finally, I fitted a 125mm KS Lev dropper post – it was, at the time, the longest dropper in the narrow seat-tub diameter the Blizzard possessed.

To say the build project (and cost) became bigger than Ben-Hur is an understatement. But, thankfully, the actual build itself, by master bike mechanic (and good mate) Tim Robson, was straightforward. Once I saw Robbo snap out a wheelie as part of his ‘shakedown’ after the bike had been built – and saw his huge grin – I knew all that component chasing, dreaming, and way too much money had been worth it…

Making trails new and exciting again

I am fortunate to live near one of Sydney’s most popular MTB trails – Manly Dam – and also frequently visit the excellent trail network at Tathra, on the NSW Sapphire Coast quite often (Tathra is just up the road from my parents’ home at Eden). So, it has been mainly on these two very different trail networks that the Blizzard LT has been ridden: a mix of gnarly sandstone and steep drop-offs, along with sandy, flowy coastal trails. 

My other bike is a dual-suspension 29er (a Pivot Trail 429, see our initial review on that bike here), so every time I jump on the relatively ‘small’ hardtail, it does take a while to readjust my riding style. Thankfully the Blizzard LT is a forgiving bike; that FOX 36 eats up the choppy, rocky sections and drops on Sydney’s Northern Beaches well, with the steel frame and those Industry Nine wheels taking a bit of sting out of the ride. The bike’s short wheelbase ups the fun factor immensely; the more you fling the bike about, the more fun you have on it. This is counterbalanced somewhat by having to be way more focused in terms of both overall bike handling and allowing for the smaller-diameter wheels’ reticence to roll over everything – although that just gives me an excuse to jump off more stuff. 

Related: The Ultimate Guide to Mountain Biking

I have no qualms taking it out in the crappiest of conditions; a hardtail’s appeal is its simplicity of construction – no pivots and few moving parts to get blocked up/damaged with grit, dirt, sand, etc. – and even though I do grimace when I get a small paint-chip, I know that, when it finally looks too scratched-up, I can simply sandblast it back to bare metal and then repaint it. 

A few changes may happen, though. The 50mm stem is going to be swapped out for a 60mm to give my long-ish arms and torso a bit more ‘room’, but also to compensate slightly for a planned-for increase in fork-travel, from 140mm to 150mm. This will slacken the head angle a bit as well, something that is always welcome on the Northern Beaches’ gnarly, steep trails. The other tweak may be fitment of a carbon bar, for a bit more vibration damping up front. 

Overall, I am stoked with the Blizzard LT. I try not to think how far over-budget I did go with this build but for me the end-result of a bike that I will likely keep forever – and that is simply an absolute hoot to ride – makes that initially frightening investment worthwhile, and it should pay me back with many years of reliable (and fun) service.

Yes, I still look at modern hardtail MTBs and think ‘maybe’ – especially some of those Stanton and Cotic models built with so-sweet Reynolds 853 steel – and I also note Rocky Mountain now produces the Growler hardtail, albeit only in an aluminium frame. However, the absolute grin factor I experience every time I jump on board the Blizzard LT, whether for a quick blast around Manly Dam, a day on the trails down at Tathra, along the lakeside boardwalk near my parents house, or just to ride with the kids to school, means it would take something incredibly special for me to contemplate parting with this grin-inducing steel bruiser.

The post Project Blizzard: An ‘old’ mountain bike gains a second life on the trails appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Microlight features a single ridge pole design, and Macpac’s Multi-Pitch system. Multi-Pitch denotes the fact the tent can be pitched fly-only, inner-only, and fly/inner connected together. This last is handy when you’re pitching a tent in the rain as it ensures your inner stays dry. Speaking of the fly, it is waterproof UV30 siliconised ripstop nylon, offering a 3000m hydrostatic head (HH) waterproof rating. One note: you do have to seam seal the fly yourself. This may come as a surprise to some, but it’s a 10-minute job.

Macpac’s well-regarded Torrentwear XP tub floor is featured in the Microlight, and is a 70-denier nylon (with polyurethane coating) that touts a 10,000mm HH rating. In layman’s terms: it is thick enough to not need a separate footprint underneath to protect the tent floor. Add in beefy 9.6mm DAC Featherlite pole and you can see why Macpac is confident in rating it as a four-season shelter.

The tent inner includes a double-door for more ventilation and this latest incarnation of the Microlight has added more mesh to the inner for better air-movement, in combo with the four vents. The single vestibule is not huge (area: 1.2m²), but adequate enough for a backpack and boots. Weight is 1.6kg. Yes, that may seem ‘heavy’ for a one-person tent, but don’t forget this tent is rated for four seasons, so is designed to withstand torrential rain and heavy winds, and even stand up to the occasional dump of snow.

In the field

We’ve had the Microlight on test for five months. During this period, it has been used for mainly overnight/weekend solo escapes, as well as double-duty as my car-camping shelter on a vehicle test. 

Setting up the Microlight is incredibly quick when you keep the inner attached to the outer fly; thread through the single pole, stake out with pegs and guy-ropes, and it is done. You do have to make sure you align its ridgeline with wind direction, but once it is tied down, it is very stable. It’s worth noting this is not a free-standing tent, which can lead to some challenges when you’re trying to camp on a rock shelf, for example. 

Macpac has done a good job of ensuring the Microlight offers ventilation where it can but you will, on very humid nights, notice it is warm and there was some condensation, albeit minimal. The vents and additional mesh keep it comfortable in cooler conditions, and on a few steamy summer nights it was set up inner-only and worked well. 

The final word on the Macpac Microlight

For solo adventurers after for that ‘one shelter’ to keep them safe and protected, it is hard to go past the Microlight. Yes, it is heavier than some (albeit three-season) single-person tents; yes, it is up there in price (become a Macpac Club member and it is notably cheaper). But, its versatility in setup, robust construction and track record for long service life offset those. And just think, in 10 years’ time, when you’re stuck inside the Microlight in a roaring winter thunderstorm snug and safe, you’ll be congratulating yourself on that bang for your bucks purchase you made.
RRP: $700 (Sale price $470) See Macpac for this and other models in its hiking tent range.

The post Macpac Microlight hiking tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The OZtrail Big Boy follows a pretty standard camp chair, but with a few very positive caveats. The fold-in/compressed style of the chair is welcome, due to the fact that, when packed down, the chair is not as big as you’d think (packed dimensions are 100cm x 18cm x 18cm). Another positive is the 5kg weight –this is impressive because that weight allows all but the smallest camper to lug the chair around. That 5kg is utilised well by OZtrail’s designers, too, as they have used 22mm high-tensile steel tubing in the chair’s frame. This adds strength to the chair and also means the Big Boy’ can live up to its moniker by offering a maximum occupant weight of 220kg. 

For most campers, who won’t be anywhere near that weight, this – combined with three additional cross-braced front and side hubs – brings assurance of the chair’s longevity, stability when loaded with an occupant. It also means the chair can withstand the not-always gentle treatment camping gear cops when out and about (and when stored in your vehicle). 

Further boosting the overall impression of toughness is the double-layer ripstop polyester fabric, featured here in a hefty 600-denier (D) weight for increased abrasion resistance. Other nifty features include the fact the seat height is 46cm off the ground (ideal height for anyone from 10-year-olds and up), there’s a large, insulated drink holder/cooler (yes!), and a side organiser and separate mesh pocket. Colour options are navy blue or a grey/back.  

In the field

We’ve had the OZtrail Big Boy in our gear shed for a few months now and it’s seen plenty of use on weekend and overnight camping trips. The chair has been very easy to pack, whether in a 4WD ute, wagon or a station wagon, and it is also very easy (and fast) to set up when at camp. All the hinged points and hubs appear over-engineered to cope with rugged treatment and all of them work smoothly – there’s no ‘catching’ or resistance during the set-up process. The chair has been used by testers of varying heights and weights, and all have reported being comfortable, with ease of egress a noted positive; there’s nothing worse than being ‘sunk in’ a camp chair and not being able to lift yourself out. The seat base is very supportive, and the padding used throughout is not too little or too much. The bottle opener has also been a highlight but probably one of the biggest – and often overlooked, until it is too late – is the roomy storage bag. This is made with 150D polyester and, thanks to its generous space, makes removing and storing the folded-up chair a straightforward (read: no trying squeeze in) packing. It sounds like a small point, but there’s nothing worse when packing up camp to have to try and jam a chair back into a bag that is really too small. 

The OZtrail Big Boy: the final word

It’d be easy to say this chair is ‘just a camp chair’ but that would be to ignore the thoughtful design points – all of which make for an easier user experience, not to mention comfort – that the Big Boy includes. The robustness of the chair, along with the welcome features, ease of set-up and packing away, and okay packed size, combine with the appealing price to make the OZtrail Big Boy camp chair a fantastic option for all campers, whether you’re a few-times-year camper, or the full-bore outback explorer. 
RRP: $105 See OZtrail for this and its complete camp chair range

The post OZtrail Big Boy Camp Chair: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

The Ford Ranger FX4 MAX is a new model in the extensive Ford Ranger line-up that goes from the basic tradie models through to the desert-track-storming Ranger Raptor, with its supple, desert-racing focused suspension system. The FX4 MAX sits above the most popular Ranger model – the XLT – and the second-from-top Wildtrak variant, with its more luxurious bent (the Raptor is the top-spec Ranger). 

The FX4 MAX offers a little bit of the Raptor’s sublime off-road performance, as it uses similar monotube Fox shocks to those in the Raptor but misses out on the wider track and coil-based rear suspension. The FX4 MAX has raised suspension and beefier, tougher all-terrain 32-inch tyres (more on this later). It combines this with leaf-springs at the rear (with a staggered shock arrangement for better load management) for a 981kg payload and towing figure of 3500kg, to meet the demands of serious off-road tourers who, literally, often bring the kitchen sink along with everything else on their around-Oz adventurers. This is, however, also good news for outdoor enthusiasts; a Raptor-esque off-road ride (read: more supple/comfortable over bumpy/rougher terrain), combined with the ability to load the FX4 MAX with pretty much ALL the gear you wish to take with you, makes it an appealing compromise.

The FX4 MAX is powered by a 157kW/500Nm 2.0-litre bi-turbo four-cylinder diesel engine, backed by a 10-speed automatic transmission, and includes a dual-range transfer case for 4WD duties. As mentioned earlier, the FX4 MAX suspension setup (developed and tuned here in Australia) is unique in the Ranger line-up. It offers 20mm more height than standard and combines with the beefier (and taller; by 11mm) BFGoodrich All-terrain KO2 tyres (wrapped around 17×8.0-inch alloy wheels, with a 42mm positive offset) to provide a total lift in ground clearance of 31mm over the standard Ranger. Overall ground clearance is 256mm and, when combined with those long-travel coil springs at the front and re-tuned rear leaf springs, it makes relatively easy work of gnarly terrain. Wading depth is 800mm but be aware that the air intake on the 2.0-litre engine is facing forward just above the front grille. For anyone looking at destinations that involve a few water crossings, we’d recommend fitment of a snorkel, for that additional assurance.

The interior of any Ranger is a nice place to spend time driving long distances; switchgear is close to hand, the SYNC3 infotainment system is straightforward to use (it includes Apple CarPlay/Android Auto, as well as GPS), and there are a few USB ports dotted around the cabin (as well as 12V ones and a 240AC outlet). The seats in the FX4 MAX are all manually-operated (a bit odd in this price bracket), but easy to use. One negative: there are no aircon vents for second row occupants.

There are numerous safety features, including AEB with Pedestrian Detection, Lane Keep Assist, a reverse camera, front/rear parking sensors, tyre pressure management, auto headlights and plenty more. The FX4 MAX has a five year, unlimited kilometre warranty, with 12-month (15,000km – whichever is first) service intervals. Options include a Tech Pack (Semi-Auto Active Park Assist and Adaptive Cruise Control are included), Prestige Paint and a decal set (as seen here).

In the field

The loan of the FX4 MAX coincided with a planned weekend away in Deua National Park, in southern NSW. This national park’s steep, rugged tracks –  and a few water-crossings – were a great test of how this vehicle works when used as intended. The rear tub easily held all our gear for the trip but, if we owned this vehicle ourselves, we’d fit a canopy for additional storage space, and protection of gear. The FX4 MAX includes a ute-bed liner as standard, which was appreciated when loading as there were no fears of scratching the paint underneath when dragging gear around. The four tie-down points are not in ideal positions (halfway up the ute tray sides on each corner; ideally, you want tie-down points at the base of the tray for easier securing of gear). There is also a 12V power outlet in the tray.

Related: Outback Travel: The Ultimate Family Guide

The road trip south, down the Princes Highway to Deua National Park, was a doddle. The ride comfort was very good for a dual-cab ute, while that 2.0-litre bi-turbo engine rumbled along quietly (the engine is quiet from the inside and the expected hum from those chunky tyres didn’t eventuate), drawing on its ample low-down torque to ascend steep hills and maintain a suitable cruising speed. Speaking of those tyres, they were well in their element once we entered the dirt tracks of the national park, offering ample and reliable traction throughout.

The only bugbear when driving off-road is the 10-speed auto’s reticence to stay in a particular gear before lurching into the higher ratio; it got to the stage you were bracing yourself in anticipation. Still, even this slight annoyance didn’t affect overall off-road performance. The FX4 MAX includes hill descent control but we found little need of it even on the long descents thanks to the engine braking.

Combined fuel consumption is claimed at 7.0 litres/100km but, as with any manufacturer’s ‘official’ figures, you’ll struggle to get near that in general touring conditions. The 80-litre tank is okay but, if you have remote touring intentions, we’d be looking at fitment of a long-range tank. Or you could make the most of that impressive payload capacity and just pack a few extra jerry cans in the rear tray.

The final word on the Ford Ranger FX4 MAX

For those looking for that ideal ‘adventure vehicle’ the Ford Ranger FX4 MAX offers a credible case at a reasonable (for its market segment) price. The differences compared to the ‘regular’ Ranger models (excluding the Raptor) are all positives; additional ground clearance; improved ride comfort on bumpy roads and tracks. You could always buy a lower-spec Ranger and add aftermarket suspension and tyres but that’d cost close to the asking price of the FX4 MAX, and this model offers the advantage of all of that covered by a full factory warranty. 

The Ranger FX4 MAX is one of the few vehicles that you could drive straight off the showroom floor and out into the wild. If it was us, personally, we’d only pause on the way from said showroom to fit a canopy, snorkel and dual-battery system, then pack the family and all our gear before disappearing into the outback. 
RRP: $68,990 See Ford Australia for full model specifications.

The post Ford Ranger FX4 MAX: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

The sooner your young shredder is comfortable with these components, the sooner they gain confidence. To this end, a Norco Charger 2.1 lobbed in front of last year’s Christmas tree at our place, ready for our six-year-old son to rail some trails.

Design

The Norco Charger 2.1 offers a 20-inch wheel size and is aimed at children from six to nine years of age. It is relatively light in weight thanks to its alloy frame, while offering ‘full-size bike’ features, such as a low standover (so they can get their leg over the frame to sit on the seat without feeling they will over-balance) and short chainstays, for manoeuvrability. It can’t be emphasised enough the easier your child finds handling/steering their bike, the more they’ll ride.

A big plus are the proper trigger shifters for the 8-speed Shimano Altus drivetrain. Along with this are equally impressive Tektro hydraulic disc brakes (160mm rotors) and the SR Suntour XCM Air front fork, with 80mm of travel. These are all features still not common on 20-inch bikes, but are very welcome. The bike rolls on aluminium wheels, with Maxxis Maxxdaddy tyres. 

In the field

We are lucky enough to live next to one of Sydney’s most popular MTB trails that also includes fire-trails linking off it. This offers plenty of riding skills progression. Our son has taken to the bike very well; the fact it is not too heavy – and the brakes are light and easy for him to use – has instilled plenty of confidence when it comes to tackling more challenging trails. The ease-of-use (and efficiency) of the Shimano trigger-shift and drivetrain has helped him get his head around how gears work and the fact that front fork is so effective at reducing bumps has been, to him, a wonder (his previous bike had a rigid front fork). The fork, combined with a short stem and wide handlebars, has provided confidence to lift up/over gutters, as well as try small jumps. 

The bike has been treated as any child’s bike is: put away dirty more often than not, and already subject to one small crash (bike and rider unscathed), plus it has been ridden quite often in muddy, wet conditions. The overall robustness has stood out throughout, with additional things, such as an internal-sealed headset and sealed bearing bottom bracket helping keep grit, mud and muck out. 

The final word on the Norco Charger 2.1

The Norco Charger 2.1 has been a huge hit. The compact frame, brakes and gearing designed specifically for small hands and legs, and things like the front fork and (again) those disc brakes, all make for a bike that has increased our young rider’s confidence immensely. The asking price is definitely up there for a ‘kids’ bike’ that will be ridden for around three years, but it is worth noting how much confidence a well-designed bike can give a budding young rider (for more on how to learn to mountain bike, see here). Plus, the spec list – hydraulic disc brakes, full Shimano drivetrain and shifters, and that supportive front fork – are a big step above ‘standard fare’ on other 20-inch bikes. Those higher-end components should see the Charger 2.1 remain in very good condition, ensuring a still-decent price when the time comes to sell it second-hand to another up-and-coming young shredder.

RRP: $899 See Norco for more info on the Charger and the brand’s other kids/youth bikes.

The post Norco Charger 2.1 Kids MTB: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

I’ve had my fair share of good and bad experiences when it comes to carrying heavy loads over multiple days, in all types of terrain and all types of weather. I’ll even admit I own a notebook with sketches and diagrams of ‘the perfect pack’ drawn out during rainy nights in tents or snowed-in days in mountain huts.  

Fortunately, Osprey’s near-50 years of designing backpacks has put it in good stead to nullify most of my regular complaints, and I have a suspicion their designers might have stolen a few ideas from my notebook for the all-new Osprey Aether Plus 85.

The design

First, let’s cut to the chase. At nearly 2.9 kilograms the Osprey Aether Plus 85 is no lightweight. It weighs in on the heftier side of the trekking pack scales, where most packs aim below 2.5kg. Importantly however, the 210D high-tenacity nylon fabric is extremely durable and the Aether cuts no corners with features. It is designed to carry large loads over long distances and is built accordingly.

Before you gram-counters throw your arms in the air, take note. The Aether carries its weight well. In fact, it carries all weight well, remarkably well… up to 30kg (or more) of wellness to be specific. It might be 300g heavier than some counterparts, but it carries 300g lighter.

All versions of the Aether come with a LightWire aluminium alloy peripheral frame to transfer the load to its hefty lumbar pad and hip belt. The frame is accompanied by Osprey’s Airscape back panel – a moulded frame of dye-cut foam and mesh for ventilation. The men’s Aether comes in four volumes, 60L, 70L, 85L and 100L, with each pack offering two torso lengths. The identically designed women’s Ariel pack offers a female specific harness in three volumes, 60L, 70L and 85L, and two torso lengths. Shoulder straps, hip belt and sternum strap (with whistle) are well padded and easily adjusted, with two easy-to-access buckles. Osprey’s ‘fit on the fly’ fine tuning then offers further tweaking of shoulder and waist padding placement to ensure a perfect customised fit.

In the field

Once perfect fit is attained, there’s a multitude of features to explore. A removable Daylid turns the lid into a daypack. We were pleasantly surprised with capacity and comfort when we used the Daylid for a full day mountain biking.

With the Daylid removed or wide open, the Aether’s ease of accessibility is evident. Acting as a regular top loader, the pack offers one-handed (and glove friendly) quick-pull drawstring access. A large zipped front flap gives access to the main compartment and a bottom ‘sleeping bag’ zip allows entry to the internal base of the pack.

If you’re a pocket addict, don’t be deterred, this mothership offers nine pockets in total. Two oversized zippered pockets in the lid, two large zippered front pockets (that fit a one litre water bottle easily, or crampons) an elasticated ‘Shovit’ pocket (great for a downie or shell) and dual zippered hip belt pockets large enough for phone, scroggin and most importantly, multiple double packs of Don Hot Salami Donskis. Two stretch mesh side water bottle pockets are on hand (can access bottle when on the move) along with an internal hydration reservoir pocket in case you eat too many of those hot Donskis. Oh, and there’s even a sneaky hidden pocket for the accompanying rain cover.

Once loaded up, there’s plenty of external strap action to cinch it all in. Dual upper and lower side compression straps accompany dual two-piece front panel compression straps. There are removable sleeping pad straps (they like to catch on undergrowth so being removable is a bonus) and even dual ice axe loops for those going Arctic. The hood also offers lash points perfect for custom helmet stash. If you’re a trekking pole lover, the left shoulder strap offers a stow-on-the-go trekking pole attachment.

The final word on the Osprey Aether Plus 85

With all the above in mind it’s hard to find a missed trick in the Aether Plus 85. We could be forgiven for suggesting it’s a perfect pack…but it’s not.

The Aether Plus 85 is not only weighty in grams but in price. Getting super picky; the nicety of unobtrusive buckles is offset by the frustration of finding them. The shoulder strap ladder-lock buckles lack thumb tabs and are difficult to loosen unless you have tiny gremlin-fingers. 

Overall, though, it is hard to fault the Osprey Aether Plus 85. While it might set you back a decent chunk of change, you’ll be at ease with the knowledge you have one of the most comfortable, impeccably designed and feature-rich trekking packs available today – and one that’s likely to be lugging heavy loads for you many years later.

RRP: $539 See Osprey Australia for more info and stockists.

The post Osprey Aether Plus 85: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

This kit is perfect for one person and is also big enough in the field for two. It has a 1.2-litre hard anodised aluminium insulated grip pot, large enough to easily boil water for two pouched meals. If two’s company, the kit comes with a hot and cold 28oz bowl and strainer lid, making meals easy to share.

Where this stove kit stands out from the competition, is in the quality and design of its burner – a burner which is pressure-regulated. It can maintain a fast boil in hot or cold weather conditions, even if you are running low on fuel. ‘Fast-boil’ means about three and a half minutes to boil a litre of water, and with the MSR IsoPro 8oz fuel canister (sold separately) you have approximately an hour of burn time. So, you’ll have plenty of meals and adventures before you are looking at a replacing your fuel.

In the field

Assembling the stove is as simple as screwing the burner into your canister and unfolding the three supporting legs, and with the burner also boasting a reliable Piezo ignitor and easy-to-adjust flame adjuster, you can be set up and cooking dinner with a few minutes of unpacking your bags. One other stand-out design feature that worked well during testing was the large burner; the larger heat-surface means you can more easily adjust the flame for more effective simmering and cooking in general.

The inside of the pot is non-stick and wipes clean. The pot’s circumference (wide enough to get your hand into the bottom of it) makes cleaning it after you’ve cooked, super-easy. Once packed up and all back together, this whole kit weighs 371g – nice and light in weight and easily stored in my bikepacking bag underneath my saddle.

The final word on the MSR PocketRocket Deluxe Stove Kit

It’s no secret that MSR is a company that creates reliable outdoor products to be put to the test in the hardest conditions, and that is mirrored here with this product. For something that could feel fiddly and flexible in your hands, this is far from it. The MSR PocketRocket Deluxe Stove Kit has been designed to be thrown into your backpack, ready to use in rain, wind or shine with its pressurised powerful flame. Yes, this has a reasonably hefty price-tag – and yes, you could find cheaper – but I would question if a cheaper unit would be as reliable or effective as MSR’s all-in-one mini powerhouse.

RRP: $299 See Spelean for stockists and more info on the PocketRocket Deluxe and other MSR stoves.

The post MSR PocketRocket Deluxe Stove Kit: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Design

You’d think there are only so many variations on a theme when it comes to designing a family tent but, reflecting how long OZtrail has been producing reliable tents, it has come up with something unique yet again with its highly-regarded Fast Frame Lumos tent series, available in this six-person (6P) capacity, as well as a 10P and 12P. The Fast Frame Lumos 6P weighs 18kg and has a relatively spacious floor, measuring 3000mm wide and 2800mm deep. So yeah, fitting six would be a squeeze, but it can be done. For a family of four or five, it’d be perfect. Impressively, the tent has a roof-height of 1950mm, meaning all but the tallest campers can stand up comfortably inside. 

The ‘Fast Frame’ moniker comes courtesy of its twin-hubbed internal frame that is designed to offer a quick set-up of the inner tent. All the internal poles – and all but two of the external poles – are robust aluminium, which adds confidence in the tent’s durability. The two fibreglass poles included are used as cross poles for the front and rear vestibules, and the way these are designed means the poles need that inherent flex that fibreglass provides to ensure they work effectively to support that part of the tent.

The smart and robust theme continues with the inner tent’s floor, which is heavy-duty PVC coated Polyoxford vinyl, that is tape seam-sealed and features a bathtub-style design. This means the joining stitch-line between the main tent body and the floor is well above ground level, eliminating any chance of water ingress in that area. The outer fly is 3000mm waterhead-rated polyester (ripstop). 

OZtrail paid plenty of attention to addressing condensation when designing the Lumos 6P. It has myriad ventilation points, with large front and rear doors (with No See-um mesh), and two large windows (one each side) that have an outer rain cover that can be pegged out with guy ropes in rainy weather. There are also four mesh panels in the roof and two of OZtrail’s new ClimaTech vents down low, ensuring full air circulation through the tent. One final assistance to controlling condensation is the generous space between tent inner and outer fly, for even more airflow.

Another new technology OZtrail has incorporated into the Fast Frame Lumos tent range is the inbuilt LED lighting, that runs along the top frame section (the three settings are Night, at 35 lumens; Medium at 300L and High at 750L), with switches on the inside and outside of the tent.. It sounds a gimmick until you realise how well it integrates with even more new tech, in the form of the BlockOut coating on the inside of the outer fly. This black coating is claimed to reduce interior light by up to 95 per cent, and interior temps by a claimed 10 degrees. After testing the tent, we can affirm it is no gimmick – and offers surprising advantages, such as ensuring the kids don’t wake up right on sunrise.

In the field with the OZtrail Lumos 6P

The OZtrail Fast Frame Lumos 6P tent has been tested for a month now and has impressed in a number of ways. Firstly, the setup is very fast – as in, the inner tent is up and ready to go in less than a minute, thanks to that clever hubbed frame system. The outer fly does take a bit longer but that is due to the fact it has so many connected points to the frame – a very good thing in windy conditions. These include numerous Velcro tabs that connect to the inner frame, the usual buckles that secure the outer fly to the base of the tent, and a welcome overload of guy-rope tie-downs. You could, in calm conditions, have the full tent set up and ready for occupants in around five to 10 minutes at most. We’d highly recommend taking a few more minutes to take advantage of those guy-ropes; not only does that enhance stability for the tent, but also ensures the ClimaTech vents operate most effectively. The two large side-windows also have guy ropes so you can secure their rain covers out from the window, allowing them to stay open in rainy weather.

During testing the other things noticed – besides the fast setup – were excellent ventilation, the nifty interior light, that ‘dark’ interior, courtesy of the BlockOut tech, and the large storage pocket. Also, worth noting is the front awning. In fine weather, we could store most of our gear out there. This did bring to our attention the fact that vestibule area itself (when the awning is zipped down) is not as big as we’d like. Having said that, with our family of four, the additional floorspace inside meant that we could store gear in there without cramping our sleeping area. The only other (very) minor point is that due to its internal-frame construction, the tent packs up relatively long (dimensions: 1150mm long, 220mm wide; 220mm tall), so you might need to be innovative with your packing regime. It’s no deal-breaker.

The OZtrail Lumos 6P: The final word

The OZtrail Fast Frame Lumos 6P tent packs plenty of innovation, new tech and general robustness into its 18kg. Often, ‘new tech’ in outdoor gear can be poorly executed, but in the case of this tent, it is the exact opposite: the BlockOut coating is a great idea that works very well; the internal frame setup is fast; the ClimaTech vents work very well; overall construction seems high; and nifty things like the integrated LED lighting do add convenience. In short, and especially when you take into account its price, the OZtrail Fast Frame Lumos 6P is incredible value for what it offers.

RRP: $700 See OZtrail for more info.

The post OZtrail Fast Frame Lumos 6P tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.

Happily, iconic Kiwi outdoor brand, Macpac, has mastered the art of colour coordination and when assembling the Solstice 6P tent (part of the company’s Solstice range, which also includes a 4P and 8P variant) , there is zero room for error or debate as it is supremely obvious exactly what goes where. In fact, it’s so easy and obvious, it almost feels like you must have done something wrong… 

Design

The one thing that seems to be common across every tent that exists, is that they never actually sleep the number of people they say they do. Maybe with the exception of one-person (1P) tents. The Solstice is ‘technically’ a 6P tent, but you’ve only got to look at the layout of the floor plan showing how they envisage fitting six people in, to know that you could fit them, but it’d be more comfy with one less. Realistically, you could comfortably chuck a couple of kids in the mix to make it a 4P fun-for-all-the-family tent, or four mates, without too much drama. (To be fair there is a disclaimer on the website stating it’s ‘comfortable for four, snug for six’.)

Good foundations are key to any house and a tent is no different. Having tried and tested a few with somewhat ropey old-school fibreglass poles recently, we were pleasantly surprised to find the Macpac Solstice comes with a set of sturdy, lightweight, and beautifully colour-coordinated aluminium poles. Setting them up and feeding them into the outer fly was quick and easy, and it’s so logical and obvious where everything goes (mainly thanks to that simple but exceptionally effective colour coordination) you barely need to look at the instructions.

The poles clip into a neat metal clasp at the base, which is simple and well designed, and once the poles are all clipped in and the outer fly erected, the numerous crossover points mean that the structure feels sturdy and secure. Admittedly we tested it in fair weather with only a gentle breeze, but it certainly feels like it would be exceptionally robust and durable even if you were braving the elements… we’d say it’s definitely a solid three-season tent, bordering on four-season.

In the field with the Macpac Solstice 6P

The tent feels nice and roomy inside and, at 1900mm, it’s a reasonable height, although the hanging inner does reduce that slightly . There’s an internal removable divider to offer ‘privacy’ and split the tent into two rooms down the middle. Although it’s not exactly a soundproof wall, it’s handy if you want to divide the tent into two bedrooms or a bedroom and a ‘living’ area.

There is a large entry way which offers some vestibule space, as well as the ability to turn the front door into an awning, with two extra poles and guy ropes included. Two additional side doors provide extra access points, which along with the large back window means there’s plenty of cross-ventilation to help reduce condensation. The vestibule space isn’t huge, and not ideal for storage as it’s directly in front of the main doors, but the awning does provide a nice front porch and some extra shade, although it doesn’t offer much in the way of protection from inclement weather, i.e., rain, if left open.  

The party trick of the Solstice, however, is the hanging inner tent design (also a feature of many of Macpac’s hiking and climbing tents, including the Olympus, reviewed here), allowing users to pitch the tent without getting the inner wet, even if it’s chucking it down with rain. The seam-sealed waterproof polyester ripstop fly is PE coated with 2000 mm hydrostatic head and the waterproof tub floor design has a dark PU coating and 5000mm hydrostatic head to keep you dry.

Once you’ve hung the mesh inner the first time (more colour coordinated fastenings make it a breeze to do so), you can leave it attached to the outer fly, making it quick to pack down and even quicker and easier to pitch next time round.  

Just like ‘the shopping channel’, there’s more: the ‘well designed’ applies to not only the main elements; it’s the extra bits and bobs that made us smile: light hooks, washing line tabs, zip access on both sides to run power in, plenty of internal storage pockets, the most stylish and durable guy rope tensioners we’ve ever encountered. Oh, and did we mention it’s REALLY well colour coordinated? It might not sound that important, but boy did it make pitching it a breeze when all the poles, sleeves and tabs all obviously and logically matched. 

The Macpac Solstice 6P: The final word

The Macpac Solstice offers a tent that’s quick and easy to pitch, waterproof, sturdy, spacious and well designed. It’s full of great features and is hard to fault. The tent is let down a ‘smidge’ (technical term) with overhead height, and we’d be keen for a larger vestibule… and if we’re picky, we’d love to see some integrated LED lighting as a finishing touch. As far as bang for your buck goes, the Solstice is up there with the best (if you’re a Macpac Club Member, it’s significantly cheaper) and delivers one of the most bombproof designs we’ve seen in a family tent.

RRP: $1400 For info on the entire Solstice range, go to Macpac.

The post Macpac Solstice 6P Family Camping Tent: Tested appeared first on Australian Geographic.